大智度論 囑累品第九十Dazhidulun — Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa · Entrustment (Chapter 90)
囑累品:佛問阿難佛是汝大師不汝是佛弟子不,阿難答佛是我大師脩伽陀是我大師我是佛弟子,佛印可而告以弟子所應作者汝已作竟,復告我滅度後當以愛敬供養供給我者愛敬供養般若波羅蜜、乃至第二第三以般若波羅蜜囑累汝、汝莫忘莫失莫作最後斷種人、隨爾所時般若在世當知爾所時有佛在世說法、若有書般若受持讀誦正憶念為人廣說恭敬尊重讚歎種種供養者當知是人不離見佛不離聞法常親近佛,末以彌勒等諸菩薩摩訶薩及慧命須菩提等大弟子并一切大眾及諸天人犍闥婆阿修羅等聞佛所說皆大歡喜收;論主釋佛已斷法愛何以種種因緣囑累是法、何以以般若囑累聲聞阿難而不囑累彌勒等大菩薩、法華等諸餘方等經何以囑累喜王諸菩薩、更有何法甚深勝般若而以般若囑累阿難而餘經囑累菩薩、先見阿閦佛品中囑累與今囑累有何等異、若囑累何以乃爾慇懃鄭重、佛知阿難是弟子何以故問汝是我弟子不、般若是諸佛師而阿難何以不恭敬其師而恭敬佛、一囑累則足何以至三、先品既明般若說亦不增不說亦不減今何以言莫令斷滅、有人重罪三不善業成就聽受書持般若云何得不離諸佛、諸大阿羅漢已證實際無復憂喜何以大歡喜、佛囑累阿難般若而阿難共大迦葉結集三藏此中何以不說,末以究摩羅耆婆法師出此釋論始末之跋文收(經+論)
這是全論的最後一品。佛要走了,要把一部書交給一個人——而開口第一句不是交代法,是問名分:「於汝意云何?佛是汝大師不?汝是佛弟子不?」阿難答:「世尊!佛是我大師,脩伽陀是我大師,我是佛弟子。」佛這才印可:「我是汝大師,汝是我弟子。」論主解得極實,這一問不是客套:佛座下確有為求別事而來的人,「佛有惡弟子須那剎多羅等」,「又如須尸摩為盜法故作弟子。如是等,是名字弟子。」外人也確曾疑阿難只是因為親族之故才隨侍。所以這一問的落點在後面那句——「若言是真弟子,當隨我勅。」名分不定,法就無處可付。一部百卷的論,收在這裡而不收在一段更高的義理上,用意就在這裡。
付囑的正文只是一句轉換:「我身現在,汝愛敬供養供給,心常清淨;我滅度後,是一切愛敬、供養、供給事,當愛敬、供養般若波羅蜜!」同一分恭敬,佛在時放在佛身上,佛滅後放到般若上去。論主在這裡自設一問,很順人情:般若既是諸佛之師,阿難為什麼不恭敬其師,反而恭敬佛?論主的答不避其實:「阿難雖得初道,漏未盡故,不深知法實,如佛所知。」;「般若波羅蜜微妙甚深,無形、無色,智者能知。」,「佛身相好,愚、智視之,皆無厭足,是故佛以身喻般若。」——佛身在這裡不是所敬的終點,是所敬的階:看得見的那一位,是為了把心引到看不見的那一法上去。
論主自設的第一問問得很不客氣:佛既已斷法愛,「今何以種種因緣囑累是法,似如愛著?」答有三路。一路是大悲——「諸佛大慈悲心,從初發意已來乃至到涅槃門,常不捨離。」,其極證在「於娑羅雙樹間,以金剛三昧為眾生碎身如麻米,何況經法多所饒益而不囑累!」身尚可碎,何況一句囑託。一路是受者——「譬如估客主,欲遠出他國,雖以財寶囑累於子,大價妙寶偏獨慇懃,以其子未識妙寶價重故。」慇懃之所以偏在這一物上,不是持有的人愛它,是接手的人還不識得它;而且「若聞其子讚說寶價,則不信之。」所以佛也不在別眾中自讚其法。最深的一路在中道:「佛欲現中道故囑累:先說諸法空,以遮有邊;今慇懃囑累,則破無邊,是則中道。」——說了一部書的空,若沒有這一番慇懃,人就要把空讀成斷滅;囑累的慇懃,正是另一邊的遮。至於為什麼三告而止,論主給了常法,也給了一個極平實的量度:「諸佛常法,語不過三。」,「復次,若一說,猶緩;過三,太急,似如凡夫貪著者。」
接著是全品最鋒利的一難:般若既然「說亦不增、不說亦不減,畢竟寂滅相」,那麼「譬如虛空,誰能滅者?」——說「莫令斷滅」豈不自相違?論主的答分兩層。就所囑累的說,指的是文字流通:「而文字語言書般若波羅蜜經卷,為他人說,是此中般若,於此因中而說其果。」經卷不是般若,卻是般若之因,所以於因中說果之名。就所謂滅的說,真能滅般若的從來不是外來的難:「凡人聞般若波羅蜜微妙,即生著心,取般若相,分別諸法」,「以分別故,於是法中生著心,著心故鬪諍,鬪諍故起諸罪業」,「如是人名為滅般若波羅蜜。」——滅法的人不在法外,在讀法的人心裡那一點取相。所以不滅之法也只一句:「汝當如般若波羅蜜相,莫著文字語言,教化眾生。」依般若之相而教化,才叫流通;執文字而教化,正是斷絕。與這一段相扣的是兩個喻:一個是傳下去的樣子——「汝當教化弟子,弟子復教餘人,展轉相教;譬如一燈復然餘燈,其明轉多。」;一個是傳不下去的樣子——「世人有子,若不紹繼,則名斷種,最為可恥。」,佛就用這個比方誡阿難:「汝莫於汝身上令般若斷絕!」兩件事都落在傳的人身上。
全論最後的教誡是一句判:「隨爾所時般若波羅蜜在世,當知爾所時有佛在世說法。」論主釋其所以然者二:「般若波羅蜜是諸佛母,諸佛以法為師。」,「若師在、母在,不名為失利。」;「又法寶不離佛寶。」,「菩薩有三十二相、八十隨形好,不名為佛,得法寶故名為佛。」相好不足以成佛,得法寶才成佛,所以法在,佛便在——「是故說般若在世,如佛在世,說法無異。」而這句話能不能成立,又全看接法的人是怎麼接的。論主自設一問:重罪的人也聽般若,難道也算不離見佛?論主答得很乾脆,判準不在聽,在受:「一者、但聽而不信受行,二者、聽而信受奉行。」,「若以一心聽聞,信受奉行,厭世、愛涅槃,離小乘、樂大乘——作如是聽受,是名真聽。」與此相續的是正憶念的訓——「正憶念,隨如佛意,離有無二邊,行於中道。」正憶念不是記誦,是中道行。
末番問答補足了反面:般若既然這樣重,結集三藏的時候為什麼不收?論主的答不在貶三藏,在明其量與其機——「摩訶衍甚深難信、難解難行。」;「三藏正有三十萬偈,并為九百六十萬言。」,而摩訶衍無量無限,所以「云何可入三藏中?小物應在大中,大物不得入小。」若要問,該倒過來問:「小乘何以不在摩訶衍中?」——「摩訶衍能兼小乘法故,是故不應如汝所問。」而二者的味本來是一:「佛法皆是一種一味,所謂苦盡解脫味。」其異只在「一者、但自為身,二者、兼為一切眾生。」
品的最末,忽然換了一種文體。「究摩羅耆婆法師,以秦弘始三年歲在辛丑十二月二十日至長安」,「四年夏,於逍遙園中西門閣上為姚天王出此釋論,七年十二月二十七日乃訖。」那是譯場的記事——哪一年到,在哪裡譯,譯了多久,同時還出了哪些經律論。其下更自陳這部書的體例:「論初品三十四卷,解釋一品,是全論具本;二品已下,法師略之,取其足以開釋文意而已,不復備其廣釋。」,末了一句是「得此百卷,若盡出之,將十倍於此。」——一部講般若的論,最後一行留下的不是一句玄言,是一筆帳:我們手上這一百卷,只是原書的十分之一。前面剛說完「有般若在世,則為佛在」,後面緊接著就是這一筆帳;那一句教誡因此落到極實處——法要在世,先得有人肯譯、肯傳、肯讀,而且是不著文字地讀。
This is the last chapter of the whole treatise. The Buddha is about to go, and is to hand a book over to one person—and the first words out of his mouth are not instructions about the Dharma, but a question about standing: ‘What do you think? Is the Buddha your great teacher? Are you the Buddha's disciple?’ Ānanda answers: ‘World-Honored One! The Buddha is my great teacher, the Sugata is my great teacher; I am the Buddha's disciple.’ Only then does the Buddha confirm it: ‘I am your great teacher; you are my disciple.’ The treatise-author explains this with the utmost concreteness; this question is no courtesy: under the Buddha's seat there really were people who came seeking other things, ‘the Buddha had evil disciples, Sunakṣatra and others’, ‘and again Susīma became a disciple in order to steal the Dharma. Such as these are named disciples in name.’ Outsiders too had indeed suspected that Ānanda attended the Buddha only because of kinship. So the point of this question lands on the sentence that follows—‘if you say you are a true disciple, you should follow my command.’ If the standing is not settled, the Dharma has nowhere to be entrusted. That a treatise of a hundred fascicles is gathered in here and not in some higher passage of doctrine, the intent lies exactly here.
The proper text of the entrustment is only one sentence of transfer: ‘While my body is present, you love, revere, make offerings to, and provide for it, and your mind is always pure; after my passing into extinction, all this loving, revering, making offerings, and providing you should turn to loving, revering, and making offerings to prajñāpāramitā!’ One and the same portion of reverence: while the Buddha is here, it is placed on the Buddha's body; after the Buddha's extinction, it is placed on prajñā. The treatise-author here sets himself a question that follows human feeling closely: since prajñā is the teacher of the buddhas, why does Ānanda not revere that teacher, and instead revere the Buddha? The treatise-author's answer does not avoid the fact: ‘Though Ānanda has obtained the first path, because his outflows are not yet exhausted he does not deeply know the reality of dharmas as the Buddha knows it’; ‘prajñāpāramitā is subtle and very deep, without shape, without form; the wise can know it’, ‘the Buddha's body with its marks and minor signs, whether the foolish or the wise look at it, none is ever satisfied; therefore the Buddha uses his body as a simile for prajñā.’—The Buddha's body here is not the end-point of what is revered but the step toward it: the one who can be seen is for leading the mind on to the one dharma that cannot be seen.
The first question the treatise-author sets himself is asked very bluntly: since the Buddha has already severed love of dharmas, ‘why now, by all kinds of causes and conditions, does he entrust this Dharma, as if in love and clinging?’ The answer takes three roads. One road is great compassion—‘the mind of great kindness and compassion of the buddhas, from the first arousing of intent until arriving at the gate of nirvāṇa, is never abandoned’, and its utmost proof lies in ‘between the twin śāla trees, by the vajra samādhi he broke his body into pieces like hemp seeds and rice for the sake of beings; how much more would he entrust the sūtra-dharma, which enriches so many!’ If even the body can be broken, how much more one entrusting word. One road is the recipient—‘just as a merchant chief, about to go far away to another country, though he entrusts his wealth and jewels to his son, is specially and earnestly insistent about the precious jewels of great price, because his son does not yet know how heavy their price is.’ That the earnest insistence falls specially on this one thing is not because the holder loves it, but because the one taking it over does not yet recognise it; moreover ‘if others were to hear his son praise the price of the jewels, they would not believe it.’ So the Buddha too does not praise his own Dharma before other assemblies. The deepest road is in the middle way: ‘The Buddha, wishing to show the middle way, entrusts: first he taught that dharmas are empty, to block the extreme of existence; now he earnestly entrusts, and this refutes the extreme of non-existence; this then is the middle way.’—Having taught a whole book of emptiness, without this earnest insistence people would read emptiness as annihilation; the earnestness of the entrustment is precisely the blocking of the other extreme. As for why he stops after three tellings, the treatise-author gives the constant rule, and also a measure of the plainest kind: ‘The constant way of the buddhas is that their speech does not exceed three’, ‘again, if said once, it is still too slack; beyond three, too urgent, like an ordinary person who craves and clings.’
Next comes the sharpest difficulty of the whole chapter: since prajñā ‘is not increased by being taught nor decreased by not being taught, having the mark of ultimate quiescent extinction’, then ‘like space, who could extinguish it?’—is saying ‘do not let it be cut off and extinguished’ not self-contradictory? The treatise-author's answer is in two layers. As to what is entrusted, it refers to the circulation of the written word: ‘and the scrolls of the prajñāpāramitā sūtra written in letters and words, taught to others, are the prajñā here; its result is spoken of within this cause.’ The scroll is not prajñā, yet it is the cause of prajñā, so within the cause the name of the fruit is spoken. As to what is called extinguishing, what can truly extinguish prajñā was never a difficulty from outside: ‘ordinary people, hearing that prajñāpāramitā is subtle, at once give rise to a clinging mind, grasp at the mark of prajñā, and discriminate dharmas’, ‘because of discriminating, within this dharma they give rise to a clinging mind; because of the clinging mind, fighting and strife; because of fighting and strife, they raise up all sinful deeds’, ‘such people are named those who extinguish prajñāpāramitā.’—The one who extinguishes the Dharma is not outside the Dharma; he is that speck of grasping at marks in the mind of the one who reads the Dharma. So the dharma of not extinguishing too is only one sentence: ‘You should, in accordance with the marks of prajñāpāramitā, not cling to letters and words, and teach and transform beings.’ To teach and transform in accordance with the marks of prajñā alone is called circulation; to teach and transform while grasping the letters is precisely cutting it off. Linked to this passage are two similes: one is the look of what is passed on—‘you should teach and transform disciples, and the disciples in turn teach others, teaching one another in turn; just as one lamp lights other lamps, and its light grows ever more’; one is the look of what is not passed on—‘when people of the world have sons, if they do not continue the line, it is named cutting off the lineage, the greatest shame’, and the Buddha uses this comparison to warn Ānanda: ‘Do not let prajñā be cut off in your person!’ Both things fall upon the one who passes it on.
The last admonition of the whole treatise is one pronouncement: ‘For so long a time as prajñāpāramitā is in the world, know that for so long a time there is a Buddha in the world teaching the Dharma.’ The treatise-author explains the reasons for this as two: ‘prajñāpāramitā is the mother of the buddhas; the buddhas take the Dharma as their teacher’, ‘if the teacher is present and the mother is present, it is not named losing the benefit’; ‘again, the Dharma Jewel is not apart from the Buddha Jewel’, ‘a bodhisattva with the thirty-two marks and the eighty minor marks is not named Buddha; because he obtains the Dharma Jewel he is named Buddha.’ Marks and minor signs do not suffice to make a Buddha; obtaining the Dharma Jewel makes a Buddha; so when the Dharma is present the Buddha is present—‘therefore it is said that prajñā being in the world is like the Buddha being in the world teaching the Dharma, with no difference.’ And whether this sentence can stand again depends wholly on how the one who receives the Dharma receives it. The treatise-author sets himself a question: people of heavy sin also hear prajñā; does that too count as not being apart from seeing the Buddha? The treatise-author answers very crisply; the criterion is not in hearing but in receiving: ‘first, those who only hear and do not believe, receive, and practise; second, those who hear and believe, receive, and carry it out’, ‘if one hears with one mind, believes, receives, and carries it out, grows weary of the world and loves nirvāṇa, leaves the Small Vehicle and delights in the Great Vehicle—to hear and receive thus is named true hearing.’ Continuous with this is the instruction on right recollection—‘rightly recollect, following the Buddha's intent, parting from the two extremes of existence and non-existence, practising the middle way.’ Right recollection is not memorising and reciting; it is the practice of the middle way.
The final round of question and answer fills in the reverse side: since prajñā is so weighty, why was it not included when the three baskets were compiled? The treatise-author's answer is not to belittle the three baskets but to make clear their measure and their occasion—‘the Mahāyāna is very deep, hard to believe, hard to understand, hard to practise’; ‘the three baskets have exactly three hundred thousand verses, making nine million six hundred thousand words’, while the Mahāyāna is immeasurable and unlimited, so ‘how could it enter into the three baskets? A small thing should be within a great one; a great thing cannot enter a small one.’ If one must ask, one should ask the other way round: ‘why is the Small Vehicle not within the Mahāyāna?’—‘because the Mahāyāna can include the dharma of the Small Vehicle, therefore one should not ask as you do.’ And the flavour of the two is from the first one: ‘the Buddha-dharma is all of one kind and one flavour, namely the flavour of liberation that is the exhaustion of suffering.’ Their difference lies only in ‘first, being only for one's own person; second, being also for all beings.’
At the very end of the chapter the kind of writing suddenly changes. ‘The Dharma master Kumārajīva, in the third year of Hongshi of the Qin, the year xinchou, on the twentieth day of the twelfth month, arrived at Chang'an’, ‘in the summer of the fourth year, in the upper storey of the western gate in the Xiaoyao Garden, he brought out this Expository Treatise for the Heavenly King Yao, and on the twenty-seventh day of the twelfth month of the seventh year it was finished.’ That is the record of the translation hall—in what year he arrived, where he translated, how long he translated, and what other sūtras, Vinaya, and treatises he brought out at the same time. Below it states further the pattern of this book: ‘The treatise's first chapter, thirty-four fascicles, explains one chapter, and is the full complete text of the treatise; from the second chapter onward the Dharma master abridged it, taking what sufficed to open up and explain the meaning of the text, and no longer providing its full extended explanation’, and the last sentence is ‘we obtained these hundred fascicles; were it brought out in full, it would be ten times this.’—A treatise that speaks of prajñā leaves in its last line not a mysterious saying but an account: the hundred fascicles in our hands are only a tenth of the original book. Just before, it had finished saying ‘when prajñā is in the world, it is as if the Buddha is in the world’, and immediately after comes this account; that admonition thereby lands in the most concrete of places—for the Dharma to be in the world, there must first be someone willing to translate, willing to pass on, willing to read, and to read without clinging to the letters.
卷100 〔T25 0753c28〕
大智度論釋囑累品第九十 【經】 爾時,佛告阿難:「於汝意云何?佛是汝大師〔T25 0754a〕不?汝是佛弟子不?」 阿難言:「世尊!佛是我大師,脩伽陀是我大師,我是佛弟子。」 佛言:「如是!如是!我是汝大師,汝是我弟子。若如弟子所應作者,汝已作竟。阿難!汝用身、口、意慈業供養供給我,亦常如我意,無有違失。阿難!我身現在,汝愛敬供養供給,心常清淨;我滅度後,是一切愛敬、供養、供給事,當愛敬、供養般若波羅蜜!乃至第二、第三,以般若波羅蜜囑累汝。阿難!汝莫忘莫失,莫作最後斷種人!阿難!隨爾所時般若波羅蜜在世,當知爾所時有佛在世說法。阿難!若有書般若波羅蜜,受持、讀、誦、正憶念、為人廣說,恭敬、尊重、讚歎,華香、幡蓋、寶衣、燈燭種種供養,當知是人不離見佛、不離聞法、常親近佛。」 佛說般若波羅蜜已,彌勒等諸菩薩摩訶薩、慧命須菩提、舍利弗、大目犍連、摩訶迦葉、富樓那彌多隷耶尼子、摩訶俱絺羅、摩訶迦旃延、阿難等,并一切大眾,及一切世間諸天、人、犍闥婆、阿修羅等,聞佛所說,皆大歡喜。 【論】 問曰: 佛已斷法愛,乃至一切種智、涅槃,不著不取相,今何以種種因緣囑累是法,似如愛著? 答曰: 諸佛大慈悲心,從初發意已來乃至到涅槃門,常不捨離。於娑羅雙樹間,以金剛三昧為眾生碎身如麻米,何況經法多所饒益而不囑累! 又阿難是未離欲人,未盡知般若波羅蜜力勢果報多所利益,是以慇懃囑累:「汝當好受持無令忘失!」 是故佛雖於一切法無憎愛、常寂滅相,而囑累是般若。 問曰: 阿難是聲聞人,〔T25 0754b〕何以以般若波羅蜜囑累,而不囑累彌勒等大菩薩? 答曰: 有人言:阿難常侍佛左右,供給所須,得聞持陀羅尼,一聞常不失。既是佛之從弟,又多知多識,名聞廣普,四眾所依,是能隨佛轉法輪第三師。佛知舍利弗壽短早滅度故不囑累。又阿難是六神通、三明、共解脫五百阿羅漢師,能如是多所利益,是故囑累。 彌勒等諸大菩薩,佛滅度後,各各分散,至隨所應度眾生國土——彌勒還兜率天上,毘摩羅鞊、文殊師利亦至所應度眾生處。佛又以是諸菩薩深知般若波羅蜜力,不須苦囑累。 阿難是聲聞人,隨小乘法,是故佛慇懃囑累。 問曰: 若爾者,《法華經》、諸餘方等經,何以囑累喜王諸菩薩等? 答曰: 有人言:是時,佛說甚深難信之法,聲聞人不在。又如佛說《不可思議解脫經》,五百阿羅漢雖在佛邊而不聞,或時得聞而不能用。是故囑累諸菩薩。 問曰: 更有何法甚深勝般若者,而以《般若》囑累阿難,而餘經囑累菩薩? 答曰: 般若波羅蜜非祕密法。而《法華》等諸經說阿羅漢受決作佛,大菩薩能受持用;譬如大藥師能以毒為藥。 復次,如先說,般若有二種:一者、共聲聞說;二者、但為十方住十地大菩薩說,非九住所聞,何況新發意者!復有九地所聞,乃至初地所聞,各各不同。般若波羅蜜總相是一,而深淺有異,是故囑累阿難無咎。 問曰: 先〈見阿閦佛品〉中囑累,今復囑累,有何等異? 答曰: 菩薩道有二種:一者、般若波羅蜜道,二者、方便道。先囑累〔T25 0754c〕者,為說般若波羅蜜體竟;今以說令眾生得是般若方便竟,囑累。以是故,〈見阿閦佛〉後,說〈漚和拘捨羅品〉。 般若波羅蜜中雖有方便,方便中雖有般若波羅蜜,而隨多受名。般若與方便,本體是一,以所用小異故別說;譬如金師以巧方便故,以金作種種異物,雖皆是金,而各異名。 菩薩得是般若波羅蜜實相,所謂一切法性空、無所有、寂滅相,即欲滅度;以方便力故,不取涅槃證。是時,作是念:「一切法性空,涅槃亦空,我今於菩薩功德未具足,不應取證;功德具足,乃可取證。」是時,菩薩以方便力,過二地,入菩薩位;住菩薩位中,知甚深微妙無文字法,引導眾生,是名方便。 復次,有方便——菩薩知一切法畢竟空性、無所有,而能還起善法、行六波羅蜜,不隨空。若能生四種事:若疑、若邪見、若入涅槃、若作佛;以般若有如是分別,若能除邪、疑,不入涅槃,是為方便。 有人言:般若波羅蜜多所饒益,於大珍寶聚中最勝。佛知滅度後,多有怨賊欲毀壞者,品品囑累猶尚無咎,何況二處! 問曰: 若囑累,何以乃爾慇懃鄭重? 答曰: 佛隨世俗法引導眾生,譬如估客主,欲遠出他國,雖以財寶囑累於子,大價妙寶偏獨慇懃,以其子未識妙寶價重故。餘人以估客主是識寶價人而慇懃囑累,必知其貴;若聞其子讚說寶價,則不信之。佛亦如是。 復次,若於餘人異眾中讚歎般若囑累,人則譏佛自稱讚法,疑而不信;自於弟子中囑累,則〔T25 0755a〕無嫌。 復有人言:佛上品中說寂滅相無戲論,是一切智,是中無有決定法可取,則人以為無所可貴;今慇懃囑累,則知佛不著空法。一切眾生中,愛念般若無過佛者,佛知般若恩深故,貴重是般若而慇懃囑累。 有人言:佛欲現中道故囑累:先說諸法空,以遮有邊;今慇懃囑累,則破無邊,是則中道。若人謂佛貪心愛著此法,佛以種種因緣說般若波羅蜜空相;若人謂佛墮斷滅中,是故慇懃囑累。如是,則離二邊。 問曰: 佛知阿難是弟子,何以故問阿難:「汝是我弟子不?我是汝師不?」 答曰: 佛有惡弟子須那剎多羅等,有少因緣故作弟子,欲於佛所取射法,佛不為說,於是反戒言:「我非佛弟子。」又如須尸摩為盜法故作弟子。如是等,是名字弟子。 又復外道等謂阿難不得已而在佛邊——阿難曾作外道弟子,著草衣,求神仙;今以佛是其親族,尊重故給侍。 以如是等事故,於大眾中問阿難:「汝是我弟子不?」若言是真弟子,當隨我勅。 是故阿難為欲令人信故重答。 佛告阿難:「弟子所應作法,汝盡具足。」 弟子法者,所謂以善身、口、意業供給師。有弟子心好,身、口業不稱;有弟子身、口業好,而心不稱。若弟子以善心深愛樂師,身、口相稱,不惜身命、不難懃勞,自捨其心,隨師教勅——阿難盡具足此事。 佛告阿難:「汝今現在恭敬於我,我滅度後,恭敬般若,亦當如是。」 問曰: 般若是諸佛師,而阿難何以不恭敬其師,而恭敬佛? 答曰: 阿〔T25 0755b〕難雖得初道,漏未盡故,不深知法實,如佛所知。是故佛告阿難:「汝恭敬般若,如恭敬我。」 復次,眾生見佛三十二相、八十隨形好、大光明、金色身,多愛敬;般若波羅蜜微妙甚深,無形、無色,智者能知。佛身相好,愚、智視之,皆無厭足,是故佛以身喻般若。 佛在世時,能自遮魔,是故佛告阿難:「我滅度後,好守護般若。」 問曰: 一囑累則足,何以至三? 答曰: 佛深愛般若波羅蜜故三囑。 問曰: 若深愛者,何限於三? 答曰: 諸佛常法,語不過三。若過三不從,執金剛神則以杵擬之;又執金剛神意:若過三不從,則是逆人,便當殺之。是故佛問不過三。 復次,若一說,猶緩;過三,太急,似如凡夫貪著者。 復次,受者心有三種,鈍根者至三乃生善心;阿難雖復利根,心向聲聞,但一身求度,是故三告。 所以囑累者,為不令法滅故。汝當教化弟子,弟子復教餘人,展轉相教;譬如一燈復然餘燈,其明轉多。莫作最後斷種人者,世人有子,若不紹繼,則名斷種,最為可恥。佛以此喻告阿難:「汝莫於汝身上令般若斷絕!」 問曰: 如先品中明「般若波羅蜜,說亦不增、不說亦不減,畢竟寂滅相」,今何以言「莫令斷滅」?譬如虛空,誰能滅者? 答曰: 般若波羅蜜雖寂滅、無生無滅相、如虛空、不可戲論,而文字語言書般若波羅蜜經卷,為他人說,是此中般若,於此因中而說其果。 凡人聞般若波羅蜜微妙,即生著心,取般若相,分別諸法,所謂是善、是不善,是世間、是〔T25 0755c〕涅槃等;以分別故,於是法中生著心,著心故鬪諍,鬪諍故起諸罪業——如是人名為滅般若波羅蜜。 佛告阿難:「汝當如般若波羅蜜相,莫著文字語言,教化眾生。」是名不滅。 「阿難!隨般若在世幾時,則知爾許時佛在世」,如經中廣說。 佛慇懃囑累,在會眾生有疑,是故佛說囑累因緣,所謂「有般若在世,則為佛在」。所以者何?般若波羅蜜是諸佛母,諸佛以法為師。法者,即是般若波羅蜜。若師在、母在,不名為失利。所以者何?利本在故。是故說:「若般若在世,佛亦在世。」 又法寶不離佛寶。菩薩有三十二相、八十隨形好,不名為佛,得法寶故名為佛。法寶即是般若波羅蜜。如人從佛得利,乃至得解脫涅槃;若人於般若中能信行,亦以三乘法而入涅槃。是故說般若在世,如佛在世,說法無異。 「阿難!若有人聽受般若,及書、持等,當知是人不離見佛、聞法、親近諸佛。」 問曰: 有人重罪,三不善業成就,聽、受、書、持般若,是人云何當得不離諸佛、聞法、親近佛不? 答曰: 是事先品中已答,所謂聽法者有二種人:一者、但聽而不信受行,二者、聽而信受奉行。如弟子不聽、不信受行師語,是名不聽;若以一心聽聞,信受奉行,厭世、愛涅槃,離小乘、樂大乘——作如是聽受,是名真聽。誦、讀亦如是。 正憶念,隨如佛意,離有無二邊,行於中道。如所聞受持,及其義解、為他人解說,恭敬、尊重、供養、讚歎、花香等。初始微薄,乃至正憶念、為他人說,其心轉厚,功德轉多,〔T25 0756a〕牢固不動。 若聞師說、若見經卷、花香等供養——若智者知般若功德供養者,福德重;不知者供養,福德微薄。福德純厚者,轉身不離見佛、聞法、親近諸佛;福德微薄者,不言轉身得三福報,償眾罪已,久後亦必當得佛。 此中佛總說福德純厚、微薄,漸漸皆當見十方佛、聞佛所說,漸漸具足六波羅蜜,皆得作佛。 佛以佛眼見般若有如是大利益眾生故,慇懃囑累。 問曰: 是諸大阿羅漢已證實際,無復憂喜,小喜尚無,何況大歡喜! 答曰: 諸大阿羅漢,雖離三界欲,未得一切智慧故,於諸甚深法中猶疑不了;是摩訶般若波羅蜜中了了解說,斷除其疑,是故大歡喜。 復次,此諸大弟子已證實際。實際者,即是空、無相、無量,無所分別。佛以此寂滅法,種種分別名字、語言、譬喻廣說,亦不壞法性,又不與世間相違;諸阿羅漢是法中證故大歡喜。 佛善說是空、無相、無量、寂滅法,諸餘大眾未悉漏盡,信力深故,亦大歡喜,言:「此法能盡我等生死苦,令得佛道。」 如是等無量因緣故,大眾皆歡喜。 問曰: 若佛囑累阿難是般若波羅蜜,佛般涅槃後,阿難共大迦葉結集三藏,此中何以不說? 答曰: 摩訶衍甚深難信、難解難行。佛在世時,有諸比丘聞摩訶衍不信、不解故,從坐而去,何況佛般涅槃後!以是故不說。 復次,三藏正有三十萬偈,并為九百六十萬言。摩訶衍甚多無量無限,如此中〈般若波羅蜜品〉有二萬二千偈,〈大般若品〉有十萬偈,諸龍王、阿修羅王、〔T25 0756b〕諸天宮中有千億萬偈等。所以者何?此諸天、龍、神壽命長久、識念力強故。今此世人,壽命短促、識念力薄,〈小般若波羅蜜品〉尚不能讀,何況多者! 諸餘大菩薩所知般若波羅蜜無量無限。何以故?佛非但一身所說,無量世中或變化作無數身,是故所說無量。 又有《不可思議解脫經》十萬偈,《諸佛本起經》、《寶雲經》、《大雲經》、《法雲經》各各十萬偈,《法華經》、《華手經》、《大悲經》、《方便經》、《龍王問經》、《阿修羅王問經》等諸大經,無量無邊,如大海中寶,云何可入三藏中?小物應在大中,大物不得入小。若欲問,應言:「小乘何以不在摩訶衍中?」摩訶衍能兼小乘法故,是故不應如汝所問。 復次,有人言:如摩訶迦葉將諸比丘在耆闍崛山中集三藏,佛滅度後,文殊尸利、彌勒諸大菩薩亦將阿難集是摩訶衍。 又阿難知籌量眾生志業大小,是故不於聲聞人中說摩訶衍,說則錯亂,無所成辦。佛法皆是一種一味,所謂苦盡解脫味。此解脫味有二種:一者、但自為身,二者、兼為一切眾生。雖俱求一解脫門,而有自利、利人之異,是故有大小乘差別。為是二種人故,佛口所說,以文字語言分為二種:三藏是聲聞法,摩訶衍是大乘法。 復次,佛在世時,無有三藏名,但有持修多羅比丘、持毘尼比丘、持摩多羅迦比丘。修多羅者,是四《阿鋡》中經名、摩訶衍中經名。修多羅有二分:一者、四阿含中修多羅,二者、摩訶衍經名為大。修多羅入二分,亦大乘、亦小乘。二百五十戒,如是等,〔T25 0756c〕名為修多羅。毘尼名比丘作罪,佛結戒:應行是、不應行是,作是事得是罪。略說有八十部。亦有二分:一者、摩偷羅國毘尼,含阿波陀那、本生,有八十部;二者、罽賓國毘泥,除却本生、阿波陀那,但取要用作十部。有八十部毘婆沙解釋。 是故知《摩訶般若波羅蜜經》等在修多羅經中以經大、事異故別說,是故不在集三藏中。 究摩羅耆婆法師,以秦弘始三年歲在辛丑十二月二十日至長安,四年夏,於逍遙園中西門閣上為姚天王出此釋論,七年十二月二十七日乃訖。其中兼出經本、禪經、戒律、百論、禪法要解,向五十萬言,并此釋論一百五十萬言。論初品三十四卷,解釋一品,是全論具本;二品已下,法師略之,取其足以開釋文意而已,不復備其廣釋。得此百卷,若盡出之,將十倍於此。 大智度論卷第一百
《大智度論》卷100 · T25n1509 0753c28–0756c19
The canonical text stands in Chinese only. This edition renders the essence, the plain reading, the exposition and the apparatus into English — never the sūtra itself. Switch to 漢讀本 or 並行雙語 above to read it.
本品題為《大智度論》釋〈囑累品〉第九十,在卷一百,是全論的最末一品。
經①:佛問阿難佛是汝大師不、汝是佛弟子不,阿難答佛是我大師、脩伽陀是我大師、我是佛弟子,佛印可而告以弟子所應作者汝已作竟,復以般若波羅蜜三度囑累阿難,令滅度後以愛敬供養供給佛者愛敬供養般若、莫忘莫失莫作最後斷種人、隨般若在世即知有佛在世說法、書持讀誦正憶念廣說供養者不離見佛不離聞法常親近佛,末以大眾聞佛所說皆大歡喜收
那時,佛告訴阿難:『你意下如何?佛是你的大師嗎?你是佛的弟子嗎?』
阿難說:『世尊!佛是我的大師,脩伽陀是我的大師,我是佛的弟子。』
佛說:『是這樣!是這樣!我是你的大師,你是我的弟子。若是弟子所應當作的,你都已經作完了。阿難!你用身、口、意的慈業供養我、供給我,也常能合我的心意,沒有違失。阿難!我身現在的時候,你愛敬、供養、供給,心常清淨;我滅度以後,這一切愛敬、供養、供給之事,都應當用來愛敬、供養般若波羅蜜!乃至第二遍、第三遍,我以般若波羅蜜囑累你。阿難!你莫忘、莫失,莫作最後的斷種人!阿難!隨著般若波羅蜜在世多少時候,就當知道那許多時候有佛在世說法。阿難!若有人書寫般若波羅蜜,受持、讀、誦、正憶念、為人廣說,恭敬、尊重、讚歎,以華香、幡蓋、寶衣、燈燭種種供養,當知這人不離見佛、不離聞法、常親近佛。』
佛說般若波羅蜜已竟,彌勒等諸菩薩摩訶薩,慧命須菩提、舍利弗、大目犍連、摩訶迦葉、富樓那彌多隷耶尼子、摩訶俱絺羅、摩訶迦旃延、阿難等,並一切大眾,以及一切世間的諸天、人、犍闥婆、阿修羅等,聽聞佛所說,都大為歡喜。
論①:釋佛已斷法愛何以囑累、何以囑累阿難而不囑累諸大菩薩、餘經何以囑累菩薩、更有何法勝般若、先後二處囑累有何等異、般若道與方便道本體是一、何以慇懃鄭重、何以問汝是我弟子不、何以恭敬佛而不恭敬般若、一囑累則足何以至三、莫令斷滅與不增不減何以不相違、般若在世即佛在世、重罪之人聽受書持云何不離諸佛、諸大阿羅漢何以大歡喜、結集三藏中何以不說摩訶衍,末以譯場出論始末之跋文收
論主問道:
佛已經斷了法愛,乃至於一切種智、涅槃也不執著、不取相,如今為什麼用種種因緣囑累這法,好像有所愛著?
論主答道:
諸佛的大慈悲心,從最初發意以來乃至到涅槃之門,常不捨離。在娑羅雙樹之間,以金剛三昧為眾生碎身如麻米那樣細,何況經法能多所饒益,而不囑累!
再者,阿難是還未離欲的人,還不能盡知般若波羅蜜的力勢、果報多所利益,所以慇懃囑累:『你當好好受持,無令忘失!』
所以佛雖然於一切法無憎無愛、常是寂滅之相,而仍囑累這般若。
論主問道:
阿難是聲聞人,為什麼以般若波羅蜜囑累他,而不囑累彌勒等大菩薩?
論主答道:
有人說:阿難常侍在佛的左右,供給所須,得聞持陀羅尼,一聞常不忘失。他既是佛的從弟,又多知多識,名聞廣普,為四眾所依,是能隨佛轉法輪的第三師。佛知道舍利弗壽命短、早滅度的緣故,所以不囑累他。又阿難是六神通、三明、共解脫五百阿羅漢之師,能這樣多所利益,所以囑累他。
彌勒等諸大菩薩,佛滅度以後,各各分散,到隨其所應度的眾生國土——彌勒還歸兜率天上,毘摩羅鞊、文殊師利也到所應度的眾生之處。佛又因為這些菩薩深知般若波羅蜜的力用,不須苦切囑累。
阿難是聲聞人,隨順小乘之法,所以佛慇懃囑累。
論主問道:
若是這樣,《法華經》以及其餘諸方等經,為什麼囑累喜王等諸菩薩?
論主答道:
有人說:那時,佛說的是甚深難信之法,聲聞人不在座。又如佛說《不可思議解脫經》時,五百阿羅漢雖在佛邊而不能聞,或有時得聞而不能用。所以囑累諸菩薩。
論主問道:
更有什麼法甚深而勝過般若的,卻把《般若》囑累阿難,而餘經囑累菩薩?
論主答道:
般若波羅蜜不是祕密之法。而《法華》等諸經說阿羅漢受記作佛,是大菩薩纔能受持取用的;譬如大藥師能以毒為藥。
再者,如先前所說,般若有兩種:一者、與聲聞共說;二者、但為十方住十地的大菩薩說,不是九住所能聞,何況新發意的人!又有九地所聞,乃至初地所聞,各各不同。般若波羅蜜的總相是一,而深淺有異,所以囑累阿難並無過咎。
論主問道:
先前〈見阿閦佛品〉中已經囑累,如今又囑累,有什麼差別?
論主答道:
菩薩道有兩種:一者、般若波羅蜜道,二者、方便道。先前囑累的,是為說般若波羅蜜之體已竟;如今是說令眾生得這般若的方便已竟,所以囑累。以這緣故,〈見阿閦佛〉之後,說〈漚和拘捨羅品〉。
般若波羅蜜中雖然有方便,方便中雖然有般若波羅蜜,而隨其多者受名。般若與方便,本體是一,因所用小有差異的緣故而分別說;譬如金師以巧妙的方便,用金作種種不同之物,雖然都是金,而各有異名。
菩薩得這般若波羅蜜的實相,所謂一切法性空、無所有、寂滅之相,就想要滅度;以方便力的緣故,不取涅槃之證。這時,作這樣的念:『一切法性空,涅槃也空,我如今於菩薩功德尚未具足,不應取證;功德具足了,纔可取證。』這時,菩薩以方便力,超過二地,入菩薩位;住在菩薩位中,知道甚深微妙無文字之法,而引導眾生,這叫作方便。
再者,另有一種方便——菩薩知道一切法畢竟空性、無所有,而能還起善法、行六波羅蜜,不隨於空。若能生四種事:或疑、或邪見、或入涅槃、或作佛;以般若有這樣的分別,若能除去邪見與疑,不入涅槃,這就是方便。
有人說:般若波羅蜜多所饒益,於大珍寶聚之中最為殊勝。佛知道滅度以後,多有怨賊想要毀壞,那麼品品囑累尚且無咎,何況只在二處!
論主問道:
若要囑累,為什麼竟這樣慇懃鄭重?
論主答道:
佛隨順世俗之法引導眾生,譬如估客之主,將要遠出他國,雖然把財寶都囑累給兒子,對大價妙寶卻偏獨慇懃,因為他的兒子還不認識妙寶的價重。旁人因為估客之主是識得寶價的人而這樣慇懃囑累,必定知道那寶貴重;若只聽他兒子讚說寶價,就不相信。佛也是這樣。
再者,若在其餘的人、不同的眾中讚歎般若而囑累,人們就要譏嫌佛自己稱讚自己的法,起疑而不信;在自己的弟子之中囑累,就沒有這嫌疑。
又有人說:佛在上品之中說寂滅之相無有戲論,這就是一切智,這裡面沒有決定之法可取,人們便以為沒有什麼可貴;如今慇懃囑累,就知道佛並不執著空法。一切眾生之中,愛念般若沒有超過佛的,佛知道般若恩深的緣故,貴重這般若而慇懃囑累。
有人說:佛想要顯現中道的緣故而囑累:先說諸法空,以遮有邊;如今慇懃囑累,就破了無邊,這就是中道。若有人說佛以貪心愛著此法,佛已用種種因緣說般若波羅蜜的空相;若有人說佛墮在斷滅之中,所以慇懃囑累。這樣,就離了二邊。
論主問道:
佛知道阿難是弟子,為什麼還問阿難:『你是我的弟子嗎?我是你的師嗎?』
論主答道:
佛有惡弟子如須那剎多羅等,因為少許因緣而作弟子,想要在佛所學取射法,佛不為他說,於是捨戒而說:『我不是佛弟子。』又如須尸摩為了盜法而作弟子。像這樣等的,叫作名字弟子。
又有外道等說阿難是不得已而在佛邊——阿難曾經作過外道弟子,穿著草衣,求神仙之道;如今因為佛是他的親族,出於尊重的緣故而給侍。
因為這樣等事的緣故,佛在大眾之中問阿難:『你是我的弟子嗎?』若說是真弟子,就當隨順我的教勅。
所以阿難為了要令人生信的緣故而重複再答。
佛告訴阿難:『弟子所應作的法,你都已具足。』
弟子之法,所謂以善的身、口、意業供給師長。有的弟子心好,而身、口之業不相稱;有的弟子身、口之業好,而心不相稱。若弟子以善心深深愛樂於師,身、口與心相稱,不惜身命、不以懃勞為難,捨棄自己的心意,隨順師的教勅——阿難於這些事都已具足。
佛告訴阿難:『你如今現在恭敬於我,我滅度以後,恭敬般若,也應當像這樣。』
論主問道:
般若是諸佛之師,而阿難為什麼不恭敬他的師,卻恭敬佛?
論主答道:
阿難雖然已得初道,因為漏未盡的緣故,不能像佛所知那樣深知法的真實。所以佛告訴阿難:『你恭敬般若,如同恭敬我。』
再者,眾生見佛的三十二相、八十隨形好、大光明、金色之身,多生愛敬;般若波羅蜜微妙甚深,無形、無色,唯有智者能知。佛的身相好,愚者、智者看了都無厭足,所以佛以自身譬喻般若。
佛在世時,能自己遮止魔事,所以佛告訴阿難:『我滅度以後,好好守護般若。』
論主問道:
一次囑累就夠了,為什麼要到三次?
論主答道:
佛深愛般若波羅蜜的緣故,所以三度囑累。
論主問道:
若是深愛,為什麼只限於三次?
論主答道:
諸佛的常法,語不過三。若過了三次仍不聽從,執金剛神就要舉杵對著他;又執金剛神的心意是:若過三不從,就是逆人,便當殺他。所以佛問不過三。
再者,若只說一次,猶嫌太緩;過了三次,又太急切,好像凡夫有所貪著。
再者,受者的心有三種,鈍根的人要到第三次纔生善心;阿難雖然是利根,而心向聲聞,只求一身得度,所以三度相告。
所以要囑累的緣故,是為了不令法滅。你當教化弟子,弟子又教餘人,展轉相教;譬如一燈又燃餘燈,其光明轉多。「莫作最後斷種人」——世間人有子,若不能紹繼,就叫作斷種,最為可恥。佛以這譬喻告訴阿難:『你莫在你自身上令般若斷絕!』
論主問道:
如先前品中所明「般若波羅蜜,說亦不增、不說亦不減,畢竟寂滅相」,如今為什麼說「莫令斷滅」?譬如虛空,誰能滅它?
論主答道:
般若波羅蜜雖然寂滅、無生無滅之相、如同虛空、不可戲論,而以文字語言書寫般若波羅蜜的經卷,為他人解說,這就是此中所說的般若,是在這因中而說其果。
凡人聽聞般若波羅蜜微妙,就生執著之心,取般若之相,分別諸法,所謂這是善、這是不善,這是世間、這是涅槃等;因為分別的緣故,於這法之中生執著心,因執著心而鬪諍,因鬪諍而起諸罪業——這樣的人就叫作滅般若波羅蜜。
佛告訴阿難:『你當隨順般若波羅蜜之相,莫著文字語言,而教化眾生。』這就叫作不滅。
『阿難!隨般若在世多少時候,就知道那許多時候佛在世』,如經中廣說。
佛慇懃囑累,在會的眾生有疑,所以佛說出囑累的因緣,所謂『有般若在世,就是佛在』。為什麼呢?般若波羅蜜是諸佛之母,諸佛以法為師。法,就是般若波羅蜜。若師在、母在,就不叫作失利。為什麼呢?因為利的根本還在。所以說:『若般若在世,佛也在世。』
又法寶不離佛寶。菩薩有三十二相、八十隨形好,還不叫作佛,得了法寶纔叫作佛。法寶就是般若波羅蜜。如同人從佛得利,乃至得解脫涅槃;若人於般若之中能信而行,也以三乘之法而入涅槃。所以說般若在世,如同佛在世,說法沒有差異。
『阿難!若有人聽受般若,以及書寫、受持等,當知這人不離見佛、聞法、親近諸佛。』
論主問道:
有人身負重罪,三不善業成就,卻聽、受、書、持般若,這人怎麼能得不離諸佛、聞法、親近佛呢?
論主答道:
這件事先前品中已經答過,所謂聽法的人有兩種:一者、只是聽而不信受奉行,二者、聽了而信受奉行。如同弟子不聽、不信受奉行師長之語,這叫作不聽;若能一心聽聞,信受奉行,厭離世間、愛樂涅槃,遠離小乘、樂於大乘——作這樣的聽受,纔叫作真聽。誦、讀也是這樣。
正憶念,是隨順佛意,離有無二邊,行於中道。如所聞而受持,以及理解其義、為他人解說,恭敬、尊重、供養、讚歎、花香等。起初微薄,乃至正憶念、為他人說,其心轉厚,功德轉多,牢固不動。
若聽聞師說、若見經卷而以花香等供養——若是智者知道般若的功德而供養的,福德深重;不知而供養的,福德微薄。福德純厚的人,轉身之後不離見佛、聞法、親近諸佛;福德微薄的人,不說他轉身就得三種福報,要償了眾罪以後,久後也必當得佛。
這裡面佛總說福德純厚與微薄的人,都漸漸當見十方佛、聞佛所說,漸漸具足六波羅蜜,都得作佛。
佛以佛眼見般若有這樣大利益眾生的緣故,所以慇懃囑累。
論主問道:
這些大阿羅漢已經證得實際,不再有憂有喜,小喜尚且沒有,何況大歡喜!
論主答道:
諸大阿羅漢,雖然已離三界之欲,因為還沒有得一切智慧的緣故,於諸甚深之法中猶有疑而不了;在這摩訶般若波羅蜜中了了解說,斷除了他們的疑,所以大歡喜。
再者,這些大弟子已經證得實際。實際,就是空、無相、無量,無所分別。佛以這寂滅之法,用種種分別的名字、語言、譬喻廣為解說,也不壞法性,又不與世間相違;諸阿羅漢是於這法之中得證的緣故,所以大歡喜。
佛善說這空、無相、無量、寂滅之法,其餘諸大眾雖然還未都漏盡,因為信力深的緣故,也大歡喜,說:『這法能盡我等的生死之苦,令我等得佛道。』
以這樣等無量因緣的緣故,大眾都歡喜。
論主問道:
若佛把這般若波羅蜜囑累阿難,佛般涅槃以後,阿難共大迦葉結集三藏,這裡面為什麼不說?
論主答道:
摩訶衍甚深難信、難解難行。佛在世時,尚且有諸比丘聽聞摩訶衍而不信、不解,從座而去,何況佛般涅槃以後!以這緣故不說。
再者,三藏正有三十萬偈,合為九百六十萬言。摩訶衍甚多,無量無限,如這裡面的〈般若波羅蜜品〉有二萬二千偈,〈大般若品〉有十萬偈,諸龍王、阿修羅王、諸天宮中有千億萬偈等。為什麼呢?因為這些天、龍、神壽命長久、識念之力強的緣故。如今這世間的人,壽命短促、識念之力薄,連〈小般若波羅蜜品〉尚且不能讀,何況更多的!
其餘諸大菩薩所知的般若波羅蜜無量無限。為什麼呢?佛不但以一身所說,於無量世中或變化作無數之身,所以所說無量。
又有《不可思議解脫經》十萬偈,《諸佛本起經》、《寶雲經》、《大雲經》、《法雲經》各各十萬偈,《法華經》、《華手經》、《大悲經》、《方便經》、《龍王問經》、《阿修羅王問經》等諸大經,無量無邊,如同大海之中的寶,怎麼能納入三藏之中?小物應當在大物之中,大物不得入於小物。若要問,應當說:『小乘為什麼不在摩訶衍中?』因為摩訶衍能兼含小乘之法的緣故,所以不應當像你所問的那樣問。
再者,有人說:如同摩訶迦葉將領諸比丘在耆闍崛山中結集三藏,佛滅度以後,文殊尸利、彌勒等諸大菩薩也將領阿難結集這摩訶衍。
又阿難能籌量眾生志業的大小,所以不在聲聞人中說摩訶衍,說了則生錯亂,無所成辦。佛法都是一種一味,所謂苦盡解脫之味。這解脫之味有兩種:一者、但為自身,二者、兼為一切眾生。雖然同樣求一個解脫門,而有自利、利人的差別,所以有大小乘的差別。為這兩種人的緣故,佛口所說,以文字語言分為兩種:三藏是聲聞法,摩訶衍是大乘法。
再者,佛在世時,沒有三藏之名,只有持修多羅的比丘、持毘尼的比丘、持摩多羅迦的比丘。修多羅,是四《阿鋡》中的經名,也是摩訶衍中的經名。修多羅有二分:一者、四阿含中的修多羅,二者、摩訶衍經名為大。修多羅入於二分,亦是大乘、亦是小乘。二百五十戒,像這樣等,叫作修多羅。毘尼,是說比丘所作之罪,佛結戒:應當行這個、不應當行那個,作這事得這罪。略說有八十部。也有二分:一者、摩偷羅國的毘尼,含有阿波陀那、本生,有八十部;二者、罽賓國的毘泥,除却本生、阿波陀那,只取要用的作成十部。有八十部毘婆沙解釋。
所以知道《摩訶般若波羅蜜經》等在修多羅經之中,因為經大、事異的緣故而別說,所以不在結集三藏之中。
究摩羅耆婆法師,在秦弘始三年、歲在辛丑、十二月二十日到長安,四年夏天,在逍遙園中西門閣上為姚天王出這部釋論,七年十二月二十七日纔完畢。其間兼出經本、禪經、戒律、百論、禪法要解,將近五十萬言,連同這部釋論共一百五十萬言。論的初品三十四卷,解釋一品,是全論的具本;二品以下,法師作了省略,取其足以開釋文意而已,不再具備其廣釋。所得的這一百卷,若全部出之,將十倍於此。
《大智度論》卷第一百。
This chapter is titled the Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa's commentary on the ninetieth chapter, "Entrustment"; it is in the hundredth fascicle, and is the very last chapter of the whole treatise.
Sūtra ①: The Buddha Asks Ānanda Whether the Buddha Is His Great Teacher and Whether He Is the Buddha's Disciple; Ānanda Answers That the Buddha Is His Great Teacher, the Sugata Is His Great Teacher, and He Is the Buddha's Disciple; the Buddha Confirms It and Tells Him That What a Disciple Ought to Do He Has Already Done, and Then Entrusts Prajñāpāramitā to Ānanda Three Times, Bidding Him after the Passing into Extinction to Love, Revere, and Make Offerings to Prajñā with the Love, Reverence, Offerings, and Provision He Gave the Buddha; Not to Forget, Not to Lose, and Not to Be the Last Person Who Cuts Off the Lineage; That as Long as Prajñā Is in the World One Knows There Is a Buddha in the World Teaching the Dharma; That Those Who Write It Out, Uphold, Read, Recite, Rightly Recollect, Widely Explain, and Make Offerings to It Are Not Apart from Seeing the Buddha, Not Apart from Hearing the Dharma, and Always Close to the Buddha; and Finally It Concludes with the Great Assembly, Hearing What the Buddha Said, All Greatly Rejoicing
At that time the Buddha told Ānanda: ‘What do you think? Is the Buddha your great teacher? Are you the Buddha's disciple?’
Ānanda said: ‘World-Honored One! The Buddha is my great teacher, the Sugata is my great teacher; I am the Buddha's disciple.’
The Buddha said: ‘Just so! Just so! I am your great teacher; you are my disciple. Whatever a disciple ought to do, you have already done it all. Ānanda! With deeds of kindness of body, speech, and mind you have made offerings to me and provided for me, and you have always been able to accord with my mind, without fault or failing. Ānanda! While my body is present, you love, revere, make offerings to, and provide for it, and your mind is always pure; after my passing into extinction, all these matters of loving, revering, making offerings, and providing should be used to love, revere, and make offerings to prajñāpāramitā! And so on up to a second time and a third time, I entrust prajñāpāramitā to you. Ānanda! Do not forget it, do not lose it, do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage! Ānanda! For however long a time prajñāpāramitā is in the world, know that for so long a time there is a Buddha in the world teaching the Dharma. Ānanda! If someone writes out prajñāpāramitā, receives and upholds it, reads it, recites it, rightly recollects it, explains it widely for others, reveres it, honours it, praises it, and makes all kinds of offerings to it with flowers and incense, banners and canopies, jewelled garments, and lamps and candles, know that this person is not apart from seeing the Buddha, not apart from hearing the Dharma, and is always close to the Buddha.’
When the Buddha had finished teaching prajñāpāramitā, the bodhisattva-mahāsattvas Maitreya and the others; the venerable Subhūti, Śāriputra, Mahāmaudgalyāyana, Mahākāśyapa, Pūrṇa Maitrāyaṇīputra, Mahākauṣṭhila, Mahākātyāyana, Ānanda, and the others; together with the whole great assembly, and the gods, humans, gandharvas, asuras, and others of all the world, hearing what the Buddha had said, all greatly rejoiced.
Treatise ①: Explaining Why the Buddha, Having Already Severed Love of Dharmas, Entrusts; Why He Entrusts to Ānanda and Not to the Great Bodhisattvas; Why Other Sūtras Are Entrusted to Bodhisattvas; Whether There Is Some Further Dharma Surpassing Prajñā; What Difference There Is between the Entrustments in the Earlier and Later Two Places; That the Path of Prajñā and the Path of Skilful Means Are One in Original Substance; Why He Is So Earnest and Solemn; Why He Asks Whether Ānanda Is His Disciple; Why Ānanda Reveres the Buddha and Does Not Revere Prajñā; Why Three Times When One Entrustment Would Suffice; Why Not Letting It Be Cut Off and Extinguished Does Not Contradict Its Being Neither Increased nor Decreased; That When Prajñā Is in the World the Buddha Is in the World; How People of Heavy Sin Who Hear, Receive, Write Out, and Uphold It Are Not Apart from the Buddhas; Why the Great Arhats Greatly Rejoice; Why the Mahāyāna Is Not Mentioned in the Compiling of the Three Baskets; and Finally It Concludes with the Colophon of the Translation Hall on How the Treatise Was Brought Out from Beginning to End
The treatise-author asks:
The Buddha has already severed love of dharmas, and so on up to: toward the omniscience of all kinds and nirvāṇa too he does not cling and does not grasp at marks; why now does he, by all kinds of causes and conditions, entrust this Dharma, as if he had some love and clinging?
The treatise-author answers:
The mind of great kindness and compassion of the buddhas, from the first arousing of intent until arriving at the gate of nirvāṇa, is never abandoned. Between the twin śāla trees, by the vajra samādhi he broke his body for the sake of beings into pieces as fine as hemp seeds and rice; how much less would he leave unentrusted the sūtra-dharma, which can greatly enrich so many!
Again, Ānanda is one not yet free from desire, and cannot yet fully know the power and force of prajñāpāramitā and how greatly its retribution benefits; therefore the Buddha earnestly entrusts it: ‘You should receive and uphold it well, and not let it be forgotten or lost!’
Therefore, although the Buddha is without hatred and without love toward all dharmas, always having the mark of quiescence, he still entrusts this prajñā.
The treatise-author asks:
Ānanda is a śrāvaka; why does the Buddha entrust prajñāpāramitā to him, and not entrust it to the great bodhisattvas Maitreya and the others?
The treatise-author answers:
Someone says: Ānanda always attended at the Buddha's left and right, providing what was needed, and obtained the dhāraṇī of hearing and retaining: hearing once, he never forgets or loses it. He is the Buddha's cousin, and also of much knowledge and wide acquaintance, his renown wide and universal; he is the one on whom the four assemblies rely, the third teacher who can turn the wheel of the Dharma following the Buddha. Because the Buddha knew that Śāriputra's life was short and that he would pass into extinction early, he did not entrust it to him. Again, Ānanda is the teacher of five hundred arhats with the six supernormal powers, the three clarities, and liberation both ways; because he can benefit so many in this way, the Buddha entrusts it to him.
As for the great bodhisattvas Maitreya and the others, after the Buddha's passing into extinction they each scatter, going to the lands of the beings they are each to save—Maitreya returns up to the Tuṣita heaven, and Vimalakīrti and Mañjuśrī too go to the places of the beings they are to save. Again, because these bodhisattvas deeply know the power and function of prajñāpāramitā, the Buddha need not entrust it to them with bitter urgency.
Ānanda is a śrāvaka who follows the dharma of the Small Vehicle; therefore the Buddha earnestly entrusts it.
The treatise-author asks:
If so, why do the Lotus Sūtra and the other vaipulya sūtras entrust them to the bodhisattvas King of Joy and the others?
The treatise-author answers:
Someone says: at that time, what the Buddha taught was a very deep dharma hard to believe, and the śrāvakas were not present in the assembly. Again, as when the Buddha taught the Sūtra of Inconceivable Liberation, the five hundred arhats, though at the Buddha's side, could not hear it, or at times heard it and could not use it. Therefore he entrusted them to the bodhisattvas.
The treatise-author asks:
Is there some further dharma, very deep and surpassing prajñā, that the Prajñā is entrusted to Ānanda while the other sūtras are entrusted to bodhisattvas?
The treatise-author answers:
Prajñāpāramitā is not a secret dharma. But the Lotus and the other sūtras say that arhats receive the prediction and become Buddhas, which only great bodhisattvas can receive, uphold, and take up for use; just as a great physician can use poison as medicine.
Again, as was said earlier, prajñā is of two kinds: first, taught in common with the śrāvakas; second, taught only for the great bodhisattvas of the ten directions who dwell on the ten grounds, not something those of the ninth abode can hear, how much less people who have newly aroused the mind! Further, there is what is heard on the ninth ground, and so on up to what is heard on the first ground, each different. The general mark of prajñāpāramitā is one, but in depth and shallowness there are differences; therefore to entrust it to Ānanda is without fault.
The treatise-author asks:
Earlier, in the chapter "Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha", he already entrusted it; now he entrusts it again; what difference is there?
The treatise-author answers:
The bodhisattva path is of two kinds: first, the path of prajñāpāramitā; second, the path of skilful means. What was entrusted earlier was entrusted because the teaching of the substance of prajñāpāramitā had been completed; now the teaching of the skilful means by which beings are brought to obtain this prajñā has been completed, and therefore he entrusts it. For this reason, after "Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha", the "Upāya-kauśalya" chapter is taught.
Although within prajñāpāramitā there is skilful means, and although within skilful means there is prajñāpāramitā, each takes its name from whichever is more. Prajñā and skilful means are one in their original substance; because there is a small difference in what they are used for, they are spoken of separately; just as a goldsmith, with clever skilful means, makes all kinds of different things out of gold: although all are gold, each has a different name.
When the bodhisattva obtains the real mark of this prajñāpāramitā, namely that the nature of all dharmas is empty, without anything existent, the mark of quiescence, he then wishes to pass into extinction; because of the power of skilful means, he does not take the realisation of nirvāṇa. At this time he has this thought: ‘The nature of all dharmas is empty, and nirvāṇa too is empty; I have not yet made complete the merit of a bodhisattva, and should not take the realisation; when the merit is complete, only then may I take the realisation.’ At this time the bodhisattva, by the power of skilful means, passes beyond the two grounds and enters the bodhisattva's position; dwelling in the bodhisattva's position, he knows the very deep and subtle dharma without letters, and guides beings: this is called skilful means.
Again, there is another kind of skilful means—the bodhisattva knows that all dharmas are of the nature of ultimate emptiness, without anything existent, and yet can rise again to wholesome dharmas and practise the six perfections, not following emptiness. If it can give rise to four kinds of matters—either doubt, or wrong views, or entering nirvāṇa, or becoming a Buddha—since prajñā has such distinctions, then if one can remove wrong views and doubt and does not enter nirvāṇa, this is skilful means.
Someone says: prajñāpāramitā greatly enriches, and among great heaps of precious jewels it is the most excellent. The Buddha knew that after his passing into extinction many enemies and thieves would wish to destroy it; so even to entrust it in chapter after chapter would be without fault, how much more in only two places!
The treatise-author asks:
If he is to entrust it, why is he so earnest and solemn?
The treatise-author answers:
The Buddha guides beings in accordance with the worldly way; just as a merchant chief, about to go far away to another country, though he entrusts all his wealth and jewels to his son, is specially and earnestly insistent about the precious jewels of great price, because his son does not yet recognise how heavy the price of those jewels is. Bystanders, because the merchant chief is one who knows the price of jewels and yet entrusts them so earnestly, will certainly know that those jewels are precious and weighty; if they only heard his son praise the price of the jewels, they would not believe it. The Buddha too is like this.
Again, if he praised prajñā and entrusted it among other people or in a different assembly, people would ridicule and suspect the Buddha of praising his own dharma, and would doubt and not believe; entrusting it among his own disciples, there is no such suspicion.
Again, someone says: in an earlier chapter the Buddha taught that the mark of quiescence is without idle discourse, that this is omniscience, and that within it there is no fixed dharma to be grasped, and people then thought there was nothing worth valuing; now that he earnestly entrusts it, one knows that the Buddha does not cling to the dharma of emptiness. Among all beings, none loves and cherishes prajñā more than the Buddha; because the Buddha knows how deep the kindness of prajñā is, he values this prajñā highly and earnestly entrusts it.
Someone says: the Buddha entrusts it because he wishes to show the middle way: first he taught that dharmas are empty, to block the extreme of existence; now he earnestly entrusts it, and this refutes the extreme of non-existence; this then is the middle way. If someone says that the Buddha loves and clings to this dharma with a craving mind, the Buddha has already, by all kinds of causes and conditions, taught the mark of emptiness of prajñāpāramitā; if someone says that the Buddha has fallen into annihilation, therefore he earnestly entrusts it. In this way he parts from the two extremes.
The treatise-author asks:
The Buddha knows that Ānanda is his disciple; why does he still ask Ānanda: ‘Are you my disciple? Am I your teacher?’
The treatise-author answers:
The Buddha had evil disciples, Sunakṣatra and others, who became disciples for some small cause and condition, wishing to learn archery at the Buddha's place; the Buddha did not teach it to him, and so he gave up the precepts and said: ‘I am not the Buddha's disciple.’ Again, Susīma became a disciple in order to steal the Dharma. Such as these are named disciples in name.
Further, there were those of the outside paths and others who said that Ānanda stayed at the Buddha's side only because he had no choice—Ānanda had once been a disciple of the outside paths, wearing grass robes and seeking the way of the spirit-immortals; now, because the Buddha is his kinsman, he attends on him out of respect.
Because of such matters as these, the Buddha in the midst of the great assembly asks Ānanda: ‘Are you my disciple?’ If you say you are a true disciple, you should follow my command.
Therefore Ānanda, in order to make people believe, answers again, repeating it.
The Buddha told Ānanda: ‘The dharmas a disciple ought to do, you have made all of them complete.’
The dharma of a disciple is to provide for the teacher and elders with wholesome deeds of body, speech, and mind. Some disciples have good minds, but their deeds of body and speech do not match; some disciples have good deeds of body and speech, but their minds do not match. If a disciple with a wholesome mind deeply loves and delights in the teacher, body and speech matching the mind, not sparing body and life, not counting diligent toil as hard, abandoning his own intentions and following the teacher's command—Ānanda has made all these matters complete.
The Buddha told Ānanda: ‘You now at present revere me; after my passing into extinction, in revering prajñā you should also be like this.’
The treatise-author asks:
Prajñā is the teacher of the buddhas; why then does Ānanda not revere that teacher, but revere the Buddha?
The treatise-author answers:
Although Ānanda has obtained the first path, because his outflows are not yet exhausted he cannot deeply know the reality of dharmas as the Buddha knows it. Therefore the Buddha told Ānanda: ‘Revere prajñā as you revere me.’
Again, beings, seeing the Buddha's thirty-two marks, eighty minor marks, great radiance, and golden-coloured body, mostly give rise to love and reverence; prajñāpāramitā is subtle and very deep, without shape and without form, and only the wise can know it. As for the marks and minor signs of the Buddha's body, whether the foolish or the wise look at them, none is ever satisfied; therefore the Buddha uses his own body as a simile for prajñā.
While the Buddha was in the world, he could himself ward off the deeds of Māra; therefore the Buddha told Ānanda: ‘After my passing into extinction, guard and protect prajñā well.’
The treatise-author asks:
One entrustment would be enough; why go to three?
The treatise-author answers:
Because the Buddha deeply loves prajñāpāramitā, he therefore entrusts it three times.
The treatise-author asks:
If he deeply loves it, why limit it to three times?
The treatise-author answers:
The constant way of the buddhas is that their speech does not exceed three. If after three times someone still does not listen and comply, the vajra-holding spirit will raise his pestle at him; further, the intent of the vajra-holding spirit is: if someone does not comply after three times, he is a rebellious person, and should be killed. Therefore the Buddha's questions do not exceed three.
Again, if he spoke only once, it would still be too slack; beyond three times, it would be too urgent, like an ordinary person who craves and clings.
Again, the minds of the recipients are of three kinds; people of dull faculties give rise to a wholesome mind only at the third time; though Ānanda has keen faculties, his mind turns toward the śrāvakas, seeking only to be saved in his own person; therefore the Buddha tells him three times.
The reason for entrusting it is so as not to let the Dharma be extinguished. You should teach and transform disciples, and the disciples in turn teach others, teaching one another in turn; just as one lamp lights other lamps, and its light grows ever more. 「莫作最後斷種人」 tr. "Do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage"—when people of the world have sons, if they cannot continue the line, it is named cutting off the lineage, the greatest shame. The Buddha, with this comparison, told Ānanda: ‘Do not let prajñā be cut off in your own person!’
The treatise-author asks:
As was made clear in the earlier chapters, 「般若波羅蜜,說亦不增、不說亦不減,畢竟寂滅相」 tr. "prajñāpāramitā is not increased by being taught, nor decreased by not being taught, having the mark of ultimate quiescent extinction"; why now does it say 「莫令斷滅」 tr. "do not let it be cut off and extinguished"? Like space, who could extinguish it?
The treatise-author answers:
Although prajñāpāramitā is quiescent extinction, has the mark of non-arising and non-ceasing, is like space, and cannot be made the object of idle discourse, yet the scrolls of the prajñāpāramitā sūtra written out in letters and words and explained to others are the prajñā spoken of here; its result is spoken of within this cause.
Ordinary people, hearing that prajñāpāramitā is subtle, then give rise to a clinging mind, grasp at the mark of prajñā, and discriminate dharmas, namely: this is wholesome, this is unwholesome; this is worldly, this is nirvāṇa, and so on; because of discriminating, within this dharma they give rise to a clinging mind; because of the clinging mind, fighting and strife; because of fighting and strife, they raise up all sinful deeds—such people are named those who extinguish prajñāpāramitā.
The Buddha told Ānanda: ‘You should, in accordance with the mark of prajñāpāramitā, not cling to letters and words, and so teach and transform beings.’ This is called not extinguishing.
‘Ānanda! For however long a time prajñā is in the world, know that for so long a time the Buddha is in the world’, as is said at length in the sūtra.
The Buddha earnestly entrusts it, and the beings in the assembly had doubts; therefore the Buddha states the causes and conditions of the entrustment, namely: ‘When there is prajñā in the world, the Buddha is present.’ Why? Prajñāpāramitā is the mother of the buddhas; the buddhas take the Dharma as their teacher. The Dharma is precisely prajñāpāramitā. If the teacher is present and the mother is present, it is not named losing the benefit. Why? Because the root of the benefit is still present. Therefore it is said: ‘If prajñā is in the world, the Buddha too is in the world.’
Again, the Dharma Jewel is not apart from the Buddha Jewel. A bodhisattva with the thirty-two marks and the eighty minor marks is still not named Buddha; only on obtaining the Dharma Jewel is he named Buddha. The Dharma Jewel is precisely prajñāpāramitā. As people obtain benefit from the Buddha, and so on up to obtaining liberation and nirvāṇa, so if people can believe and practise within prajñā, they too enter nirvāṇa by the dharmas of the three vehicles. Therefore it is said that prajñā being in the world is like the Buddha being in the world, teaching the Dharma with no difference.
‘Ānanda! If someone hears and receives prajñā, and writes it out, receives and upholds it, and so on, know that this person is not apart from seeing the Buddha, hearing the Dharma, and drawing close to the buddhas.’
The treatise-author asks:
A person bears heavy sins, with the three unwholesome deeds accomplished, and yet hears, receives, writes out, and upholds prajñā; how can this person come to be not apart from the buddhas, hearing the Dharma, and drawing close to the Buddha?
The treatise-author answers:
This matter was already answered in an earlier chapter, namely that people who hear the Dharma are of two kinds: first, those who only hear and do not believe, receive, and carry it out; second, those who hear and believe, receive, and carry it out. As when a disciple does not listen to the words of the teacher and elders, and does not believe, receive, and carry them out—this is called not hearing; if one can hear with one mind, believe, receive, and carry it out, grow weary of and part from the world and love and delight in nirvāṇa, keep far from the Small Vehicle and delight in the Great Vehicle—to hear and receive thus is only then called true hearing. Reciting and reading are likewise.
To rightly recollect is to follow the Buddha's intent, parting from the two extremes of existence and non-existence, and practising the middle way. As one has heard, so one receives and upholds it, and also understands its meaning, explains it for others, and reveres, honours, makes offerings, praises, and offers flowers and incense and so on. At first it is thin and slight, and so on up to rightly recollecting and explaining it for others, the mind grows ever thicker and the merit ever greater, firm and unmoving.
Whether hearing the teacher explain it, or seeing the scrolls of the sūtra and making offerings with flowers and incense and so on—if it is a wise person who knows the meritorious virtue of prajñā and makes offerings, the merit is deep and heavy; if one makes offerings without knowing, the merit is thin and slight. Those whose merit is pure and thick, after changing bodies, are not apart from seeing the Buddha, hearing the Dharma, and drawing close to the buddhas; as for those whose merit is thin and slight, it is not said that after changing bodies they at once obtain the three kinds of reward of merit; after they have repaid their many sins, after a long time they too will certainly attain buddhahood.
Here the Buddha speaks generally of those of pure and thick merit and those of thin and slight merit: all will little by little come to see the buddhas of the ten directions and hear what the buddhas teach, little by little make complete the six perfections, and all will become Buddhas.
Because the Buddha with the Buddha-eye sees that prajñā has such great benefit for beings, he therefore earnestly entrusts it.
The treatise-author asks:
These great arhats have already realised the limit of reality and no longer have sorrow or joy; even small joy they do not have, how much less great joy!
The treatise-author answers:
The great arhats, though they have already parted from the desire of the three realms, because they have not yet obtained all wisdom, still have doubts within all the very deep dharmas and do not understand them clearly; within this Mahāprajñāpāramitā these are clearly explained, severing their doubts; therefore they greatly rejoice.
Again, these great disciples have already realised the limit of reality. The limit of reality is emptiness, the signless, the immeasurable, without anything discriminated. The Buddha, by all kinds of discriminating names, words, and similes, widely explains this dharma of quiescent extinction, and yet does not destroy the nature of dharmas, nor does he go against the world; because the arhats realised within this dharma, they greatly rejoice.
The Buddha well teaches this dharma of emptiness, the signless, the immeasurable, and quiescent extinction; the rest of the great assembly, although they have not yet all exhausted their outflows, because their power of faith is deep, also greatly rejoice, saying: ‘This dharma can end the suffering of our birth and death, and cause us to obtain the Buddha path.’
Because of immeasurable causes and conditions such as these, the great assembly all rejoice.
The treatise-author asks:
If the Buddha entrusted this prajñāpāramitā to Ānanda, then after the Buddha's parinirvāṇa, when Ānanda together with Mahākāśyapa compiled the three baskets, why is it not mentioned therein?
The treatise-author answers:
The Mahāyāna is very deep, hard to believe, hard to understand, and hard to practise. Even while the Buddha was in the world, there were bhikṣus who heard the Mahāyāna and did not believe or understand it, and rose from their seats and left, how much more after the Buddha's parinirvāṇa! For this reason it is not mentioned.
Again, the three baskets have exactly three hundred thousand verses, making nine million six hundred thousand words. The Mahāyāna is very much more, immeasurable and unlimited: as herein the "Prajñāpāramitā" chapter has twenty-two thousand verses, the "Great Prajñā" chapter has a hundred thousand verses, and in the palaces of the nāga kings, the asura kings, and the gods there are a thousand koṭi of myriads of verses, and so on. Why? Because these gods, nāgas, and spirits have long lives and strong powers of memory and recollection. The people of this world now have short lives and weak powers of memory and recollection; even the "Small Prajñāpāramitā" chapter they cannot read, how much less more than that!
The prajñāpāramitā known by the other great bodhisattvas is immeasurable and unlimited. Why? The Buddha did not teach with one body only; through immeasurable ages he sometimes transformed himself into countless bodies, and therefore what he taught is immeasurable.
Further, there are the Sūtra of Inconceivable Liberation with a hundred thousand verses; the Sūtra of the Origins of the Buddhas, the Jewel Cloud Sūtra, the Great Cloud Sūtra, and the Dharma Cloud Sūtra, each with a hundred thousand verses; and the Lotus Sūtra, the Flower Hand Sūtra, the Great Compassion Sūtra, the Skilful Means Sūtra, the Sūtra of the Nāga King's Questions, the Sūtra of the Asura King's Questions, and the other great sūtras, immeasurable and boundless, like the jewels in the great ocean; how could they be put into the three baskets? A small thing should be within a great one; a great thing cannot enter a small one. If one is to ask, one should say: ‘Why is the Small Vehicle not within the Mahāyāna?’ Because the Mahāyāna can include the dharma of the Small Vehicle, therefore one should not ask as you have asked.
Again, someone says: just as Mahākāśyapa led the bhikṣus on Mount Gṛdhrakūṭa to compile the three baskets, after the Buddha's passing into extinction, Mañjuśrī, Maitreya, and the other great bodhisattvas also led Ānanda to compile this Mahāyāna.
Further, Ānanda could weigh the greatness or smallness of beings' aspirations and deeds; therefore he did not teach the Mahāyāna among the śrāvakas, for if it were taught it would give rise to confusion and nothing would be accomplished. The Buddha-dharma is all of one kind and one flavour, namely the flavour of liberation that is the exhaustion of suffering. This flavour of liberation is of two kinds: first, being only for one's own person; second, being also for all beings. Although alike they seek one gate of liberation, there is the difference of benefiting oneself and benefiting others; therefore there is the difference of the Great and Small Vehicles. For the sake of these two kinds of people, what the Buddha's mouth taught was divided by letters and words into two kinds: the three baskets are the śrāvaka Dharma; the Mahāyāna is the Great Vehicle Dharma.
Again, while the Buddha was in the world, there was no name "three baskets"; there were only bhikṣus who held the sūtra, bhikṣus who held the Vinaya, and bhikṣus who held the mātṛkā. Sūtra is the name of the scriptures in the four Āgamas, and also the name of the scriptures in the Mahāyāna. The sūtra has two divisions: first, the sūtra within the four Āgamas; second, the Mahāyāna scriptures, which are named great. The sūtra enters both divisions; it is both the Great Vehicle and the Small Vehicle. The two hundred and fifty precepts and the like are named sūtra. The Vinaya speaks of the offences bhikṣus commit; the Buddha lays down the precepts: one should do this, one should not do that; doing this matter incurs this offence. Briefly told, there are eighty sections. It too has two divisions: first, the Vinaya of the land of Mathurā, which includes the avadāna and the jātaka, with eighty sections; second, the Vinaya of the land of Jibin, which removes the jātaka and the avadāna, taking only what is essential to make ten sections. There are eighty sections of vibhāṣā explaining it.
Therefore we know that the Mahāprajñāpāramitā Sūtra and the others are within the sūtra scriptures; because the sūtras are great and their matters different, they are spoken of separately, and therefore they are not within the compiling of the three baskets.
The Dharma master Kumārajīva, in the third year of Hongshi of the Qin, the year xinchou, on the twentieth day of the twelfth month, arrived at Chang'an; in the summer of the fourth year, in the upper storey of the western gate in the Xiaoyao Garden, he brought out this Expository Treatise for the Heavenly King Yao, and on the twenty-seventh day of the twelfth month of the seventh year it was finally finished. In the meantime he also brought out sūtra texts, dhyāna sūtras, precepts and Vinaya, the Hundred Treatise, and the Essential Explanations of the Dhyāna Method, nearly five hundred thousand words, which together with this Expository Treatise make one million five hundred thousand words in all. The treatise's first chapter, thirty-four fascicles, explains one chapter, and is the full complete text of the treatise; from the second chapter onward the Dharma master abridged it, taking what sufficed to open up and explain the meaning of the text, and no longer providing its full extended explanation. As for these hundred fascicles that we have obtained, were it brought out in full, it would be ten times this.
Fascicle one hundred of the Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa ends here.
囑累品:佛已斷法愛何以還要慇懃囑累而不成愛著,何以把般若囑累給聲聞的阿難而不囑累彌勒等大菩薩,法華等經何以反過來囑累菩薩,般若既非祕密法何以說大菩薩纔能受持用,先在見阿閦佛品已囑累今復囑累何以不是重出,般若道與方便道本體是一何以要分二名,何以慇懃鄭重到三告而不落凡夫貪著,佛明知阿難是弟子何以還要當眾問汝是我弟子不,般若是諸佛師何以阿難所恭敬的是佛,一囑累則足何以至三而三之外不更增,先品既明般若說亦不增不說亦不減今何以言莫令斷滅,般若在世即佛在世是就什麼說的,重罪之人聽受書持何以能不離諸佛,已證實際的大阿羅漢何以還有大歡喜,佛既囑累阿難何以結集三藏之中不見摩訶衍,全論何以以譯場出論始末之跋文收束
在問什麼
這一品是全論的最後一品,所說的事極簡:佛把般若波羅蜜交付給阿難。經文短,問題卻大——大到全論走到這裡纔問得出來。
佛先問了一句看似多餘的話:「佛是汝大師不?汝是佛弟子不?」阿難答了,佛又印可一遍,然後纔說出所要交付的事:我在世時你怎樣愛敬供養我,我滅度以後,你就把這一切愛敬供養轉向般若波羅蜜;乃至第二、第三,以般若波羅蜜囑累你;莫忘莫失,莫作最後斷種人。經文再給一個判準:「隨爾所時般若波羅蜜在世,當知爾所時有佛在世說法。」最後說書持讀誦供養者「不離見佛、不離聞法、常親近佛」,以大眾歡喜收束。
論主接手所作的,不是把這段話再說一遍,而是把其中十四處不安一一挑出來問。第一處最要緊:佛已斷法愛,於一切種智、涅槃尚且不著不取相,如今種種因緣囑累這一部法,看起來豈不正是愛著?這一問若不破,整品就成了佛自語相違。論主的答法不從『佛不愛著』辯起,而從『佛的大悲從初發意到涅槃門常不捨離』說起——連在娑羅雙樹間都能以金剛三昧為眾生碎身如麻米,何況一部多所饒益的經法。囑累之所以不是愛著,因為所愛的不是法本身,是聞法得度的眾生。
第二處問的是人:般若是菩薩法,何以交給一個聲聞人?論主並陳數說:阿難常侍佛左右,得聞持陀羅尼,一聞不失,是能隨佛轉法輪的第三師;諸大菩薩佛滅度後各各分散,且已深知般若之力,不須苦囑。第三處反問回來:那麼《法華》等經何以又囑累菩薩?論主答以彼經所說者是甚深難信之法,聲聞人不在座、或聞而不能用。第四處再逼一層:難道還有比般若更深的法?論主答得極穩——般若不是祕密法,只是《法華》等說阿羅漢受決作佛,要大菩薩纔用得上,「譬如大藥師能以毒為藥」。
中間一大段,論主把「慇懃」二字守住:估客主偏獨慇懃於大價妙寶,因為兒子不識寶價;佛自於弟子中囑累而不在異眾中讚歎,是避「自稱讚法」之嫌;先說諸法空以遮有邊,今慇懃囑累以破無邊,「如是,則離二邊」。到了「一囑累則足,何以至三」一問,答曰「佛深愛般若波羅蜜故三囑」;再追一問「若深愛者,何限於三」,答語只八個字:「諸佛常法,語不過三。」——連慇懃也有分寸,過與不及皆非。
全品最險的一問在後半:先品明說般若「說亦不增、不說亦不減,畢竟寂滅相」,如今卻說「莫令斷滅」,譬如虛空,誰能滅它?論主的答語是全品的樞紐:所囑累的是「文字語言書般若波羅蜜經卷,為他人說」這一邊,是「於此因中而說其果」;而真正能「滅般若」的,也不是外人,是取相分別、因著生諍、因諍起罪業的那一種讀法。由此再讀「有般若在世,則為佛在」,就不會讀成一句安慰語——般若是諸佛母,法寶不離佛寶,師在母在,故說利本在。
末後一問回到史事:佛既囑累阿難,何以大迦葉結集三藏之中不見摩訶衍?論主答以難信、答以量大、答以「小物應在大中,大物不得入小」,並記一說:文殊尸利、彌勒諸大菩薩亦將阿難集是摩訶衍。全論最後不是義理,是譯場的一段跋文——弘始三年至長安,七年十二月二十七日乃訖,初品三十四卷是具本,二品以下法師略之。讀到此處方知:這一品所囑累的『莫令斷絕』,在漢地正是由這一段史事接住的。
逐段解明
一、佛問阿難:佛是汝大師不,汝是佛弟子不。 全品起於一問,而這一問問的是人人以為早已定案的事。佛與阿難的師弟關係,在會大眾無人不知,佛卻在付囑之前先當眾問一遍。讀經遇此等『明知故問』,先不要當作客套:凡佛在付託重事之前設問,其問必有所立——所立者,是受託人當眾自承的身分。後文論主第七番問答所釋,正是此意。
二、阿難答:佛是我大師,脩伽陀是我大師,我是佛弟子。 阿難的答語有一處值得停住:他不只答「佛是我大師」,還加一句「脩伽陀是我大師」。脩伽陀是佛的別號,阿難重舉別號再答一遍,是把同一件事答得更實。答語末後纔說「我是佛弟子」——先認師,後認弟子,次第分明。論主後文說「阿難為欲令人信故重答」,所指即是此一「重」字。
三、佛印可而以般若三度囑累,令滅度後以愛敬供養佛者愛敬供養般若,莫忘莫失莫作最後斷種人,並示般若在世即佛在世、書持供養不離見佛之益。 這一段是全品經文的主體,內含四層,讀者宜逐層分開看。第一層是印可與結算:「如是!如是!」以下說弟子所應作者「汝已作竟」,並歷數阿難以身、口、意慈業供養供給,「亦常如我意,無有違失」。第二層是轉向:我身現在時你所作的愛敬供養供給,「我滅度後」,這一切都轉向般若波羅蜜。第三層是囑累與誡:「乃至第二、第三,以般若波羅蜜囑累汝」,「汝莫忘莫失,莫作最後斷種人」。第四層是兩個果報之示:般若在世即知有佛在世說法;書持讀誦正憶念廣說並種種供養者,「不離見佛、不離聞法、常親近佛」。四層一氣讀下,可見佛所付的不是一卷書,是一條不斷的法脈。
四、大眾聞佛所說皆大歡喜。 經段以敘事收束,不再有說者。所列之眾自彌勒等諸菩薩摩訶薩起,次及慧命須菩提、舍利弗、大目犍連、摩訶迦葉、富樓那彌多隷耶尼子、摩訶俱絺羅、摩訶迦旃延、阿難等,末總以「并一切大眾,及一切世間諸天、人、犍闥婆、阿修羅等」。此處菩薩列在聲聞之前,而受囑累者卻是聲聞中的阿難——這一列一囑之間的落差,正是論主第二番問答之所由起。末句「皆大歡喜」四字,論主後文另設一問專釋,不可草草讀過。
五、問答一之問:佛已斷法愛,今何以種種因緣囑累是法,似如愛著。 論主起釋即問得極重:佛於一切種智、涅槃尚且「不著不取相」,如今種種因緣殷勤付囑一部般若,外表看去正是愛著之相。這一問不是挑剔,是替讀者把最容易起的疑先問出來。讀論當學此法:凡覺得經文與義理有一處不順,先把不順處說到最盡,再看答語。
六、問答一之答:諸佛大慈悲心從初發意至涅槃門常不捨離,出娑羅雙樹間以金剛三昧碎身如麻米之事。 答語不在「愛」字上辯,而把所愛的對象換過來:佛所不捨離的是眾生,不是法。論主舉一件極重的事作證——於娑羅雙樹間,以金剛三昧為眾生碎身如麻米。連身尚且碎散布施,「何況經法多所饒益而不囑累」。此一反詰要看出其比重:身之於佛尚可捨,法之於眾生則不可不付。囑累之所以不是愛著,正因其所向在此。
七、又阿難未離欲、未盡知般若力勢果報,是以慇懃囑累。 論主補出第二層理由,是就受託人一邊說的:阿難是「未離欲人」,未能盡知般若的力勢與果報多所利益。既然受託者自己還估不準所受之物的分量,付託的人就不能不慇懃。「汝當好受持無令忘失!」一語,正是對這一種受託人說的。此理與後文估客主之喻同一脈。
八、是故佛雖於一切法無憎愛、常寂滅相,而囑累是般若。 論主把兩層理由收成一句斷語:佛於一切法「無憎愛、常寂滅相」與「囑累是般若」二事並存不違。讀者於此當記住一條通則——聖人之無著,不等於無所作為;寂滅相中仍有種種施設,所施設者為眾生,不為自己。
九、問答二之問:阿難是聲聞人,何以以般若囑累而不囑累彌勒等大菩薩。 第二番問答轉到「人」上。此問問得準:般若是菩薩所行之法,受託者卻是聲聞,法與人似不相稱。凡讀大乘經論見聲聞與菩薩並列處,此一類問題最易生起,論主在此一次答足。
十、問答二之答引有人言:阿難常侍佛左右、得聞持陀羅尼、是隨佛轉法輪第三師、是五百阿羅漢師。 論主先引一家之說,逐項列出阿難堪受付囑之德:常侍佛左右、供給所須;得聞持陀羅尼,「一聞常不失」;既是佛之從弟,又多知多識,名聞廣普,為四眾所依;是「能隨佛轉法輪第三師」。中間又插一句反面之證——「佛知舍利弗壽短早滅度故不囑累」,可見選人不唯德,亦計其住世之久。末舉阿難是六神通、三明、共解脫五百阿羅漢之師。逐項皆是本論明文,讀者可自檢:所以堪受付囑者,在『能傳』而不在「已證」。
十一、彌勒等諸大菩薩佛滅度後各各分散,又深知般若力,不須苦囑累。 這是同一答的另一面:諸大菩薩佛滅度後各各分散,至隨所應度眾生國土——彌勒還兜率天上,毘摩羅鞊、文殊師利亦至所應度眾生處。既已分散,各至所應度之處;又「深知般若波羅蜜力」,不須苦切叮嚀。此段給出一條極平實的道理:所以慇懃叮嚀者,正因其不知;知者反而不必。
十二、阿難是聲聞人隨小乘法,是故佛慇懃囑累。 論主以一句收此番問答:所以慇懃,正因其「隨小乘法」。前後合看,第二番問答的答案不是『阿難比菩薩更堪受託』,而是『正因其是聲聞,纔更須慇懃』——問者以為的短處,恰是答者所取的理由。讀論遇此種翻轉,當記其法。
十三、問答三之問:法華等諸餘方等經何以囑累喜王諸菩薩。 既說聲聞須慇懃故囑累阿難,問者立刻舉反例:《法華經》與其餘方等諸經何以囑累喜王等諸菩薩?此問是拿經證問經證,不是拿己見問。全品之中,問者屢用此法,答者亦屢以分別所對之機而答。
十四、問答三之答引有人言:彼時所說甚深難信之法,聲聞人不在;又如不可思議解脫經五百阿羅漢雖在佛邊而不聞。 論主引說作答,理由有二:一者,說彼經時聲聞人不在座;二者,即使在座亦不能受——如佛說《不可思議解脫經》時,五百阿羅漢「雖在佛邊而不聞,或時得聞而不能用」。此二句要分清:不聞是一層,聞而不能用又是一層。付囑之事,不看在場與否,看能用與否。
十五、問答四之問:更有何法甚深勝般若者,而以般若囑累阿難、餘經囑累菩薩。 第四番問把前答逼到極處:若聲聞不堪聞《法華》而堪受《般若》,豈不是說《法華》比《般若》更深?這一問若不破,全論『般若第一』之宗旨即動搖。論主設此問,正為守住宗旨。
十六、問答四之答:般若非祕密法;法華等說阿羅漢受決作佛,大菩薩能受持用,譬如大藥師能以毒為藥。 答語分兩截。前截立宗:「般若波羅蜜非祕密法」——般若是顯說之法,人人可聞,故可付與聲聞。後截解難:《法華》等經說阿羅漢受決作佛,這樣的話要「大菩薩能受持用」,並出一喻——「譬如大藥師能以毒為藥」。此喻須看準所比:毒非藥,而大藥師能用之為藥;同理,「阿羅漢受決作佛」之說在小機聽來能成障礙,在大菩薩手中方成妙用。深淺之判不在法,在用法之人。
十七、復次般若有二種:共聲聞說者、但為住十地大菩薩說者;總相是一而深淺有異。 論主再補一層更細的分別:般若有二種——一者共聲聞說,二者但為十方住十地大菩薩說,「非九住所聞,何況新發意者」;又有九地所聞,乃至初地所聞,「各各不同」。末以一句收攝:「般若波羅蜜總相是一,而深淺有異,是故囑累阿難無咎。」此句最當記取:總相是一,故不可說有兩部般若;深淺有異,故可隨機而付。前答之「非祕密法」與此答之「深淺有異」合成一義,難處自解。
十八、問答五之問:先見阿閦佛品中囑累,今復囑累有何等異。 第五番問轉到體例上:本經先於〈見阿閦佛品〉中已有囑累,何以此處又囑累一次?凡經中同一事再出,讀者易判為重出,論主不許草率,必為之尋其分位。
十九、問答五之答:菩薩道有二種——般若波羅蜜道、方便道;先囑累為說般若體竟,今為說方便竟,故見阿閦佛後說漚和拘捨羅品。 答語立一綱:「菩薩道有二種:一者、般若波羅蜜道,二者、方便道。」前一囑累是「為說般若波羅蜜體竟」,此一囑累是「說令眾生得是般若方便竟」。並舉經之次第為證:〈見阿閦佛〉之後說〈漚和拘捨羅品〉。二囑累各有所了之事,故非重出。讀經遇重出之疑,此段可作範式——先看兩處各結什麼,不看字面同否。
二十、般若波羅蜜中雖有方便、方便中雖有般若,而隨多受名;本體是一,以所用小異故別說,如金師以金作異物。 論主恐人把般若與方便判為兩物,隨即補明:二者互相含攝,只是「隨多受名」。斷語是「般若與方便,本體是一,以所用小異故別說」。次出一喻——金師以巧方便,用金作種種異物,「雖皆是金,而各異名」。此喻極要緊:異名不礙同體,同體不妨異用。學人於一切二法對舉之處,皆可借此喻自照。
廿一、菩薩得般若實相即欲滅度,以方便力不取涅槃證,過二地入菩薩位,知無文字法而引導眾生,是名方便。 論主至此正說方便之相,且說得極具體。菩薩得般若實相——「一切法性空、無所有、寂滅相」——當下即欲滅度;所以不取證者,是方便力。其心中所作之念,論主逐字牒出:「一切法性空,涅槃亦空,我今於菩薩功德未具足,不應取證;功德具足,乃可取證。」由是「過二地,入菩薩位」,住菩薩位中知甚深微妙無文字法而引導眾生。此段可見方便不是權術,是在已見實相之後仍肯住世的那一種力量。
廿二、復次有方便:知畢竟空而能還起善法行六波羅蜜不隨空;若疑、若邪見、若入涅槃、若作佛四事之中,除邪疑不入涅槃是為方便。 論主再說一重方便,重點在「不隨空」三字:知一切法「畢竟空性、無所有」,而「能還起善法、行六波羅蜜」。次列四種事——若疑、若邪見、若入涅槃、若作佛——說明聞般若之後所能生的四種去向;能除邪見與疑、不入涅槃者,即是方便。此四事是一張現成的自檢表:聞空之後,心落在哪一處?落在疑與邪見是失,落在入涅槃是滯,唯末一事是所向。
廿三、有人言:般若於大珍寶聚中最勝,佛知滅度後多有怨賊欲毀壞者,品品囑累猶尚無咎,何況二處。 論主引一說收此番問答:般若「於大珍寶聚中最勝」,而佛預知滅度之後「多有怨賊欲毀壞者」,那麼即使品品皆囑累也無過咎,何況只在兩處。此說把前問『何以二處囑累』一舉翻轉——問者以為二處已多,答者說二處尚少。讀者於此可自省:我們覺得『說得太多』的地方,往往正是說法者知道守不住的地方。
廿四、問答六之問:若囑累,何以乃爾慇懃鄭重。 第六番問不再問『囑累與否』,改問『何以如此慇懃』。前問問事之有無,此問問情之分量。論主不避此問,隨後連出四段答語,是全品中最見人情處。
廿五、問答六之答:佛隨世俗法引導眾生,出估客主遠出他國、以大價妙寶偏獨慇懃囑累其子之喻。 答語先立一義——「佛隨世俗法引導眾生」,慇懃鄭重本是世間付託重物之常態,不足為異。次出喻:估客之主將遠出他國,財寶雖皆囑累於子,而於大價妙寶「偏獨慇懃」,所以者何?「以其子未識妙寶價重故」。喻中又有一轉,最不可略過:旁人因為估客主是識寶價的人,見他如此慇懃,便「必知其貴」;若只聽其子讚說寶價,則「不信之」。可見慇懃不只為受託者而設,也為旁觀者而設——法之貴重,是由識貨者的鄭重顯出來的。
廿六、復次若於餘人異眾中讚歎般若而囑累,人則譏佛自稱讚法;自於弟子中囑累則無嫌。 論主補第二理由,落在避嫌上:若在別的眾中讚歎般若而付囑,人要譏嫌佛「自稱讚法」,因疑而不信;在自己弟子之中囑累,就沒有這一層嫌疑。此段所示的分寸極可用:所說之法愈是自己所重,愈要留意說的場合,免得法未入人心而先起疑。
廿七、復有人言:上品中說寂滅相無戲論、無有決定法可取,人以為無所可貴;今慇懃囑累,則知佛不著空法。 第三理由從前品說起:上品所說是「寂滅相無戲論,是一切智,是中無有決定法可取」,聽者容易由此生出一種誤會——既然無法可取,這法便沒有什麼可貴。今以慇懃囑累一顯,「則知佛不著空法」。末二句更進一層:一切眾生之中愛念般若無過於佛者,佛「知般若恩深故,貴重是般若而慇懃囑累」。這裡的「恩深」二字要讀住:所貴重者,是般若於眾生有恩,不是般若自身可貴。
廿八、有人言:佛欲現中道故囑累——先說諸法空以遮有邊,今慇懃囑累則破無邊,如是則離二邊。 第四理由最為圓足:先說諸法空,所遮者是有邊;今慇懃囑累,所破者是無邊。論主並把兩種誤解對舉——若人謂佛「貪心愛著此法」,佛已以種種因緣說般若空相;若人謂佛「墮斷滅中」,是故慇懃囑累。一空一囑,恰恰治此二病,「如是,則離二邊」。全品讀到此處可以回看:慇懃囑累不是情緒,是中道的一著。
廿九、問答七之問:佛知阿難是弟子,何以故問汝是我弟子不、我是汝師不。 第七番問回到品首那一問。論主不放過這一句『明知故問』,正因全品的付囑是由這一問立起的。讀經當學此眼:最像閒文的地方,往往是結構的關節。
三十、問答七之答:佛有惡弟子須那剎多羅等及須尸摩為盜法故作弟子,是名名字弟子。 答語先舉事:佛有惡弟子如須那剎多羅等,「有少因緣故作弟子」,本意是在佛所取得射法,佛不為說,於是反戒而言「我非佛弟子」;又如須尸摩「為盜法故作弟子」。論主標其名曰「名字弟子」。既有名字弟子在,則「弟子」二字便不足憑,佛所以要當眾問,正為簡別真偽。
卅一、又外道等謂阿難不得已而在佛邊,曾作外道弟子著草衣求神仙,今以佛是其親族尊重故給侍。 第二層是就旁人的疑說的:外道等謂阿難之侍佛是「不得已」——他曾作外道弟子、著草衣、求神仙,如今不過因為佛是其親族,出於尊重而給侍罷了。若這一疑不破,則阿難所傳之法便先被打了折扣。佛當眾一問,正為釋此疑。
卅二、以如是等事故於大眾中問汝是我弟子不;若言是真弟子,當隨我勅。 論主收此二層而出一句極有力的話:「若言是真弟子,當隨我勅。」——當眾自承身分,隨即成為必須受命的理由。付囑之所以能成立,不在佛單方面交付,在受者當眾認定自己的位置。讀者於此可想:凡自稱某門之學人者,所承的不只是名分,是名分所帶的命。
卅三、是故阿難為欲令人信故重答。 論主至此回頭解釋阿難答語之「重」:所以重複再答,不為自明,為「令人信」。前文第二段所見之重舉「脩伽陀是我大師」,其用在此。此一小段極短,卻把經文一處不易察覺的文情落實了。
卅四、論主牒經:佛告阿難弟子所應作法汝盡具足。 論主重牒經文一句以起下釋。此類牒經之句在論中屢見,是論主推展釋義的手法,所牒仍是佛語,不是另起一段經文。讀論當分清二事:論主自己的判說,與論主所牒的經文,繫屬不同。
卅五、弟子法者以善身口意業供給師;有心好而身口不稱、有身口好而心不稱,阿難身口相稱不惜身命,盡具足此事。 論主就「弟子所應作法」逐層解出。總相是「以善身、口、意業供給師」。次分兩種不足:「有弟子心好,身、口業不稱」;「有弟子身、口業好,而心不稱」。次出具足之相:以善心深愛樂師,身、口相稱,「不惜身命、不難懃勞,自捨其心,隨師教勅」。末斷曰阿難「盡具足此事」。此一段可作侍師之準的:心與身口相稱是第一關,「自捨其心」是第二關——所捨者是自己的主張,不是自己的判斷力。
卅六、論主牒經:佛告阿難汝今現在恭敬於我,我滅度後恭敬般若亦當如是。 論主再牒經文,取的正是全品付囑的骨幹句。此句所立的是一個等式:現在對佛的恭敬,滅度後轉向般若,分量不減。以下第八番問答,即由這一等式而起。
卅七、問答八之問:般若是諸佛師,而阿難何以不恭敬其師而恭敬佛。 這一問問得極巧:既說般若是諸佛之師,那麼阿難所應先恭敬的應當是般若纔對,何以現前所恭敬的是佛?問者不是要貶佛,是要問出『以佛喻般若』之所以然。
卅八、問答八之答:阿難雖得初道,漏未盡故不深知法實,是故佛告汝恭敬般若如恭敬我。 答語就阿難的位次說:他「雖得初道」,而「漏未盡故,不深知法實,如佛所知」。既然對般若的實德還知不到,就無從生起相稱的恭敬;佛因此把已有的恭敬作橋——「汝恭敬般若,如恭敬我」。此答給出一條教法上的通則:教人敬其所未識者,須從其所已識者引。
卅九、復次眾生見佛相好光明多愛敬,般若微妙甚深無形無色智者能知,是故佛以身喻般若。 論主更就一般眾生說:見佛「三十二相、八十隨形好、大光明、金色身」者多生愛敬,而般若「微妙甚深,無形、無色」,唯「智者能知」。又加一句:佛身相好,「愚、智視之,皆無厭足」——愚者智者同能受用,故堪作喻。斷語是「是故佛以身喻般若」。讀者於此可知:佛以自身作喻並非自尊,是取一個愚智共見之物,來指一個唯智能知之法。
四十、佛在世時能自遮魔,是故佛告阿難我滅度後好守護般若。 論主補出付囑在時節上的理由:佛在世時「能自遮魔」,故般若不待人護;滅度之後,遮魔之事便落在弟子身上。「我滅度後,好守護般若」一語的分量,正在這一『自』與『不自』之間。守護之責的來歷,至此說明。
四一、問答九之問:一囑累則足,何以至三。 第九番問轉到次數上。前此所問皆是「何以囑累」,此問是『何以三』。問得極細,而論主的答語也就把「慇懃」一事的分際說到了底。
四二、問答九之答:佛深愛般若波羅蜜故三囑。 答語只一句,且用「深愛」二字。此處不可讀成佛有愛著——前第一番問答已破此疑,所謂「深愛」者,是深知其於眾生之恩。答得如此簡短,是為引出下一問。
四三、問答十之問:若深愛者,何限於三。 這一問是承前答而來的必然之問:既是深愛,何以恰恰停在三?前問嫌其多,此問嫌其少——兩問一夾,中道之量自現。論主設此連環二問,用意在此。
四四、問答十之答:諸佛常法語不過三;過三不從則執金剛神以杵擬之,又其意若過三不從則是逆人便當殺之。 答語先立通則:「諸佛常法,語不過三。」次舉其嚴:若過三不從,執金剛神「則以杵擬之」;又執金剛神之意,過三不從即是逆人,「便當殺之」。末結「是故佛問不過三」。此段所說者是佛法中付囑之定制,非本品一時之設。讀者於此不必求其事相之細,當取其義:三之為限,是給受託者留足回轉的餘地,也是給付託者立下不強人之界。
四五、復次若一說猶緩,過三太急,似如凡夫貪著者。 論主再從分寸上說:一說則「猶緩」,過三則「太急」,急到似乎成了凡夫的貪著。此語極可玩味——慇懃若過了量,反而落回論主第一番問答所破的「似如愛著」之譏。可見中道不只在義理上,也在語言的輕重之間。
四六、復次受者心有三種,鈍根者至三乃生善心;阿難雖復利根而心向聲聞但一身求度,是故三告。 論主更從受者一邊說:受者之心有三種,鈍根的人「至三乃生善心」。次就阿難言:他雖是利根,然「心向聲聞,但一身求度」,志在自度而不在廣傳,故仍須三告。此段把「三」的理由落到具體的人身上,前文所說之通制至此有了著落。讀者亦可自省:我於所受之教,是一聞即受,還是須再三而後動心?
四七、所以囑累者為不令法滅;展轉相教如一燈然餘燈其明轉多,莫作最後斷種人者如世人有子不紹繼則名斷種最為可恥。 論主至此總說付囑之所為:「為不令法滅故。」其法是展轉相教——「汝當教化弟子,弟子復教餘人」,並出一喻:「譬如一燈復然餘燈,其明轉多。」次釋「莫作最後斷種人」一語:世人有子而不紹繼則名斷種,「最為可恥」,佛以此喻告阿難:「汝莫於汝身上令般若斷絕!」此段所立的責任極重而極平實——不在證幾地,在不使這一盞燈在自己手上熄掉。
四八、問答十一之問:先品中明般若說亦不增不說亦不減畢竟寂滅相,今何以言莫令斷滅,譬如虛空誰能滅者。 第十一番問是全品最險的一問,且問者以本論前文為據:先品已明「般若波羅蜜,說亦不增、不說亦不減,畢竟寂滅相」,既是如此,何以又說「莫令斷滅」?並出一喻自證:「譬如虛空,誰能滅者?」此問若不破,則全品的付囑在義理上落空。讀者於此可先自答一遍,再看論主如何分。
四九、問答十一之答:般若雖寂滅無生滅如虛空不可戲論,而文字語言書經卷為他人說是此中般若,於此因中而說其果。 答語把「般若」二字分出兩重:實相般若「寂滅、無生無滅相、如虛空、不可戲論」,此一重確實無可滅者;而「文字語言書般若波羅蜜經卷,為他人說」者,是「此中般若」——本品所囑累的正是這一重。末一句是關鍵:「於此因中而說其果。」文字經卷是因,實相般若是果,經中是於因上說果之名,故可言斷、可言不斷。此一分別是讀一切『法滅』『法住』之說的鑰匙。
五十、凡人聞般若微妙即生著心、取般若相、分別諸法,以分別故生著、以著故鬪諍、以鬪諍故起諸罪業,如是人名為滅般若波羅蜜。 論主接著給「滅般若」下一個出人意表的界說:滅般若的不是外道、不是怨賊,是聞般若而起著心的人。其次第論主說得極分明:聞微妙而生著心,取般若之相,分別「是善、是不善,是世間、是涅槃」等;以分別故於法中生著,以著故鬪諍,以鬪諍故起諸罪業。「如是人名為滅般若波羅蜜。」讀者於此當凜然:最能斷般若之種者,正是自以為護持般若的人。
五一、佛告阿難汝當如般若波羅蜜相莫著文字語言教化眾生,是名不滅。 既說何者為滅,隨即說何者為不滅。論主牒佛語作答:「汝當如般若波羅蜜相,莫著文字語言,教化眾生。」——所守者不是不用文字,是用文字而不著。末三字「是名不滅」與前段「名為滅」相對,兩界說合成一義:法之存亡不在卷帙之有無,在讀者取相與否。
五二、論主牒經:隨般若在世幾時則知爾許時佛在世,如經中廣說。 論主牒出經中第四層之語,並註「如經中廣說」,示此義經文已具。牒而不釋,是要讀者回看經文;下一段纔正釋其所以然。
五三、佛說囑累因緣:有般若在世則為佛在;般若是諸佛母,諸佛以法為師,若師在母在不名為失利。 論主先說緣起:佛慇懃囑累之際,「在會眾生有疑」,故佛說出囑累的因緣,所謂「有般若在世,則為佛在」。次釋其理,理有三節:其一、「般若波羅蜜是諸佛母」;其二、「諸佛以法為師。法者,即是般若波羅蜜」;其三、「若師在、母在,不名為失利」,所以者何?「利本在故。」故結曰:「若般若在世,佛亦在世。」此一節不是安慰之辭,是就法與佛的關係立說——佛之所以為佛,其本在此法;本在,則所得之利不失。
五四、又法寶不離佛寶:菩薩有相好而不名佛,得法寶故名為佛;如人從佛得利乃至得解脫涅槃,於般若中能信行者亦以三乘法入涅槃。 論主再從另一面說:法寶不離佛寶。其證是一件人人可驗之事——菩薩已有「三十二相、八十隨形好」而「不名為佛」,「得法寶故名為佛」。既然佛之名由法寶而立,「法寶即是般若波羅蜜」,則般若在世與佛在世無二。末更就受用邊說:如人從佛得利乃至得解脫涅槃,若人「於般若中能信行」,亦以三乘法而入涅槃。斷語是「說法無異」。
五五、論主牒經:若有人聽受般若及書持等,當知是人不離見佛、聞法、親近諸佛。 論主牒出經中最後一層果報之語,以起下一番問答。此句是經文所許之大利,而正因其大,纔引出下文『重罪之人亦得此不』之難。
五六、問答十二之問:有人重罪三不善業成就,聽受書持般若,云何當得不離諸佛、聞法、親近佛。 第十二番問問得極實際:身、口、意三不善業成就的重罪之人,只憑聽、受、書、持般若,就能得這樣的果報嗎?此問替一切『聞法而行未淨』的人問到了心坎上,論主的答語也因此極有分寸。
五七、問答十二之答:是事先品中已答;聽法者有二種——但聽而不信受行者、聽而信受奉行者;一心聽聞信受奉行、厭世愛涅槃、離小乘樂大乘,是名真聽,誦讀亦如是。 論主先指出此難先品已答,隨即重述其分別:聽法者有二種——「但聽而不信受行」與「聽而信受奉行」。並出一譬以定名:如弟子不聽、不信受行師語,「是名不聽」。真聽之相則有四事:一心聽聞、信受奉行、厭世愛涅槃、離小乘樂大乘。末補一句「誦、讀亦如是」,可見前所列之書持讀誦,件件皆須以此為準。前問所疑的『重罪之人』之所以有疑,正因人們只看他有沒有讀,不看他是不是真聽。
五八、正憶念者隨如佛意、離有無二邊行於中道;如所聞受持及其義解為他人解說,初始微薄乃至其心轉厚功德轉多牢固不動。 論主續釋經文所列之「正憶念」:其相是「隨如佛意,離有無二邊,行於中道」。次列所行之事:如所聞受持、義解、為他人解說,以及恭敬、尊重、供養、讚歎、花香等。末說其漸次:「初始微薄,乃至正憶念、為他人說,其心轉厚,功德轉多,牢固不動。」此段給出的是一條由淺入深之路——不必一起手就到「牢固不動」,但須看得見自己是不是在轉厚。
五九、若智者知般若功德而供養者福德重,不知者供養福德微薄;福德純厚者轉身不離見佛聞法,微薄者償眾罪已久後亦必當得佛。 論主至此正答前問。分兩等:知般若功德而供養者「福德重」,不知者「福德微薄」。二等之果亦分兩路:純厚者「轉身不離見佛、聞法、親近諸佛」;微薄者「不言轉身得三福報」,須「償眾罪已,久後亦必當得佛」。此答之妙在不許人僥倖,也不令人絕望——重罪之人並非不得此利,只是不得於轉身之時;償罪之後,終亦得佛。讀者於此當看住兩處:一是「知」與「不知」之別在福德輕重,二是「久後」二字不作虛語。
六十、此中佛總說福德純厚微薄,漸漸皆當見十方佛聞佛所說,漸漸具足六波羅蜜皆得作佛。 論主收束前段,指出佛在此處是「總說」——不論純厚微薄,末後同歸一處:「漸漸皆當見十方佛、聞佛所說,漸漸具足六波羅蜜,皆得作佛。」兩個「漸漸」要讀住:其所許的不是頓得,是必至。前段之分別與此段之總說並看,纔是經意。
六一、佛以佛眼見般若有如是大利益眾生故慇懃囑累。 論主以一句總結前來一大段:佛所以慇懃,是以佛眼親見般若於眾生有如是大利。至此,第一番問答所起之疑——「似如愛著」——已被全部答語從各面補實:所見者是眾生之利,故所作者是囑累而非愛著。
六二、問答十三之問:諸大阿羅漢已證實際無復憂喜,小喜尚無何況大歡喜。 第十三番問回到經文末句「皆大歡喜」。此問極有分量:已證實際的人不當有憂喜之動,連小喜尚且沒有,經文何以說「大歡喜」?讀經最易滑過的套語,論主偏要在此立問。
六三、問答十三之答:諸大阿羅漢雖離三界欲而未得一切智慧,於諸甚深法中猶疑不了;今了了解說斷除其疑,是故大歡喜。 答語就其所未足處說:大阿羅漢「雖離三界欲」,而「未得一切智慧」,故「於諸甚深法中猶疑不了」。今於摩訶般若波羅蜜中「了了解說,斷除其疑」,所以大歡喜。可見此喜不是情緒之動,是疑去之後的明快。讀者於此可自驗:真正解疑之後的那一種輕安,與世間可喜之事所引的歡喜,體性不同。
六四、復次此諸大弟子已證實際;實際者即是空無相無量無所分別,佛以此寂滅法種種分別名字語言譬喻廣說,亦不壞法性又不與世間相違,諸阿羅漢是法中證故大歡喜。 論主再出一重理由,且把「實際」二字解開:「即是空、無相、無量,無所分別。」而佛能以此無所分別之寂滅法,「種種分別名字、語言、譬喻廣說」,而「亦不壞法性,又不與世間相違」。大阿羅漢正是於此法中得證的人,見佛能如此說而不壞其所證,所以大歡喜。此段所贊者是佛的說法之能——於無分別中作分別而兩不相礙,這本身就是可喜之事。
六五、佛善說是空無相無量寂滅法,諸餘大眾未悉漏盡而信力深故亦大歡喜,言此法能盡我等生死苦令得佛道。 論主又說在會的其餘大眾:他們「未悉漏盡」,所憑者是「信力深」。其所以喜者,論主逐字錄其語:「此法能盡我等生死苦,令得佛道。」前段說已證者之喜由解疑,此段說未證者之喜由信力——兩種喜各有其據,同歸於法。
六六、如是等無量因緣故大眾皆歡喜。 論主以一句總收此番問答:所舉之因緣不止前列數種,故言「無量」。經文「皆大歡喜」四字至此有了實義:不是文末的套語,是各隨其位而各得其喜。
六七、問答十四之問:佛既囑累阿難是般若,佛般涅槃後阿難共大迦葉結集三藏,此中何以不說。 第十四番問,也是全品最後一問,問的是史事:既然佛把般若囑累給阿難,而阿難後來與大迦葉共結集三藏,何以三藏之中不見此法?此問若不釋,則前面所說的付囑在事上落空。論主連出數答,且答得極具體。
六八、問答十四之答:摩訶衍甚深難信難解難行;佛在世時有諸比丘聞摩訶衍不信不解從坐而去,何況佛般涅槃後。 第一答就機說:摩訶衍「甚深難信、難解難行」。並舉佛在世時之事為證——有諸比丘聞摩訶衍而不信不解,「從坐而去」。佛親自在座尚且如此,何況涅槃之後。「以是故不說」一句,說的是結集之際的實情,不是摩訶衍不足傳。
六九、復次三藏正有三十萬偈并為九百六十萬言,摩訶衍甚多無量無限;諸天龍神壽命長久識念力強故能持千億萬偈,今世人壽命短促識念力薄小般若尚不能讀。 第二答就量說。論主先出三藏之數:「三藏正有三十萬偈,并為九百六十萬言。」次出摩訶衍之量:〈般若波羅蜜品〉二萬二千偈,〈大般若品〉十萬偈,諸龍王、阿修羅王、諸天宮中有千億萬偈等。其所以能持者,「此諸天、龍、神壽命長久、識念力強故」。反觀今世之人「壽命短促、識念力薄」,連〈小般若波羅蜜品〉尚且不能讀,何況更多。此段所說的不是人不堪聞,是器不受量——結集者所選的是此土能持之分。
七十、諸餘大菩薩所知般若無量無限;佛非但一身所說,無量世中或變化作無數身,是故所說無量。 論主更推一層:諸大菩薩所知的般若「無量無限」。其所以無量,理由給得極明白——「佛非但一身所說」,於無量世中「或變化作無數身」,所以所說無量。此語可解一種常見之疑:佛一生說法不過數十年,何以有如許大部經典?論主所答不在辯其年月,在明其非一身一世之說。
七一、又有不可思議解脫經等諸大經各各十萬偈,無量無邊如大海中寶,云何可入三藏中;小物應在大中,大物不得入小;若欲問應言小乘何以不在摩訶衍中。 論主續列諸大經之目:《不可思議解脫經》十萬偈,《諸佛本起經》、《寶雲經》、《大雲經》、《法雲經》各各十萬偈,《法華經》、《華手經》、《大悲經》、《方便經》、《龍王問經》、《阿修羅王問經》等諸大經,「無量無邊,如大海中寶」。隨即出一理:「小物應在大中,大物不得入小。」並把問題翻過來還給問者:若欲問,應言「小乘何以不在摩訶衍中?」末斷曰「摩訶衍能兼小乘法故,是故不應如汝所問」。此一翻轉是本品論議之要例——問處若設錯了大小,答語便永不能安;論主先正其所問,難自不成。
七二、復次有人言:如摩訶迦葉將諸比丘在耆闍崛山中集三藏,佛滅度後文殊尸利、彌勒諸大菩薩亦將阿難集是摩訶衍。 論主引一說,正面回答『摩訶衍何處結集』:迦葉將諸比丘於耆闍崛山中結集三藏,而文殊尸利、彌勒諸大菩薩「亦將阿難集是摩訶衍」。可注意的是兩處結集之中阿難皆在——前所付囑的般若,至此有了傳承的著落。此說論主以「有人言」引出,繫屬分明,讀者當如其所繫而受,不強作定論。
七三、又阿難知籌量眾生志業大小,故不於聲聞人中說摩訶衍;佛法皆是一種一味所謂苦盡解脫味,此味有二——但自為身、兼為一切眾生,是故有大小乘差別。 論主再補一層,且說到了大小乘分判的根源。阿難「知籌量眾生志業大小」,故不在聲聞人中說摩訶衍——「說則錯亂,無所成辦」。次立一義:「佛法皆是一種一味,所謂苦盡解脫味。」味雖一,而受者之心有二:「一者、但自為身,二者、兼為一切眾生。」雖同求一解脫門,「而有自利、利人之異」,大小乘之別由此而立。末結:為此二種人故,佛口所說「以文字語言分為二種:三藏是聲聞法,摩訶衍是大乘法」。此段極要緊——大小之分不在法味,在發心;分教是隨機之施設,不是法有兩體。
七四、復次佛在世時無有三藏名,但有持修多羅、持毘尼、持摩多羅迦比丘;修多羅有二分,毘尼亦有二分——摩偷羅國毘尼含阿波陀那本生有八十部,罽賓國毘泥除却本生阿波陀那但取要用作十部。 論主末後從名相的源流上說。佛在世時本無「三藏」之名,只有「持修多羅比丘、持毘尼比丘、持摩多羅迦比丘」。次釋修多羅:是四《阿鋡》中的經名,也是摩訶衍中的經名;有二分——四阿含中修多羅、摩訶衍經名為大;故「修多羅入二分,亦大乘、亦小乘」,二百五十戒等亦名修多羅。次釋毘尼:「名比丘作罪,佛結戒:應行是、不應行是,作是事得是罪」,略說有八十部,亦有二分——摩偷羅國毘尼含阿波陀那、本生,有八十部;罽賓國毘泥除却本生、阿波陀那,「但取要用作十部」,並有八十部毘婆沙解釋。此段所示者是一件讀教者常忽略的事:部類的名目是後起的,且各地所結不同;以後起之名目去繩前代之實,往往生出無謂之諍。
七五、是故知摩訶般若波羅蜜經等在修多羅經中,以經大、事異故別說,是故不在集三藏中。 論主以一句斷全問:《摩訶般若波羅蜜經》等本在修多羅經之中,只因「經大、事異」而別出,並非在三藏之外別有一法。前問所疑的「何以不說」至此全解——不是不傳,是別行。全品十四番問答至此結束,義理之事已畢。
七六、譯場跋文:究摩羅耆婆法師秦弘始三年至長安,四年夏於逍遙園為姚天王出此釋論,七年十二月二十七日乃訖;兼出諸經律論向五十萬言,并此釋論一百五十萬言;初品三十四卷是全論具本,二品已下法師略之。 全論之末不是義理,是一段譯場的記事,如實讀之即可,不必強求義解。其所記者有四事:時地——弘始三年歲在辛丑十二月二十日至長安,四年夏於逍遙園中西門閣上為姚天王出此釋論,七年十二月二十七日乃訖;旁及——其中兼出經本、禪經、戒律、百論、禪法要解,「向五十萬言」,并此釋論「一百五十萬言」;體例——「論初品三十四卷,解釋一品,是全論具本;二品已下,法師略之,取其足以開釋文意而已,不復備其廣釋」;分量——「得此百卷,若盡出之,將十倍於此」。此四事與本品所說之囑累恰成一對照:經中所付的是『莫令斷絕』,此處所記的是這一部論如何在漢地接住了那一囑。讀者讀全論至此,宜略停一停——所讀的百卷,是「略之」以後的十分之一。
不要讀錯
不要把「囑累」讀成佛對般若起了愛著。論主第一番問答已把此疑正面破過:佛所不捨離的是眾生,不是法;於娑羅雙樹間尚且以金剛三昧為眾生碎身如麻米,「何況經法多所饒益而不囑累」。若讀成佛愛著此法,則後文「佛雖於一切法無憎愛、常寂滅相,而囑累是般若」一句便無處安放。
不要把『囑累阿難而不囑累菩薩』讀成聲聞勝於菩薩。論主給的理由是三面的:阿難堪能傳持、諸大菩薩滅度後各各分散且已深知般若之力、阿難「隨小乘法」故須慇懃。三面合看,所取者是『須慇懃』與『能久住此土傳持』,不是位次的高下。若讀成高下之判,則同一論中『不共般若但為住十地大菩薩說』之文即與之相違。
不要把「莫令斷滅」讀成般若自身可以被人滅掉。論主答得極分明:實相般若「寂滅、無生無滅相、如虛空、不可戲論」,此一重無可滅者;所囑累的是「文字語言書般若波羅蜜經卷,為他人說」這一重,是「於此因中而說其果」。可令斷絕的是為因的文字流通這一重,如虛空的那一重無可滅者——兩重不分,則『不增不減』與「莫令斷滅」必成自語相違。
不要把「滅般若波羅蜜」讀成外人所作的事。論主所指的滅法者,是聞般若而「生著心,取般若相,分別諸法」的人——以分別故生著,以著故鬪諍,以鬪諍故起諸罪業。護法之心若帶著取相,正落在此中。反之,「如般若波羅蜜相,莫著文字語言,教化眾生」纔「是名不滅」。
不要把「有般若在世,則為佛在」讀成一句安慰。論主給的是理由,不是慰語:般若是諸佛母,「諸佛以法為師。法者,即是般若波羅蜜」,故「若師在、母在,不名為失利」,所以者何?「利本在故。」又以菩薩具相好而不名佛、「得法寶故名為佛」為證。所立的是法與佛的本末關係,不是情感上的替代。
不要把『聽受書持即得不離見佛』讀成不須信行。論主分聽法者為二種,唯「一心聽聞,信受奉行,厭世、愛涅槃,離小乘、樂大乘」者「是名真聽」;供養亦分知與不知,福德有重有薄。重罪之人非不得此利,而是「償眾罪已,久後亦必當得佛」。若略去這些分別,經文之許便成了僥倖之門。
不要把『三藏中不說摩訶衍』讀成摩訶衍非佛說。論主所答者三:難信難解故不說於彼時,量大器小故不入於彼部,別行之故「以經大、事異故別說」。又記文殊尸利、彌勒諸大菩薩將阿難集是摩訶衍一說。末更把問處翻正——若欲問,應言「小乘何以不在摩訶衍中?」讀者若把『不在三藏中』逕讀為『不出佛口』,則與論主所立之「佛法皆是一種一味」全然相違。
修行作用
第一件受用,是把『恭敬般若如恭敬佛』當作現前可作之事。佛給阿難的不是一個新功課,是一個轉向:現在對佛所作的愛敬、供養、供給,滅度之後原樣轉向般若。論主釋其所以然——般若「無形、無色,智者能知」,故以愚智共見的佛身作喻。行人於此可自問:我對佛像、對道場所起的那一分鄭重,有沒有同分轉到經法上來?
第二件受用,是認出自己是不是「真聽」。論主給的判準有四:一心聽聞、信受奉行、厭世愛涅槃、離小乘樂大乘;並以弟子不信受行師語為「不聽」之喻,末補「誦、讀亦如是」。這一條可以逐日自驗——今日所讀的一段,是入了心,還是只過了眼。
第三件受用,是守住『不著文字語言』的分寸。論主所斥的滅法者,正是取般若之相而分別是善是不善、是世間是涅槃,因分別生著,因著生諍。行人讀經最易落此:讀得愈熟,愈易以所得之語去衡量他人。此時可持論主一語自照——「汝當如般若波羅蜜相,莫著文字語言,教化眾生。」
第四件受用,是學「語不過三」的分寸。佛深愛般若而三度囑累,過三則不更言;論主說得明白:一說猶緩,過三太急,「似如凡夫貪著者」。凡以法勸人者可取此為則——當說則說,說至再三而彼不受,即止。止不是捨棄,是不令法因強聒而受輕。
第五件受用,是接住那一盞燈。論主說付囑之所為只一句:「為不令法滅故。」其法是「汝當教化弟子,弟子復教餘人,展轉相教」,喻為「一燈復然餘燈,其明轉多」;反面則是「莫作最後斷種人」。這一條不問地位高下、不問所證深淺——凡從法中得過一分利益的人,都在這一盞燈的傳處。全論以此收束,其意可思。
承衍
本品的骨幹,是一段經文與一段論釋。經①自佛問阿難「佛是汝大師不?汝是佛弟子不?」起,阿難答佛是我大師、脩伽陀是我大師、我是佛弟子;佛印可而說弟子所應作者汝已作竟,次令滅度之後以愛敬供養供給佛者愛敬供養般若波羅蜜,「乃至第二、第三,以般若波羅蜜囑累汝」,誡以莫忘莫失、莫作最後斷種人,並示二事——隨般若在世即知有佛在世說法、書持讀誦正憶念廣說並種種供養者不離見佛不離聞法常親近佛;末以彌勒等諸菩薩摩訶薩及慧命須菩提等大弟子并一切大眾及諸天人犍闥婆阿修羅等聞佛所說皆大歡喜作敘事收束。論①以問答十四番為骨,間以牒經重釋與有人言、復次之補說:先答佛已斷法愛何以囑累而出大慈悲心常不捨離、碎身如麻米之事;次答何以囑累聲聞阿難而不囑累彌勒等大菩薩,並陳阿難堪傳之德與諸菩薩分散深知之由;次答法華等諸餘方等經何以囑累喜王諸菩薩;次答更有何法甚深勝般若而立般若非祕密法、出大藥師以毒為藥之喻並共不共二種般若之分;次答先見阿閦佛品中囑累與今囑累有何等異而立般若道方便道二門,說金師以金作異物之喻與二重方便之相;次答何以慇懃鄭重而出估客主囑累妙寶之喻、自於弟子中囑累則無嫌、佛不著空法、欲現中道離二邊四說;次答佛何以故問汝是我弟子不而舉名字弟子與外道之疑;次牒經釋弟子所應作法與恭敬般若如恭敬我,答般若是諸佛師而阿難何以恭敬佛,出佛以身喻般若之義;次答一囑累則足何以至三而立諸佛常法語不過三、一說猶緩過三太急、受者心有三種三說;次釋所以囑累者為不令法滅、一燈然餘燈之喻與莫作最後斷種人之誡;次答先品明不增不減今何以言莫令斷滅而分實相般若與文字般若、於因中說果,並界說何者名為滅般若、何者名為不滅;次釋般若在世則為佛在之理與法寶不離佛寶之義;次答重罪之人聽受書持云何得不離諸佛而分真聽與不聽、福德純厚與微薄;次答諸大阿羅漢已證實際何以大歡喜而出斷疑與佛能於無分別中作分別二義;末答結集三藏中何以不說摩訶衍而出難信、量大、別行三答,並記文殊尸利彌勒將阿難集摩訶衍一說、大小乘由發心而分之義、三藏名目之源流;全論以究摩羅耆婆法師出此釋論之始末跋文收束。
本品與前後諸品的義脈,可見者有二。其一、承前:前品〈曇無竭品〉終於常啼求法之事,本品即以佛付囑阿難護持般若起,求法與護法前後相望,一在能求,一在能守。其二、本品即全論之末品,其後無次品可垂——全論以卷尾題「大智度論卷第一百」收,而卷尾之前先有譯場跋文一段,記此論在漢地譯出之始末。經中所誡的「莫作最後斷種人」,與卷末所記的譯出之事,恰好首尾相接:一在囑其莫斷,一記其實未斷。
古德之釋,本品可誌者一家。吉藏於《大品經義疏》中釋本品,其品題作「囑累品第九十」,與本論品題同。其科本品之大分云:「此下第二、明付屬流通方便。」隨即設般若與方便之異同一問而自答云:「般若此品別而為論,付屬流通方便智慧與方便云何異耶?答:論云般若方便無有二物,隨用不同故開二耳。如金剛與金更無有異,而善巧以金為釧,故有金有釧二事不同也。」——其所引之「論云」與本論本品「般若與方便,本體是一,以所用小異故別說」及金師以金作異物之喻取義相同,而所設之喻作金與釧,與本論作金師作種種異物者詳略不同,並錄不判。其釋佛何故付囑云:「問:何故佛付屬流通耶?答:慈悲攝物何俟問耶?佛尚破身利益,況法寶耶?又上說空破有捨,今何屬破空?欲示中道故付屬也。」——先以慈悲攝物(舉佛尚破身利益為況)、次以欲示中道,分二節釋之,與本論第一番問答及「佛欲現中道故囑累」一說相應。其釋何以付囑阿難云:「問:知付屬有利,何故不付屬菩薩而屬阿難?阿難是聲聞人,般若是菩薩法也。答:欲令物信故。」又云:「菩薩知般若恩德,自弘宣之,不須付屬。阿難是小乘人,不知般若恩,是故佛付屬也。」其釋法華等經何以付囑菩薩云:「答:法華明二乘作佛是秘密法,般若是顯現法。顯現法易用,秘密法難用。小藥師能用藥為藥,大藥師乃用毒作藥也。」又云:「又有共、不共二般若,不共般若付屬菩薩,共者付聲聞也。」——本論作「般若波羅蜜非祕密法」而以《法華》等說阿羅漢受決作佛為大菩薩所能受持用,吉藏則逕以「秘密」「顯現」對舉而分屬之,取義相近而立名不同,並錄不判。其問摩訶衍結集之處云:「問:付屬阿難三藏,三藏在屬山,與迦葉結集。付阿難般若,何處集耶?答:文殊將阿難結集,未知何處。一云還在屬山,二云是鐵圍山邊也。」——本論但記文殊尸利、彌勒諸大菩薩將阿難集是摩訶衍而不言其處,吉藏於處所並列二說而自標「未知何處」,誌錄不判。其科經文之章段云:「品為二:初、明付屬流通;二、大眾歡喜奉行。初三:第一、明慇懃付屬,令尊重供養;二、明付屬阿難,令流通不絕;三、明付囑之意也。今是初文。」其釋佛何故問阿難云:「問:佛知阿難是弟子,何故今方問耶?答:二義:一、為簡真偽。」——與本論舉名字弟子、外道之疑二事者同一意趣。其釋第二第三之囑云:「第二、第三者,佛法不過三事,不受佛語便是逆人,金剛神便煞之。又過多則大,過不足故,但其三也。」其釋莫忘莫失一節云:「汝莫忘莫失下,第一、付囑令流通不斷絕也。人子不能紹繼家業,為斷種人,最為耻。」其釋大眾歡喜一段云:「問:無憂無喜是羅漢功德,尚無不喜云何言大喜?答:羅漢於四諦無疑、於一切法中皆疑,今說般若破其種種疑心,喜也,盡此無餘也。」——本論以「未得一切智慧故,於諸甚深法中猶疑不了」釋之,吉藏則作「於四諦無疑、於一切法中皆疑」,所判疑之分位小異,並錄不判。吉藏此疏釋至本品而止,其後即題「大品經義疏卷第十」,是其書亦以囑累品為終,與本論品目同處收束;卷末別有寫本抄者之跋一段,記其校合所據之本云「嘉元三年二月下旬候,以東南院古本終,交合切了……」,繫屬抄者非吉藏,誌錄備考。慧影之疏現存部分不及本品,據實標闕,不以他處之文充之,惟其科判數語曾前指本品(詳考據層);其書另有同名之〈囑累品〉釋文,所釋者是本論前分之同名異品,非本品之釋,不得引以充數。均正之書體例非逐品疏解,於本品無可引之文,亦據實誌其闕。本品品題諸本異稱及經本一系品目之異,詳考據層。
Entrustment: Why the Buddha, Having Already Severed Love of Dharmas, Still Earnestly Entrusts without This Becoming Love and Clinging; Why He Entrusts Prajñā to Ānanda the Śrāvaka and Not to Maitreya and the Other Great Bodhisattvas; Why the Lotus and Other Sūtras Entrust, the Other Way Round, to Bodhisattvas; Why, Prajñā Not Being a Secret Dharma, It Is Said That Only Great Bodhisattvas Can Receive, Uphold, and Use It; Why, Having Already Entrusted It in "Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha", Entrusting It Again Now Is Not a Repetition; Why the Path of Prajñā and the Path of Skilful Means, One in Original Substance, Must Be Divided into Two Names; Why He Is Earnest and Solemn up to Three Tellings without Falling into the Craving and Clinging of Ordinary People; Why the Buddha, Knowing Full Well That Ānanda Is His Disciple, Still Asks before the Assembly Whether He Is His Disciple; Why, Prajñā Being the Teacher of the Buddhas, What Ānanda Reveres Is the Buddha; Why, One Entrustment Being Enough, It Goes to Three and beyond Three Adds No More; Why, an Earlier Chapter Having Made Clear That Prajñā Is Not Increased by Being Taught nor Decreased by Not Being Taught, It Now Says Do Not Let It Be Cut Off and Extinguished; On What Ground It Is Said That Prajñā Being in the World Is the Buddha Being in the World; How People of Heavy Sin Who Hear, Receive, Write Out, and Uphold It Can Be Not Apart from the Buddhas; Why the Great Arhats Who Have Already Realised the Limit of Reality Still Have Great Joy; Why, the Buddha Having Entrusted It to Ānanda, the Mahāyāna Is Not Seen in the Compiling of the Three Baskets; and Why the Whole Treatise Is Gathered In by the Colophon of the Translation Hall on How the Treatise Was Brought Out from Beginning to End
What Is Being Asked
This chapter is the last chapter of the whole treatise, and the matter it speaks of is extremely simple: the Buddha hands prajñāpāramitā over to Ānanda. The sūtra text is short, but the questions are large—so large that only when the whole treatise has walked this far can they be asked.
The Buddha first asks something that seems superfluous: 「佛是汝大師不?汝是佛弟子不?」 tr. "Is the Buddha your great teacher? Are you the Buddha's disciple?" Ānanda answers, the Buddha confirms it once more, and only then does he say what he means to hand over: in the way you loved, revered, and made offerings to me while I was in the world, after my passing into extinction turn all this loving, revering, and making offerings toward prajñāpāramitā; and so on up to a second time and a third time, I entrust prajñāpāramitā to you; do not forget it, do not lose it, do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage. The sūtra text then gives a criterion: 「隨爾所時般若波羅蜜在世,當知爾所時有佛在世說法。」 tr. "For however long a time prajñāpāramitā is in the world, know that for so long a time there is a Buddha in the world teaching the Dharma." Finally it says that those who write it out, uphold, read, recite, and make offerings to it are 「不離見佛、不離聞法、常親近佛」 tr. "not apart from seeing the Buddha, not apart from hearing the Dharma, and always close to the Buddha", and it concludes with the great assembly rejoicing.
What the treatise-author does on taking it over is not to say this passage once more, but to pick out fourteen places of unease within it and ask about them one by one. The first place is the most important: the Buddha has already severed love of dharmas, and even toward the omniscience of all kinds and nirvāṇa he does not cling and does not grasp at marks; now, by all kinds of causes and conditions, he entrusts this one Dharma—does that not look like exactly love and clinging? If this question is not broken, the whole chapter becomes the Buddha contradicting his own words. The treatise-author's way of answering does not argue from ‘the Buddha does not love and cling’, but speaks from ‘the Buddha's great compassion, from the first arousing of intent up to the gate of nirvāṇa, is never abandoned’—between the twin śāla trees he could even, by the vajra samādhi, break his body into pieces like hemp seeds and rice for the sake of beings; how much more a sūtra-dharma that enriches so many. The reason the entrustment is not love and clinging is that what is loved is not the Dharma itself but the beings who hear the Dharma and are saved.
The second place asks about the person: prajñā is the dharma of bodhisattvas; why hand it to a śrāvaka? The treatise-author sets out several sayings side by side: Ānanda always attended at the Buddha's left and right, obtained the dhāraṇī of hearing and retaining, hearing once and never losing it, and is the third teacher who can turn the wheel of the Dharma following the Buddha; the great bodhisattvas each scatter after the Buddha's passing into extinction, and moreover already deeply know the power of prajñā, so they need no bitter urging. The third place asks back in return: then why do the Lotus and other sūtras entrust them to bodhisattvas? The treatise-author answers that what those sūtras teach is a very deep dharma hard to believe, and that the śrāvakas were not present in the assembly, or heard and could not use it. The fourth place presses one layer further: is there then a dharma deeper than prajñā? The treatise-author answers with great steadiness—prajñā is not a secret dharma; it is only that the Lotus and the others say that arhats receive the prediction and become Buddhas, which only great bodhisattvas can put to use, 「譬如大藥師能以毒為藥」 tr. "just as a great physician can use poison as medicine".
Through a long middle section the treatise-author holds fast to the two Chinese characters 「慇懃」 tr. "earnest": the merchant chief is specially earnest about the precious jewels of great price because his son does not recognise their price; the Buddha entrusts it himself among his disciples and does not praise it in a different assembly, to avoid the suspicion of 「自稱讚法」 tr. "praising his own dharma"; first he taught that dharmas are empty to block the extreme of existence, now he earnestly entrusts to refute the extreme of non-existence, 「如是,則離二邊」 tr. "in this way he parts from the two extremes". When it comes to the question 「一囑累則足,何以至三」 tr. "one entrustment would be enough; why go to three", the answer is 「佛深愛般若波羅蜜故三囑」 tr. "because the Buddha deeply loves prajñāpāramitā, he entrusts it three times"; pressed by one more question, 「若深愛者,何限於三」 tr. "if he deeply loves it, why limit it to three", the answer is only eight Chinese characters: 「諸佛常法,語不過三。」 tr. "The constant way of the buddhas is that their speech does not exceed three."—even earnestness has its measure; going too far and falling short are both wrong.
The most perilous question of the whole chapter comes in the second half: an earlier chapter plainly said that prajñā is 「說亦不增、不說亦不減,畢竟寂滅相」 tr. "not increased by being taught, nor decreased by not being taught, having the mark of ultimate quiescent extinction", yet now it says 「莫令斷滅」 tr. "do not let it be cut off and extinguished"; like space, who could extinguish it? The treatise-author's answer is the pivot of the whole chapter: what is entrusted is the side of 「文字語言書般若波羅蜜經卷,為他人說」 tr. "the scrolls of the prajñāpāramitā sūtra written in letters and words, taught to others", which is 「於此因中而說其果」 tr. "its result is spoken of within this cause"; and what can truly 「滅般若」 tr. "extinguish prajñā" is not someone from outside either, but that one way of reading which grasps at marks and discriminates, gives rise to strife through clinging, and raises sinful deeds through strife. Reading 「有般若在世,則為佛在」 tr. "when there is prajñā in the world, the Buddha is present" again from here, one will not read it as a sentence of consolation—prajñā is the mother of the buddhas, the Dharma Jewel is not apart from the Buddha Jewel, and with the teacher present and the mother present, it is said that the root of the benefit is present.
The last question returns to a matter of history: since the Buddha entrusted it to Ānanda, why is the Mahāyāna not seen in the three baskets compiled by Mahākāśyapa? The treatise-author answers with its being hard to believe, answers with its great quantity, answers with 「小物應在大中,大物不得入小」 tr. "a small thing should be within a great one; a great thing cannot enter a small one", and records one saying: Mañjuśrī, Maitreya, and the other great bodhisattvas also led Ānanda to compile this Mahāyāna. What closes the whole treatise is not doctrine but a colophon of the translation hall—he arrived at Chang'an in the third year of Hongshi, and it was finished only on the twenty-seventh day of the twelfth month of the seventh year; the first chapter, thirty-four fascicles, is the complete text, and from the second chapter onward the Dharma master abridged it. Only on reading this far does one know: the ‘do not let it be cut off’ entrusted in this chapter was, in the land of Han, caught up precisely by this piece of history.
Passage by Passage
1. The Buddha asks Ānanda: is the Buddha your great teacher; are you the Buddha's disciple. The whole chapter begins from one question, and what this question asks about is a matter everyone takes to have been settled long ago. The relation of teacher and disciple between the Buddha and Ānanda was known to everyone in the assembly, yet before making his entrustment the Buddha first asks about it once before the assembly. When reading a sūtra and meeting such ‘asking what one well knows’, do not first take it as a courtesy: whenever the Buddha sets a question before entrusting a weighty matter, his question must establish something—what it establishes is the standing that the one entrusted acknowledges for himself before the assembly. What the treatise-author explains later in the seventh round of question and answer is exactly this meaning.
2. Ānanda answers: the Buddha is my great teacher, the Sugata is my great teacher, I am the Buddha's disciple. There is one place in Ānanda's answer worth stopping at: he does not only answer 「佛是我大師」 tr. "the Buddha is my great teacher", he adds one more phrase, 「脩伽陀是我大師」 tr. "the Sugata is my great teacher". Sugata is another name of the Buddha; Ānanda's bringing up the other name again and answering once more is to make the answer to the same matter more solid. Only at the end of the answer does he say 「我是佛弟子」 tr. "I am the Buddha's disciple"—first acknowledging the teacher, then acknowledging the disciple, the order clear. When the treatise-author says later 「阿難為欲令人信故重答」 tr. "Ānanda, in order to make people believe, answers again, repeating it", what he points to is just this one Chinese character 「重」 tr. "again, repeating".
3. The Buddha confirms it and three times entrusts prajñā, bidding that after his passing into extinction the love, reverence, and offerings given to the Buddha be given to prajñā; not to forget, not to lose, not to be the last person who cuts off the lineage; and showing that prajñā being in the world is the Buddha being in the world, and the benefit that those who write it out, uphold, and make offerings are not apart from seeing the Buddha. This passage is the main body of the whole chapter's sūtra text and contains four layers within it; the reader should look at them separately, layer by layer. The first layer is confirmation and reckoning up: from 「如是!如是!」 tr. "Just so! Just so!" onward it says that what a disciple ought to do 「汝已作竟」 tr. "you have already done it all", and enumerates that Ānanda made offerings and provided with deeds of kindness of body, speech, and mind, 「亦常如我意,無有違失」 tr. "and always accorded with my mind, without fault or failing". The second layer is a turning: the love, reverence, offerings, and provision you gave while my body was present—「我滅度後」 tr. "after my passing into extinction"—all of this turns toward prajñāpāramitā. The third layer is entrustment and admonition: 「乃至第二、第三,以般若波羅蜜囑累汝」 tr. "and so on up to a second time and a third time, I entrust prajñāpāramitā to you", 「汝莫忘莫失,莫作最後斷種人」 tr. "do not forget it, do not lose it, do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage". The fourth layer is the showing of two retributions: when prajñā is in the world, one knows there is a Buddha in the world teaching the Dharma; those who write it out, uphold, read, recite, rightly recollect, widely explain, and make all kinds of offerings are 「不離見佛、不離聞法、常親近佛」 tr. "not apart from seeing the Buddha, not apart from hearing the Dharma, and always close to the Buddha". Reading the four layers in one breath, one sees that what the Buddha hands over is not a scroll of a book but an unbroken line of the Dharma.
4. The great assembly, hearing what the Buddha said, all greatly rejoice. The sūtra section concludes with narration, and there is no further speaker. The assembly listed begins from Maitreya and the other bodhisattva-mahāsattvas, goes on to the venerable Subhūti, Śāriputra, Mahāmaudgalyāyana, Mahākāśyapa, Pūrṇa Maitrāyaṇīputra, Mahākauṣṭhila, Mahākātyāyana, Ānanda, and the others, and at the end sums up with 「并一切大眾,及一切世間諸天、人、犍闥婆、阿修羅等」 tr. "together with the whole great assembly, and the gods, humans, gandharvas, asuras, and others of all the world". Here the bodhisattvas are listed before the śrāvakas, while the one who receives the entrustment is Ānanda among the śrāvakas—the gap between this listing and this entrustment is exactly where the treatise-author's second round of question and answer arises from. The last phrase, the four Chinese characters 「皆大歡喜」 tr. "all greatly rejoiced", the treatise-author later explains with a question set up specially; it must not be read past carelessly.
5. The question of the first question and answer: the Buddha has already severed love of dharmas; why now does he by all kinds of causes and conditions entrust this Dharma, as if in love and clinging. The treatise-author begins his explanation with a very heavy question: even toward the omniscience of all kinds and nirvāṇa the Buddha 「不著不取相」 tr. "does not cling and does not grasp at marks", yet now by all kinds of causes and conditions he earnestly hands over one Prajñā, which looked at from outside is exactly the mark of love and clinging. This question is not fault-finding; it asks out first, on the reader's behalf, the doubt most easily raised. In reading the treatise one should learn this method: whenever one feels that the sūtra text and the doctrine do not fit at some point, first state the misfit to the utmost, and then look at the answer.
6. The answer of the first question and answer: the mind of great kindness and compassion of the buddhas, from the first arousing of intent until the gate of nirvāṇa, is never abandoned; it brings out the matter of breaking his body into pieces like hemp seeds and rice by the vajra samādhi between the twin śāla trees. The answer does not argue over the Chinese character 「愛」 tr. "love", but changes the object of what is loved: what the Buddha never abandons is beings, not the Dharma. The treatise-author brings up an extremely weighty matter as proof—between the twin śāla trees, by the vajra samādhi, he broke his body into pieces like hemp seeds and rice for the sake of beings. Even his body he broke and scattered in giving, 「何況經法多所饒益而不囑累」 tr. "how much more would he entrust the sūtra-dharma, which enriches so many!" One must see the weighting in this counter-question: the body can still be given up by the Buddha, but the Dharma cannot be left unhanded to beings. The entrustment is not love and clinging exactly because this is where it is directed.
7. Again, Ānanda is not yet free from desire and does not yet fully know the power, force, and retribution of prajñā; therefore it is earnestly entrusted. The treatise-author adds a second layer of reason, spoken from the side of the one entrusted: Ānanda is 「未離欲人」 tr. "one not yet free from desire", who cannot yet fully know how greatly the power, force, and retribution of prajñā benefit. Since the one entrusted cannot himself yet gauge the weight of what he receives, the one entrusting cannot but be earnest. The sentence 「汝當好受持無令忘失!」 tr. "You should receive and uphold it well, and not let it be forgotten or lost!" is spoken precisely to this kind of recipient. This reasoning is of one vein with the simile of the merchant chief later on.
8. Therefore, although the Buddha is without hatred and without love toward all dharmas, always having the mark of quiescence, he entrusts this prajñā. The treatise-author gathers the two layers of reason into one pronouncement: the Buddha's being 「無憎愛、常寂滅相」 tr. "without hatred and without love, always having the mark of quiescence" toward all dharmas, and his 「囑累是般若」 tr. "entrusting this prajñā", stand together without conflict. Here the reader should keep one general rule in mind—the non-clinging of a holy one does not equal doing nothing; within the mark of quiescence there are still all kinds of arrangements, and what is arranged is for beings, not for himself.
9. The question of the second question and answer: Ānanda is a śrāvaka; why is prajñā entrusted to him and not to Maitreya and the other great bodhisattvas. The second round of question and answer turns to 「人」 tr. "the person". This question is accurately aimed: prajñā is the dharma the bodhisattvas practise, yet the one entrusted is a śrāvaka, and the Dharma and the person seem ill-matched. Whenever, in reading the sūtras and treatises of the Great Vehicle, one sees śrāvakas and bodhisattvas set side by side, this kind of question arises most easily; the treatise-author answers it fully here once and for all.
10. The answer of the second question and answer cites what someone says: Ānanda always attended at the Buddha's left and right, obtained the dhāraṇī of hearing and retaining, is the third teacher who turns the wheel of the Dharma following the Buddha, and is the teacher of five hundred arhats. The treatise-author first cites the saying of one school, listing item by item the virtues by which Ānanda is fit to receive the entrustment: he always attended at the Buddha's left and right and provided what was needed; he obtained the dhāraṇī of hearing and retaining, 「一聞常不失」 tr. "hearing once, he never loses it"; he is both the Buddha's cousin and a man of much knowledge and wide acquaintance, his renown wide and universal, the one on whom the four assemblies rely; he is 「能隨佛轉法輪第三師」 tr. "the third teacher who can turn the wheel of the Dharma following the Buddha". In the middle is inserted one sentence of proof from the reverse side—「佛知舍利弗壽短早滅度故不囑累」 tr. "because the Buddha knew that Śāriputra's life was short and that he would pass into extinction early, he did not entrust it to him"—showing that the choosing of a person weighs not only virtue but also the length of his stay in the world. At the end it brings up that Ānanda is the teacher of five hundred arhats with the six supernormal powers, the three clarities, and liberation both ways. Every item is the plain text of this treatise, and the reader can check for himself: what makes one fit to receive the entrustment lies in ‘being able to pass it on’ and not in 「已證」 tr. "having already realised".
11. Maitreya and the other great bodhisattvas each scatter after the Buddha's passing into extinction, and moreover deeply know the power of prajñā, so they need no bitter entrusting. This is the other side of the same answer: the great bodhisattvas each scatter after the Buddha's passing into extinction, going to the lands of the beings they are each to save—Maitreya returns up to the Tuṣita heaven, and Vimalakīrti and Mañjuśrī too go to the places of the beings they are to save. Having scattered, each to the place where he is to save, they also 「深知般若波羅蜜力」 tr. "deeply know the power of prajñāpāramitā", and need no bitter, pressing exhortation. This passage gives an extremely plain principle: the reason for earnest exhortation is exactly that the person does not know; the one who knows, on the contrary, does not need it.
12. Ānanda is a śrāvaka who follows the dharma of the Small Vehicle; therefore the Buddha earnestly entrusts it. The treatise-author closes this round of question and answer with one sentence: the reason for earnestness is exactly that he 「隨小乘法」 tr. "follows the dharma of the Small Vehicle". Taken together from front to back, the answer of the second round of question and answer is not ‘Ānanda is more fit than the bodhisattvas to be entrusted’ but ‘precisely because he is a śrāvaka, he needs the more earnestness’—what the questioner took to be a shortcoming is exactly the reason the answerer takes up. When reading the treatise and meeting this kind of reversal, one should remember the method.
13. The question of the third question and answer: why do the Lotus and the other vaipulya sūtras entrust them to the bodhisattvas King of Joy and the others. Since it was said that because a śrāvaka needs earnestness the entrustment was made to Ānanda, the questioner at once brings up a counter-example: why do the Lotus Sūtra and the other vaipulya sūtras entrust them to the bodhisattvas King of Joy and the others? This question takes sūtra-proof to question sūtra-proof; it does not question with its own opinion. Throughout the whole chapter the questioner often uses this method, and the answerer often answers by distinguishing the capacities addressed.
14. The answer of the third question and answer cites what someone says: the very deep dharma hard to believe that was taught at that time had no śrāvakas present; again, as with the Sūtra of Inconceivable Liberation, the five hundred arhats, though at the Buddha's side, did not hear it. The treatise-author answers by citing a saying, and the reasons are two: first, when those sūtras were taught the śrāvakas were not present in the assembly; second, even if present they could not receive it—as when the Buddha taught the Sūtra of Inconceivable Liberation, the five hundred arhats, 「雖在佛邊而不聞,或時得聞而不能用」 tr. "though at the Buddha's side, did not hear it, or at times heard it and could not use it". These two phrases must be kept clearly apart: not hearing is one layer, hearing yet not being able to use is another. In the matter of entrustment, what is looked at is not whether one is present but whether one can use it.
15. The question of the fourth question and answer: is there some further dharma very deep and surpassing prajñā, that prajñā is entrusted to Ānanda and the other sūtras to bodhisattvas. The fourth question presses the previous answer to its extreme: if śrāvakas are not fit to hear the Lotus yet fit to receive the Prajñā, is that not saying that the Lotus is deeper than the Prajñā? If this question is not broken, the whole treatise's tenet of ‘prajñā first’ is shaken. The treatise-author sets up this question precisely to hold the tenet fast.
16. The answer of the fourth question and answer: prajñā is not a secret dharma; the Lotus and the others say that arhats receive the prediction and become Buddhas, which great bodhisattvas can receive, uphold, and use; just as a great physician can use poison as medicine. The answer comes in two parts. The first part establishes the tenet: 「般若波羅蜜非祕密法」 tr. "prajñāpāramitā is not a secret dharma"—prajñā is a dharma taught openly, which anyone can hear, and so it can be handed to a śrāvaka. The latter part resolves the difficulty: the Lotus and other sūtras say that arhats receive the prediction and become Buddhas, and such words are what 「大菩薩能受持用」 tr. "great bodhisattvas can receive, uphold, and use"; and it brings out a simile—「譬如大藥師能以毒為藥」 tr. "just as a great physician can use poison as medicine". One must see exactly what this simile compares: poison is not medicine, yet a great physician can use it as medicine; likewise, the saying 「阿羅漢受決作佛」 tr. "arhats receive the prediction and become Buddhas" can become an obstacle when heard by those of small capacity, and only in the hands of great bodhisattvas becomes a wondrous use. The judgement of deep and shallow lies not in the Dharma but in the person who uses the Dharma.
17. Again, prajñā is of two kinds: that taught in common with the śrāvakas and that taught only for the great bodhisattvas dwelling on the ten grounds; the general mark is one, yet in depth and shallowness there are differences. The treatise-author adds a further, finer distinction: prajñā is of two kinds—first, taught in common with the śrāvakas; second, taught only for the great bodhisattvas of the ten directions who dwell on the ten grounds, 「非九住所聞,何況新發意者」 tr. "not something those of the ninth abode can hear, how much less those who have newly aroused the mind"; further, there is what is heard on the ninth ground, and so on up to what is heard on the first ground, 「各各不同」 tr. "each different". At the end it gathers up in one sentence: 「般若波羅蜜總相是一,而深淺有異,是故囑累阿難無咎。」 tr. "The general mark of prajñāpāramitā is one, but in depth and shallowness there are differences; therefore to entrust it to Ānanda is without fault." This sentence should be remembered most of all: the general mark is one, so one cannot say there are two Prajñās; in depth and shallowness there are differences, so it can be handed over according to capacity. The earlier answer's 「非祕密法」 tr. "not a secret dharma" and this answer's 「深淺有異」 tr. "in depth and shallowness there are differences" combine into one meaning, and the difficulty resolves of itself.
18. The question of the fifth question and answer: earlier, in the chapter "Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha", it was entrusted; now it is entrusted again; what difference is there. The fifth question turns to the pattern of the text: this sūtra already had an entrustment earlier, in the chapter "Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha"; why entrust it once more here? Whenever the same matter appears twice in a sūtra, the reader easily judges it a repetition; the treatise-author does not allow carelessness and must find its proper place for it.
19. The answer of the fifth question and answer: the bodhisattva path is of two kinds—the path of prajñāpāramitā and the path of skilful means; the earlier entrustment was for having finished teaching the substance of prajñā, the present for having finished teaching skilful means; therefore after "Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha" the "Upāya-kauśalya" chapter is taught. The answer sets up one main line: 「菩薩道有二種:一者、般若波羅蜜道,二者、方便道。」 tr. "The bodhisattva path is of two kinds: first, the path of prajñāpāramitā; second, the path of skilful means." The earlier entrustment was 「為說般若波羅蜜體竟」 tr. "because the teaching of the substance of prajñāpāramitā had been completed"; this entrustment is because 「說令眾生得是般若方便竟」 tr. "the teaching of the skilful means by which beings are brought to obtain this prajñā has been completed". And it brings up the sūtra's order as proof: after "Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha" the "Upāya-kauśalya" chapter is taught. Each of the two entrustments has its own matter that it concludes, so it is not a repetition. When reading a sūtra and meeting a doubt of repetition, this passage can serve as a pattern—first look at what each of the two places concludes, not at whether the wording is the same.
20. Although within prajñāpāramitā there is skilful means and within skilful means there is prajñā, each takes its name from whichever is more; the original substance is one, and because there is a small difference in what they are used for they are spoken of separately, as a goldsmith makes different things out of gold. Fearing that people would judge prajñā and skilful means to be two things, the treatise-author at once adds clarification: the two contain each other and are only 「隨多受名」 tr. "each taking its name from whichever is more". The pronouncement is 「般若與方便,本體是一,以所用小異故別說」 tr. "prajñā and skilful means are one in their original substance; because there is a small difference in what they are used for, they are spoken of separately". Next it brings out a simile—a goldsmith, with clever skilful means, uses gold to make all kinds of different things, 「雖皆是金,而各異名」 tr. "although all are gold, each has a different name". This simile is extremely important: different names do not hinder one substance, and one substance does not prevent different uses. Wherever two dharmas are set against each other, the student can use this simile to look at himself.
21. When the bodhisattva obtains the real mark of prajñā, he wishes to pass into extinction; by the power of skilful means he does not take the realisation of nirvāṇa, passes beyond the two grounds and enters the bodhisattva's position, knows the dharma without letters and guides beings; this is called skilful means. Here the treatise-author speaks directly of the mark of skilful means, and speaks very concretely. When the bodhisattva obtains the real mark of prajñā—「一切法性空、無所有、寂滅相」 tr. "the nature of all dharmas is empty, without anything existent, the mark of quiescence"—he at once wishes to pass into extinction; that he does not take the realisation is the power of skilful means. The thought he makes in his mind the treatise-author cites word for word: 「一切法性空,涅槃亦空,我今於菩薩功德未具足,不應取證;功德具足,乃可取證。」 tr. "The nature of all dharmas is empty, and nirvāṇa too is empty; I have not yet made complete the merit of a bodhisattva, and should not take the realisation; when the merit is complete, only then may I take the realisation." Thereby he 「過二地,入菩薩位」 tr. "passes beyond the two grounds and enters the bodhisattva's position", and dwelling in the bodhisattva's position he knows the very deep and subtle dharma without letters and guides beings. In this passage one can see that skilful means is not a stratagem; it is the kind of power that, after having seen the real mark, is still willing to stay in the world.
22. Again, there is skilful means: knowing ultimate emptiness, yet able to rise again to wholesome dharmas and practise the six perfections, not following emptiness; among the four matters of doubt, wrong views, entering nirvāṇa, and becoming a Buddha, to remove wrong views and doubt and not enter nirvāṇa is skilful means. The treatise-author speaks of one more layer of skilful means, its emphasis in the three Chinese characters 「不隨空」 tr. "not following emptiness": knowing that all dharmas are 「畢竟空性、無所有」 tr. "of the nature of ultimate emptiness, without anything existent", and yet 「能還起善法、行六波羅蜜」 tr. "able to rise again to wholesome dharmas and practise the six perfections". Next it lists four kinds of matters—either doubt, or wrong views, or entering nirvāṇa, or becoming a Buddha—showing the four directions that can arise after hearing prajñā; one who can remove wrong views and doubt and does not enter nirvāṇa, that is skilful means. These four matters are a ready-made table for checking oneself: after hearing of emptiness, where does the mind land? To land in doubt and wrong views is loss; to land in entering nirvāṇa is stagnation; only the last matter is where one is headed.
23. Someone says: prajñā is the most excellent among the great heaps of precious jewels; the Buddha knew that after his passing into extinction many enemies and thieves would wish to destroy it; even to entrust it in chapter after chapter would be without fault, how much more in two places. The treatise-author cites one saying to close this round of question and answer: prajñā is 「於大珍寶聚中最勝」 tr. "the most excellent among great heaps of precious jewels", and the Buddha foreknew that after his passing into extinction 「多有怨賊欲毀壞者」 tr. "many enemies and thieves would wish to destroy it"; so even if he entrusted it in chapter after chapter there would be no fault, how much more in only two places. This saying overturns at a stroke the earlier question ‘why entrust it in two places’—the questioner thought two places already too many; the answerer says two places are still few. Here the reader can reflect on himself: the places where we feel ‘too much is said’ are often exactly the places the teacher knows cannot be held.
24. The question of the sixth question and answer: if he is to entrust it, why is he so earnest and solemn. The sixth question no longer asks ‘whether to entrust or not’, but instead asks ‘why so earnest’. The earlier questions asked whether the matter exists; this question asks the weight of the feeling. The treatise-author does not avoid this question, and afterwards brings out four passages of answer in a row; it is the place in the whole chapter where human feeling shows most.
25. The answer of the sixth question and answer: the Buddha guides beings in accordance with the worldly way; it brings out the simile of the merchant chief who, going far away to another country, is specially and earnestly insistent in entrusting to his son the precious jewels of great price. The answer first sets up one meaning—「佛隨世俗法引導眾生」 tr. "the Buddha guides beings in accordance with the worldly way"; earnestness and solemnity are the ordinary state of things in the world when entrusting something weighty, and nothing to wonder at. Next it brings out the simile: the merchant chief is about to go far away to another country; though he entrusts all his wealth and jewels to his son, toward the precious jewels of great price he is 「偏獨慇懃」 tr. "specially and earnestly insistent"—why? 「以其子未識妙寶價重故」 tr. "because his son does not yet recognise how heavy the price of the precious jewels is". There is one more turn within the simile that should least be passed over: bystanders, because the merchant chief is one who knows the price of jewels, on seeing him so earnest, will 「必知其貴」 tr. "certainly know that they are precious"; if they only heard his son praise the price of the jewels, they would 「不信之」 tr. "not believe it". So one sees that earnestness is set up not only for the one entrusted but also for the onlookers—the preciousness of the Dharma is made manifest through the solemnity of one who knows its worth.
26. Again, if he praised prajñā and entrusted it among other people or in a different assembly, people would ridicule the Buddha for praising his own dharma; entrusting it himself among his disciples, there is no suspicion. The treatise-author adds a second reason, which lands on avoiding suspicion: if he praised prajñā and handed it over in some other assembly, people would ridicule and suspect the Buddha of 「自稱讚法」 tr. "praising his own dharma", and would doubt and not believe; entrusting it among his own disciples, there is no such layer of suspicion. The sense of measure this passage shows is very usable: the more a dharma one teaches is something one holds weighty oneself, the more one must mind the setting in which one teaches it, lest suspicion arise before the Dharma has entered people's minds.
27. Again, someone says: in an earlier chapter it was taught that the mark of quiescence is without idle discourse and that there is no fixed dharma to be grasped, and people thought there was nothing worth valuing; now that he earnestly entrusts it, one knows that the Buddha does not cling to the dharma of emptiness. The third reason speaks from the earlier chapter: what the earlier chapter taught was 「寂滅相無戲論,是一切智,是中無有決定法可取」 tr. "the mark of quiescence is without idle discourse, this is omniscience, and within it there is no fixed dharma to be grasped", and hearers could easily give rise from this to a misunderstanding—since there is no dharma to be grasped, this Dharma has nothing worth valuing. Now with one display of earnest entrustment, 「則知佛不著空法」 tr. "then one knows that the Buddha does not cling to the dharma of emptiness". The last two sentences go a step further: among all beings none loves and cherishes prajñā more than the Buddha; the Buddha, 「知般若恩深故,貴重是般若而慇懃囑累」 tr. "because he knows how deep the kindness of prajñā is, values this prajñā highly and earnestly entrusts it". Here the two Chinese characters 「恩深」 tr. "deep kindness" must be read with care: what is valued is that prajñā shows kindness to beings, not that prajñā is precious in itself.
28. Someone says: the Buddha entrusts it because he wishes to show the middle way—first he taught that dharmas are empty to block the extreme of existence; now he earnestly entrusts it, and this refutes the extreme of non-existence; in this way he parts from the two extremes. The fourth reason is the most round and complete: earlier he taught that dharmas are empty, and what this blocks is the extreme of existence; now he earnestly entrusts, and what this refutes is the extreme of non-existence. The treatise-author also sets the two misunderstandings against each other—if someone says that the Buddha 「貪心愛著此法」 tr. "loves and clings to this dharma with a craving mind", the Buddha has already by all kinds of causes and conditions taught the mark of emptiness of prajñā; if someone says that the Buddha has 「墮斷滅中」 tr. "fallen into annihilation", therefore he earnestly entrusts it. One emptiness and one entrustment exactly cure these two illnesses: 「如是,則離二邊」 tr. "in this way he parts from the two extremes". Having read the whole chapter this far, one can look back: earnest entrustment is not an emotion; it is a move of the middle way.
29. The question of the seventh question and answer: the Buddha knows that Ānanda is his disciple; why does he ask: are you my disciple, am I your teacher. The seventh question returns to that question at the head of the chapter. The treatise-author does not let this ‘asking what one well knows’ pass, precisely because the entrustment of the whole chapter is established by this question. In reading the sūtras one should learn this eye: the places that look most like idle text are often the joints of the structure.
30. The answer of the seventh question and answer: the Buddha had evil disciples, Sunakṣatra and others, and Susīma became a disciple in order to steal the Dharma; these are named disciples in name. The answer first brings up the facts: the Buddha had evil disciples such as Sunakṣatra and others, who 「有少因緣故作弟子」 tr. "became disciples for some scant causes and conditions", their real intent being to obtain archery at the Buddha's place; the Buddha did not teach it, and so he gave up the precepts and said 「我非佛弟子」 tr. "I am not the Buddha's disciple"; again, as Susīma 「為盜法故作弟子」 tr. "became a disciple in order to steal the Dharma". The treatise-author marks their name as 「名字弟子」 tr. "disciples in name". Since there are disciples in name, the two Chinese characters 「弟子」 tr. "disciple" are not sufficient to rely on, and the reason the Buddha must ask before the assembly is exactly to sift the true from the false.
31. Further, those of the outside paths and others said that Ānanda stayed at the Buddha's side only because he had no choice; he had once been a disciple of the outside paths, wearing grass robes and seeking the spirit-immortals, and now attends on him out of respect because the Buddha is his kinsman. The second layer speaks of the doubt of bystanders: those of the outside paths and others said that Ānanda's attending on the Buddha was 「不得已」 tr. "because he had no choice"—he had once been a disciple of the outside paths, wore grass robes, and sought the spirit-immortals, and now he merely attends on him out of respect because the Buddha is his kinsman. If this doubt is not broken, the Dharma that Ānanda passes on is discounted in advance. The Buddha's one question before the assembly is exactly to dispel this doubt.
32. Because of such matters as these, in the midst of the great assembly he asks whether you are my disciple; if you say you are a true disciple, you should follow my command. The treatise-author gathers these two layers and brings out one extremely forceful sentence: 「若言是真弟子,當隨我勅。」 tr. "If you say you are a true disciple, you should follow my command."—acknowledging one's standing for oneself before the assembly at once becomes the reason why one must receive the command. That the entrustment can be established lies not in the Buddha handing it over one-sidedly, but in the recipient's confirming his own position before the assembly. Here the reader can reflect: whoever calls himself a student of some school takes on not only the name and standing, but the command that the name and standing carry.
33. Therefore Ānanda, in order to make people believe, answers again, repeating it. Here the treatise-author turns back to explain the 「重」 tr. "repeating" in Ānanda's answer: the reason for answering again a second time is not to make himself clear but 「令人信」 tr. "to make people believe". The bringing up again of 「脩伽陀是我大師」 tr. "the Sugata is my great teacher" seen in the second passage above has its use here. This small passage is extremely short, yet it settles a turn of feeling in the sūtra text that is not easy to notice.
34. The treatise-author cites the sūtra: the Buddha told Ānanda that the dharmas a disciple ought to do, you have made all of them complete. The treatise-author cites one sentence of the sūtra again in order to open the following explanation. Sentences that cite the sūtra like this appear often in the treatise; they are the treatise-author's way of carrying his explanation forward, and what is cited is still the Buddha's words, not a fresh passage of sūtra text. In reading the treatise one must keep two things apart: the treatise-author's own judgements, and the sūtra text the treatise-author cites, belong to different speakers.
35. The dharma of a disciple is to provide for the teacher with wholesome deeds of body, speech, and mind; some have good minds but body and speech do not match, some have good body and speech but the mind does not match; Ānanda, body and speech matching, not sparing body and life, has made all these matters complete. The treatise-author explains 「弟子所應作法」 tr. "the dharmas a disciple ought to do" layer by layer. The general mark is 「以善身、口、意業供給師」 tr. "to provide for the teacher with wholesome deeds of body, speech, and mind". Next it divides two kinds of insufficiency: 「有弟子心好,身、口業不稱」 tr. "some disciples have good minds, but their deeds of body and speech do not match"; 「有弟子身、口業好,而心不稱」 tr. "some disciples have good deeds of body and speech, but their minds do not match". Next it brings out the mark of being complete: with a wholesome mind deeply loving and delighting in the teacher, body and speech matching, 「不惜身命、不難懃勞,自捨其心,隨師教勅」 tr. "not sparing body and life, not counting diligent toil as hard, abandoning his own intentions and following the teacher's command". At the end it pronounces that Ānanda 「盡具足此事」 tr. "has made all these matters complete". This passage can serve as the standard for serving a teacher: the mind matching body and speech is the first pass, 「自捨其心」 tr. "abandoning his own intentions" is the second pass—what is abandoned is one's own views, not one's own power of judgement.
36. The treatise-author cites the sūtra: the Buddha told Ānanda: you now at present revere me; after my passing into extinction, in revering prajñā you should also be like this. The treatise-author cites the sūtra text again, taking exactly the backbone sentence of the whole chapter's entrustment. What this sentence establishes is an equation: the reverence toward the Buddha now turns, after the passing into extinction, toward prajñā, without diminishing in weight. The eighth round of question and answer below arises from this equation.
37. The question of the eighth question and answer: prajñā is the teacher of the buddhas; why then does Ānanda not revere that teacher but revere the Buddha. This question is asked very cleverly: since it is said that prajñā is the teacher of the buddhas, what Ānanda ought to revere first should be prajñā; why is what he reveres before him the Buddha? The questioner does not mean to belittle the Buddha; he means to ask out the reason for ‘using the Buddha as a simile for prajñā’.
38. The answer of the eighth question and answer: though Ānanda has obtained the first path, because his outflows are not yet exhausted he does not deeply know the reality of dharmas; therefore the Buddha tells him: revere prajñā as you revere me. The answer speaks from Ānanda's rank: 「雖得初道」 tr. "although he has obtained the first path", yet 「漏未盡故,不深知法實,如佛所知」 tr. "because his outflows are not yet exhausted, he does not deeply know the reality of dharmas as the Buddha knows it". Since he cannot yet know the real virtue of prajñā, he has no way to give rise to a matching reverence; the Buddha therefore uses the reverence he already has as a bridge—「汝恭敬般若,如恭敬我」 tr. "revere prajñā as you revere me". This answer gives a general rule of teaching: to teach people to revere what they do not yet recognise, one must lead from what they already recognise.
39. Again, beings seeing the Buddha's marks, minor signs, and radiance mostly love and revere; prajñā is subtle, very deep, without shape and without form, and the wise can know it; therefore the Buddha uses his body as a simile for prajñā. The treatise-author speaks further of beings in general: those who see the Buddha's 「三十二相、八十隨形好、大光明、金色身」 tr. "thirty-two marks, eighty minor marks, great radiance, and golden-coloured body" mostly give rise to love and reverence, whereas prajñā is 「微妙甚深,無形、無色」 tr. "subtle and very deep, without shape, without form", and only 「智者能知」 tr. "the wise can know it". He adds one more sentence: as for the marks and minor signs of the Buddha's body, 「愚、智視之,皆無厭足」 tr. "whether the foolish or the wise look at them, none is ever satisfied"—the foolish and the wise alike can take them in, and so they are fit to serve as a simile. The pronouncement is 「是故佛以身喻般若」 tr. "therefore the Buddha uses his body as a simile for prajñā". Here the reader can know: the Buddha's using himself as a simile is not self-exaltation; it takes a thing seen alike by the foolish and the wise to point to a dharma that only the wise can know.
40. While the Buddha was in the world he could himself ward off Māra; therefore the Buddha told Ānanda: after my passing into extinction, guard and protect prajñā well. The treatise-author adds the reason of the entrustment as regards time: while the Buddha was in the world he 「能自遮魔」 tr. "could himself ward off Māra", so prajñā needed no one to protect it; after the passing into extinction, the matter of warding off Māra falls upon the disciples. The weight of the sentence 「我滅度後,好守護般若」 tr. "after my passing into extinction, guard and protect prajñā well" lies precisely between this ‘himself’ and ‘not himself’. The origin of the duty of guarding is made clear here.
41. The question of the ninth question and answer: one entrustment would be enough; why go to three. The ninth question turns to the number of times. The questions before this all asked 「何以囑累」 tr. "why entrust"; this question is ‘why three’. It is asked very finely, and the treatise-author's answer thereby speaks the boundary of the matter of 「慇懃」 tr. "earnestness" through to the bottom.
42. The answer of the ninth question and answer: because the Buddha deeply loves prajñāpāramitā, he entrusts it three times. The answer is only one sentence, and it uses the two Chinese characters 「深愛」 tr. "deeply loves". This must not be read as the Buddha having love and clinging—the first round of question and answer has already broken this doubt; what is called 「深愛」 tr. "deep love" is deeply knowing its kindness to beings. The answer is this brief in order to draw out the next question.
43. The question of the tenth question and answer: if he deeply loves it, why limit it to three. This question is the necessary question that follows from the previous answer: since it is deep love, why stop exactly at three? The previous question found it too many; this question finds it too few—with the two questions pressing from both sides, the measure of the middle way shows of itself. The intent of the treatise-author in setting up these two linked questions lies here.
44. The answer of the tenth question and answer: the constant way of the buddhas is that their speech does not exceed three; if after three someone does not comply, the vajra-holding spirit raises his pestle at him; further, his intent is that if someone does not comply after three times he is a rebellious person and should be killed. The answer first sets up the general rule: 「諸佛常法,語不過三。」 tr. "The constant way of the buddhas is that their speech does not exceed three." Next it brings up its strictness: if someone does not comply after three times, the vajra-holding spirit 「則以杵擬之」 tr. "will raise his pestle at him"; further, the intent of the vajra-holding spirit is that one who does not comply after three times is a rebellious person, and 「便當殺之」 tr. "should be killed". It concludes 「是故佛問不過三」 tr. "therefore the Buddha's questions do not exceed three". What this passage speaks of is the fixed rule of entrustment in the Buddha-dharma, not something set up for this chapter at one time. Here the reader need not seek the fine details of the matter; he should take its meaning: the limit of three both leaves the one entrusted ample room to turn around, and sets for the one entrusting a boundary of not forcing people.
45. Again, if said once it is still too slack; beyond three, too urgent, like an ordinary person who craves and clings. The treatise-author speaks further from the sense of measure: saying it once is 「猶緩」 tr. "still too slack"; beyond three it is 「太急」 tr. "too urgent", so urgent that it seems to have become the craving and clinging of an ordinary person. These words are well worth savouring—if earnestness exceeds its measure, it falls back on the contrary into the reproach of 「似如愛著」 tr. "as if in love and clinging" that the treatise-author's first round of question and answer broke. So one sees that the middle way is not only in doctrine; it is also in the lightness and weight of speech.
46. Again, the minds of the recipients are of three kinds; those of dull faculties give rise to a wholesome mind only at the third time; though Ānanda has keen faculties, his mind turns toward the śrāvakas, seeking only to be saved in his own person; therefore he is told three times. The treatise-author speaks further from the side of the recipient: the minds of the recipients are of three kinds, and people of dull faculties 「至三乃生善心」 tr. "give rise to a wholesome mind only at the third time". Next, as for Ānanda: though he has keen faculties, his 「心向聲聞,但一身求度」 tr. "mind turns toward the śrāvakas, seeking only to be saved in his own person", his aim being to save himself and not to pass it on widely, so he still needs to be told three times. This passage brings the reason for 「三」 tr. "three" down onto a concrete person, and the general rule spoken of above here finds its footing. The reader too can reflect on himself: toward the teaching I have received, do I receive it at one hearing, or must it come again and again before my mind is moved?
47. The reason for entrusting is so as not to let the Dharma be extinguished; teaching one another in turn is like one lamp lighting other lamps, its light growing ever more; not being the last person who cuts off the lineage is as when people of the world have sons who do not continue the line, which is named cutting off the lineage, the greatest shame. Here the treatise-author speaks in general of what the entrustment is for: 「為不令法滅故。」 tr. "So as not to let the Dharma be extinguished." Its method is teaching one another in turn—「汝當教化弟子,弟子復教餘人」 tr. "you should teach and transform disciples, and the disciples in turn teach others"—and he brings out a simile: 「譬如一燈復然餘燈,其明轉多。」 tr. "Just as one lamp lights other lamps, and its light grows ever more." Next he explains the sentence 「莫作最後斷種人」 tr. "do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage": when people of the world have sons who do not continue the line, it is named cutting off the lineage, 「最為可恥」 tr. "the greatest shame", and with this comparison the Buddha tells Ānanda: 「汝莫於汝身上令般若斷絕!」 tr. "Do not let prajñā be cut off in your own person!" The responsibility this passage establishes is extremely heavy and extremely plain—it lies not in how many grounds one has realised, but in not letting this lamp go out in one's own hands.
48. The question of the eleventh question and answer: an earlier chapter made clear that prajñā is not increased by being taught nor decreased by not being taught, having the mark of ultimate quiescent extinction; why now does it say do not let it be cut off and extinguished; like space, who could extinguish it. The eleventh question is the most perilous question of the whole chapter, and the questioner takes the earlier text of this treatise as his ground: the earlier chapter had already made clear that 「般若波羅蜜,說亦不增、不說亦不減,畢竟寂滅相」 tr. "prajñāpāramitā is not increased by being taught, nor decreased by not being taught, having the mark of ultimate quiescent extinction"; this being so, why then say 「莫令斷滅」 tr. "do not let it be cut off and extinguished"? And he brings out a simile in proof: 「譬如虛空,誰能滅者?」 tr. "Like space, who could extinguish it?" If this question is not broken, the entrustment of the whole chapter falls empty in its doctrine. Here the reader can first answer it once himself, and then see how the treatise-author divides it.
49. The answer of the eleventh question and answer: although prajñā is quiescent extinction, without arising and ceasing, like space, and cannot be made the object of idle discourse, yet the scrolls of the sūtra written in letters and words and taught to others are the prajñā here; its result is spoken of within this cause. The answer divides the two Chinese characters 「般若」 tr. "prajñā" into two layers: prajñā as the real mark is 「寂滅、無生無滅相、如虛空、不可戲論」 tr. "quiescent extinction, the mark of non-arising and non-ceasing, like space, not to be made the object of idle discourse", and in this layer there is truly nothing to extinguish; whereas 「文字語言書般若波羅蜜經卷,為他人說」 tr. "the scrolls of the prajñāpāramitā sūtra written in letters and words, taught to others" are 「此中般若」 tr. "the prajñā here"—what this chapter entrusts is exactly this layer. The last sentence is the key: 「於此因中而說其果。」 tr. "Within this cause its result is spoken of." The letters and scrolls are the cause, prajñā as the real mark is the fruit, and in the sūtra the name of the fruit is spoken upon the cause; so one can speak of its being cut off and of its not being cut off. This distinction is the key to reading every saying about ‘the Dharma's extinction’ and ‘the Dharma's abiding’.
50. Ordinary people, hearing that prajñā is subtle, at once give rise to a clinging mind, grasp at the mark of prajñā, and discriminate dharmas; because of discriminating they give rise to clinging, because of clinging fighting and strife, because of fighting and strife they raise up all sinful deeds; such people are named those who extinguish prajñāpāramitā. The treatise-author next gives 「滅般若」 tr. "extinguishing prajñā" an unexpected definition: those who extinguish prajñā are not those of the outside paths, not enemies and thieves, but people who hear prajñā and give rise to a clinging mind. The treatise-author states its sequence very distinctly: hearing of the subtle, they give rise to a clinging mind, grasp at the mark of prajñā, and discriminate 「是善、是不善,是世間、是涅槃」 tr. "this is wholesome, this is unwholesome; this is worldly, this is nirvāṇa" and so on; because of discriminating they give rise to clinging within the Dharma, because of clinging fighting and strife, because of fighting and strife they raise up all sinful deeds. 「如是人名為滅般若波羅蜜。」 tr. "Such people are named those who extinguish prajñāpāramitā." Here the reader should be struck with awe: the ones most able to cut off the lineage of prajñā are exactly those who take themselves to be guarding and upholding prajñā.
51. The Buddha told Ānanda: you should, in accordance with the mark of prajñā, not cling to letters and words, and teach and transform beings; this is called not extinguishing. Having said what extinguishing is, it at once says what not extinguishing is. The treatise-author cites the Buddha's words as the answer: 「汝當如般若波羅蜜相,莫著文字語言,教化眾生。」 tr. "You should, in accordance with the mark of prajñāpāramitā, not cling to letters and words, and teach and transform beings."—what is kept to is not refraining from using letters, but using letters without clinging. The last words, 「是名不滅」 tr. "this is called not extinguishing", stand against the previous passage's 「名為滅」 tr. "are named those who extinguish", and the two definitions combine into one meaning: whether the Dharma survives or perishes lies not in whether there are scrolls and volumes, but in whether readers grasp at marks.
52. The treatise-author cites the sūtra: for however long a time prajñā is in the world, know that for so long a time the Buddha is in the world, as is said at length in the sūtra. The treatise-author cites the words of the fourth layer of the sūtra and notes 「如經中廣說」 tr. "as is said at length in the sūtra", showing that this meaning is already complete in the sūtra text. He cites without explaining, wanting the reader to look back at the sūtra text; only the next passage properly explains why it is so.
53. The Buddha states the causes and conditions of the entrustment: when there is prajñā in the world, the Buddha is present; prajñā is the mother of the buddhas, the buddhas take the Dharma as their teacher, and if the teacher is present and the mother is present, it is not named losing the benefit. The treatise-author first states how it arose: at the moment of the Buddha's earnest entrustment, 「在會眾生有疑」 tr. "the beings in the assembly had doubts", so the Buddha stated the causes and conditions of the entrustment, namely 「有般若在世,則為佛在」 tr. "when there is prajñā in the world, the Buddha is present". Next he explains its principle, and the principle has three steps: first, 「般若波羅蜜是諸佛母」 tr. "prajñāpāramitā is the mother of the buddhas"; second, 「諸佛以法為師。法者,即是般若波羅蜜」 tr. "the buddhas take the Dharma as their teacher. The Dharma is precisely prajñāpāramitā"; third, 「若師在、母在,不名為失利」 tr. "if the teacher is present and the mother is present, it is not named losing the benefit"—why? 「利本在故。」 tr. "Because the root of the benefit is present." So he concludes: 「若般若在世,佛亦在世。」 tr. "If prajñā is in the world, the Buddha too is in the world." This step is not words of consolation; it establishes its saying on the relation of the Dharma and the Buddha—that by which a Buddha is a Buddha has its root in this Dharma; with the root present, the benefit obtained is not lost.
54. Again, the Dharma Jewel is not apart from the Buddha Jewel: a bodhisattva with the marks and minor signs is not named Buddha, and is named Buddha because he obtains the Dharma Jewel; as people obtain benefit from the Buddha up to liberation and nirvāṇa, those who can believe and practise within prajñā also enter nirvāṇa by the dharmas of the three vehicles. The treatise-author speaks again from another side: the Dharma Jewel is not apart from the Buddha Jewel. Its proof is a matter anyone can verify—a bodhisattva already has 「三十二相、八十隨形好」 tr. "the thirty-two marks and the eighty minor marks" and yet is 「不名為佛」 tr. "not named Buddha"; 「得法寶故名為佛」 tr. "because he obtains the Dharma Jewel, he is named Buddha". Since the name of Buddha is established by the Dharma Jewel, and 「法寶即是般若波羅蜜」 tr. "the Dharma Jewel is precisely prajñāpāramitā", then prajñā being in the world and the Buddha being in the world are not two. At the end he speaks further from the side of receiving its use: as people obtain benefit from the Buddha and so on up to obtaining liberation and nirvāṇa, if people 「於般若中能信行」 tr. "can believe and practise within prajñā", they too enter nirvāṇa by the dharmas of the three vehicles. The pronouncement is 「說法無異」 tr. "teaching the Dharma with no difference".
55. The treatise-author cites the sūtra: if someone hears and receives prajñā, writes it out, upholds it, and so on, know that this person is not apart from seeing the Buddha, hearing the Dharma, and drawing close to the buddhas. The treatise-author cites the words of the last layer of retribution in the sūtra, in order to open the next round of question and answer. This sentence is the great benefit granted by the sūtra text, and precisely because it is great, it draws out the following difficulty, ‘does a person of heavy sin also obtain this or not’.
56. The question of the twelfth question and answer: a person of heavy sin, with the three unwholesome deeds accomplished, hears, receives, writes out, and upholds prajñā; how can he come to be not apart from the buddhas, hearing the Dharma, and drawing close to the Buddha. The twelfth question is asked very practically: can a person of heavy sin, with the three unwholesome deeds of body, speech, and mind accomplished, obtain such a retribution merely by hearing, receiving, writing out, and upholding prajñā? This question asks right to the heart on behalf of all those who ‘hear the Dharma while their practice is not yet pure’, and the treatise-author's answer is accordingly very measured.
57. The answer of the twelfth question and answer: this matter was already answered in an earlier chapter; those who hear the Dharma are of two kinds—those who only hear and do not believe, receive, and practise, and those who hear and believe, receive, and carry it out; hearing with one mind, believing, receiving, and carrying it out, growing weary of the world and loving nirvāṇa, leaving the Small Vehicle and delighting in the Great Vehicle, is called true hearing; reciting and reading are likewise. The treatise-author first points out that this difficulty was already answered in an earlier chapter, and at once restates its distinction: those who hear the Dharma are of two kinds—「但聽而不信受行」 tr. "those who only hear and do not believe, receive, and practise", and 「聽而信受奉行」 tr. "those who hear and believe, receive, and carry it out". And he brings out a comparison to fix the name: as when a disciple does not listen to, and does not believe, receive, and carry out, the teacher's words, 「是名不聽」 tr. "this is called not hearing". The mark of true hearing has four matters: hearing with one mind, believing, receiving, and carrying it out, growing weary of the world and loving nirvāṇa, leaving the Small Vehicle and delighting in the Great Vehicle. At the end he adds one sentence, 「誦、讀亦如是」 tr. "reciting and reading are likewise", which shows that the writing out, upholding, reading, and reciting listed earlier must each and every one take this as the standard. The reason there is doubt about the ‘person of heavy sin’ the earlier question doubted is exactly that people look only at whether he has read, not at whether he truly hears.
58. Right recollection is following the Buddha's intent, parting from the two extremes of existence and non-existence, and practising the middle way; receiving and upholding as one has heard, understanding its meaning, and explaining it to others, at first thin and slight, and so on until the mind grows ever thicker and the merit ever greater, firm and unmoving. The treatise-author goes on to explain the 「正憶念」 tr. "right recollection" listed in the sūtra text: its mark is 「隨如佛意,離有無二邊,行於中道」 tr. "following the Buddha's intent, parting from the two extremes of existence and non-existence, and practising the middle way". Next he lists the matters practised: receiving and upholding as one has heard, understanding the meaning, explaining it to others, and revering, honouring, making offerings, praising, flowers and incense, and so on. At the end he speaks of its gradual course: 「初始微薄,乃至正憶念、為他人說,其心轉厚,功德轉多,牢固不動。」 tr. "At first it is thin and slight, and so on up to rightly recollecting and explaining it for others, the mind grows ever thicker and the merit ever greater, firm and unmoving." What this passage gives is a road from shallow to deep—one need not arrive at 「牢固不動」 tr. "firm and unmoving" from the very start, but one must be able to see whether one is growing thicker.
59. If a wise person who knows the merit of prajñā makes offerings, the merit is heavy; if one makes offerings without knowing, the merit is thin and slight; those of pure and thick merit, after changing bodies, are not apart from seeing the Buddha and hearing the Dharma; those of thin and slight merit, after repaying their many sins, after a long time will also certainly attain buddhahood. Here the treatise-author properly answers the earlier question. He divides two grades: those who know the merit of prajñā and make offerings have 「福德重」 tr. "heavy merit", those who do not know have 「福德微薄」 tr. "thin and slight merit". The fruits of the two grades also part into two roads: those of pure and thick merit, 「轉身不離見佛、聞法、親近諸佛」 tr. "after changing bodies, are not apart from seeing the Buddha, hearing the Dharma, and drawing close to the buddhas"; as for those of thin and slight merit, 「不言轉身得三福報」 tr. "it is not said that after changing bodies they obtain the three kinds of reward of merit"; they must, 「償眾罪已,久後亦必當得佛」 tr. "after they have repaid their many sins, after a long time, also certainly attain buddhahood". The excellence of this answer lies in not allowing people to trust to luck, nor letting people despair—it is not that a person of heavy sin does not obtain this benefit, only that he does not obtain it at the time of changing bodies; after repaying his sins, in the end he too attains buddhahood. Here the reader should keep his eye on two places: first, the difference between 「知」 tr. "knowing" and 「不知」 tr. "not knowing" lies in the weight of merit; second, the two Chinese characters 「久後」 tr. "after a long time" are not empty words.
60. Here the Buddha speaks generally of pure and thick merit and of thin and slight merit: little by little all will come to see the buddhas of the ten directions and hear what the buddhas teach, little by little make complete the six perfections, and all will become Buddhas. The treatise-author closes the previous passage, pointing out that here the Buddha is 「總說」 tr. "speaking generally"—whether pure and thick or thin and slight, at the last they return to one place: 「漸漸皆當見十方佛、聞佛所說,漸漸具足六波羅蜜,皆得作佛。」 tr. "Little by little all will come to see the buddhas of the ten directions and hear what the buddhas teach, little by little make complete the six perfections, and all will become Buddhas." The two occurrences of 「漸漸」 tr. "little by little" must be read with care: what is granted is not sudden attainment but certain arrival. Only by looking at the distinction of the previous passage together with the general statement of this passage does one have the sūtra's meaning.
61. Because the Buddha with the Buddha-eye sees that prajñā has such great benefit for beings, he therefore earnestly entrusts it. The treatise-author sums up the long preceding section with one sentence: the reason the Buddha is earnest is that with the Buddha-eye he himself sees that prajñā has such great benefit for beings. By now the doubt raised in the first round of question and answer—「似如愛著」 tr. "as if in love and clinging"—has been filled out on every side by all the answers: what is seen is the benefit of beings, so what is done is entrustment and not love and clinging.
62. The question of the thirteenth question and answer: the great arhats have already realised the limit of reality and no longer have sorrow or joy; even small joy they do not have, how much less great joy. The thirteenth question returns to the last phrase of the sūtra text, 「皆大歡喜」 tr. "all greatly rejoiced". This question carries great weight: one who has realised the limit of reality should not be moved by sorrow or joy; even small joy he does not have—why does the sūtra text say 「大歡喜」 tr. "greatly rejoiced"? The stock phrase most easily slid past in reading a sūtra is exactly where the treatise-author chooses to set up a question.
63. The answer of the thirteenth question and answer: the great arhats, though free from the desire of the three realms, have not yet obtained all wisdom, and within the very deep dharmas still have doubts they do not clearly understand; now it is clearly explained and their doubts are severed, therefore they greatly rejoice. The answer speaks from where they are not yet sufficient: the great arhats, 「雖離三界欲」 tr. "although they have parted from the desire of the three realms", have 「未得一切智慧」 tr. "not yet obtained all wisdom", so 「於諸甚深法中猶疑不了」 tr. "within all the very deep dharmas they still have doubts and do not understand them clearly". Now within the Mahāprajñāpāramitā these are 「了了解說,斷除其疑」 tr. "clearly explained, severing their doubts", and so they greatly rejoice. One sees that this joy is not a stirring of emotion; it is the clarity after doubt is gone. Here the reader can test for himself: the kind of lightness and ease that follows truly resolving a doubt differs in its nature from the joy drawn by pleasing things of the world.
64. Again, these great disciples have already realised the limit of reality; the limit of reality is emptiness, the signless, the immeasurable, without anything discriminated; the Buddha widely teaches this dharma of quiescent extinction by all kinds of discriminating names, words, and similes, and yet does not destroy the nature of dharmas nor go against the world; the arhats realised within this dharma, so they greatly rejoice. The treatise-author brings out one more layer of reason, and opens up the two Chinese characters 「實際」 tr. "the limit of reality": 「即是空、無相、無量,無所分別。」 tr. "It is emptiness, the signless, the immeasurable, without anything discriminated." And the Buddha can, with this quiescent dharma without anything discriminated, 「種種分別名字、語言、譬喻廣說」 tr. "widely explain it by all kinds of discriminating names, words, and similes", and 「亦不壞法性,又不與世間相違」 tr. "yet not destroy the nature of dharmas, nor go against the world". The great arhats are exactly those who realised within this dharma; seeing that the Buddha can teach in this way without destroying what they have realised, they greatly rejoice. What this passage praises is the Buddha's power of teaching—to make discriminations within non-discrimination with neither hindering the other is in itself a thing to rejoice at.
65. The Buddha well teaches this dharma of emptiness, the signless, the immeasurable, and quiescent extinction; the rest of the great assembly, though not all have exhausted their outflows, because their power of faith is deep also greatly rejoice, saying: this dharma can end the suffering of our birth and death and cause us to obtain the Buddha path. The treatise-author speaks further of the rest of the great assembly present: they have 「未悉漏盡」 tr. "not yet all exhausted their outflows", and what they rely on is that their 「信力深」 tr. "power of faith is deep". As for why they rejoice, the treatise-author records their words verbatim: 「此法能盡我等生死苦,令得佛道。」 tr. "This dharma can end the suffering of our birth and death, and cause us to obtain the Buddha path." The previous passage says the joy of those who have realised comes from resolving doubt; this passage says the joy of those who have not realised comes from the power of faith—the two joys each have their ground, and both return to the Dharma.
66. Because of immeasurable causes and conditions such as these, the great assembly all rejoice. The treatise-author sums up this round of question and answer in one sentence: the causes and conditions brought up are not only the several kinds listed above, so he says 「無量」 tr. "immeasurable". Here the four Chinese characters of the sūtra text, 「皆大歡喜」 tr. "all greatly rejoiced", have a real meaning: not a stock phrase at the end of the text, but each, according to his position, obtaining his own joy.
67. The question of the fourteenth question and answer: since the Buddha entrusted this prajñā to Ānanda, and after the Buddha's parinirvāṇa Ānanda together with Mahākāśyapa compiled the three baskets, why is it not mentioned therein. The fourteenth question, which is also the last question of the whole chapter, asks about a matter of history: since the Buddha entrusted prajñā to Ānanda, and Ānanda later compiled the three baskets together with Mahākāśyapa, why is this Dharma not seen within the three baskets? If this question is not explained, the entrustment spoken of before falls empty in fact. The treatise-author brings out several answers in a row, and answers very concretely.
68. The answer of the fourteenth question and answer: the Mahāyāna is very deep, hard to believe, hard to understand, hard to practise; while the Buddha was in the world there were bhikṣus who heard the Mahāyāna, did not believe or understand it, and rose from their seats and left, how much more after the Buddha's parinirvāṇa. The first answer speaks from capacity: the Mahāyāna is 「甚深難信、難解難行」 tr. "very deep, hard to believe, hard to understand, hard to practise". And it brings up a matter of the time when the Buddha was in the world as proof—there were bhikṣus who heard the Mahāyāna and did not believe or understand it, and 「從坐而去」 tr. "rose from their seats and left". If it was so even with the Buddha himself present in the assembly, how much more after his nirvāṇa. The sentence 「以是故不說」 tr. "for this reason it is not mentioned" speaks of the actual situation at the time of the compiling, not of the Mahāyāna being unworthy of being passed on.
69. Again, the three baskets have exactly three hundred thousand verses, making nine million six hundred thousand words, while the Mahāyāna is very much more, immeasurable and unlimited; the gods, nāgas, and spirits, with long lives and strong powers of memory and recollection, can keep a thousand koṭi of myriads of verses, while the people of this world now, with short lives and weak powers of memory and recollection, cannot read even the small Prajñā. The second answer speaks from quantity. The treatise-author first gives the number of the three baskets: 「三藏正有三十萬偈,并為九百六十萬言。」 tr. "The three baskets have exactly three hundred thousand verses, making nine million six hundred thousand words." Next he gives the quantity of the Mahāyāna: the "Prajñāpāramitā" chapter has twenty-two thousand verses, the "Great Prajñā" chapter has a hundred thousand verses, and in the palaces of the nāga kings, the asura kings, and the gods there are a thousand koṭi of myriads of verses, and so on. The reason they can keep them is 「此諸天、龍、神壽命長久、識念力強故」 tr. "because these gods, nāgas, and spirits have long lives and strong powers of memory and recollection". Looking back at the people of this world now, with 「壽命短促、識念力薄」 tr. "short lives and weak powers of memory and recollection", they cannot read even the "Small Prajñāpāramitā" chapter, how much less more than that. What this passage speaks of is not that people are unfit to hear, but that the vessel cannot take the quantity—what the compilers chose was the portion that this land could keep.
70. The prajñā known by the other great bodhisattvas is immeasurable and unlimited; the Buddha did not teach with one body only, and in immeasurable ages sometimes transformed himself into countless bodies, so what he taught is immeasurable. The treatise-author pushes one layer further: the prajñā known by the great bodhisattvas is 「無量無限」 tr. "immeasurable and unlimited". The reason it is immeasurable he gives very plainly—「佛非但一身所說」 tr. "the Buddha did not teach with one body only"; in immeasurable ages he 「或變化作無數身」 tr. "sometimes transformed himself into countless bodies", and therefore what he taught is immeasurable. These words can resolve a common doubt: the Buddha taught the Dharma for no more than some decades of his life; how can there be so many great scriptures? What the treatise-author answers lies not in disputing the years and months but in making clear that it is not the teaching of one body and one life.
71. Further, there are the Sūtra of Inconceivable Liberation and the other great sūtras, each with a hundred thousand verses, immeasurable and boundless like the jewels in the great ocean; how could they be put into the three baskets; a small thing should be within a great one, a great thing cannot enter a small one; if one is to ask, one should say: why is the Small Vehicle not within the Mahāyāna. The treatise-author goes on to list the titles of the great sūtras: the Sūtra of Inconceivable Liberation with a hundred thousand verses; the Sūtra of the Origins of the Buddhas, the Jewel Cloud Sūtra, the Great Cloud Sūtra, and the Dharma Cloud Sūtra, each with a hundred thousand verses; and the Lotus Sūtra, the Flower Hand Sūtra, the Great Compassion Sūtra, the Skilful Means Sūtra, the Sūtra of the Nāga King's Questions, the Sūtra of the Asura King's Questions, and the other great sūtras, 「無量無邊,如大海中寶」 tr. "immeasurable and boundless, like the jewels in the great ocean". At once he brings out a principle: 「小物應在大中,大物不得入小。」 tr. "A small thing should be within a great one; a great thing cannot enter a small one." And he turns the question over and hands it back to the questioner: if one is to ask, one should say 「小乘何以不在摩訶衍中?」 tr. "Why is the Small Vehicle not within the Mahāyāna?" At the end he pronounces 「摩訶衍能兼小乘法故,是故不應如汝所問」 tr. "because the Mahāyāna can include the dharma of the Small Vehicle, therefore one should not ask as you have asked". This reversal is a key example of the discussion in this chapter—if, at the point of asking, great and small are set up wrongly, the answer can never settle; the treatise-author first corrects what is asked, and the difficulty does not stand of itself.
72. Again, someone says: as Mahākāśyapa led the bhikṣus on Mount Gṛdhrakūṭa to compile the three baskets, after the Buddha's passing into extinction Mañjuśrī, Maitreya, and the other great bodhisattvas also led Ānanda to compile this Mahāyāna. The treatise-author cites one saying that answers directly ‘where was the Mahāyāna compiled’: Kāśyapa led the bhikṣus to compile the three baskets on Mount Gṛdhrakūṭa, while Mañjuśrī, Maitreya, and the other great bodhisattvas 「亦將阿難集是摩訶衍」 tr. "also led Ānanda to compile this Mahāyāna". It is worth noting that in both compilations Ānanda is present—the prajñā entrusted before here finds where its transmission lands. The treatise-author brings this saying out with 「有人言」 tr. "someone says", so the speaker it belongs to is clear; the reader should receive it as it is attributed, and not force it into a settled conclusion.
73. Further, Ānanda knew how to weigh the greatness or smallness of beings' aspirations and deeds, so he did not teach the Mahāyāna among the śrāvakas; the Buddha-dharma is all of one kind and one flavour, namely the flavour of liberation that is the exhaustion of suffering; this flavour has two kinds—being only for one's own person and being also for all beings; therefore there is the difference of the Great and Small Vehicles. The treatise-author adds one more layer, and speaks to the very source of the division of the Great and Small Vehicles. Ānanda 「知籌量眾生志業大小」 tr. "knew how to weigh the greatness or smallness of beings' aspirations and deeds", so he did not teach the Mahāyāna among the śrāvakas—「說則錯亂,無所成辦」 tr. "if it were taught, it would give rise to confusion and nothing would be accomplished". Next he establishes a meaning: 「佛法皆是一種一味,所謂苦盡解脫味。」 tr. "The Buddha-dharma is all of one kind and one flavour, namely the flavour of liberation that is the exhaustion of suffering." Though the flavour is one, the minds of the recipients are two: 「一者、但自為身,二者、兼為一切眾生。」 tr. "First, being only for one's own person; second, being also for all beings." Although alike they seek one gate of liberation, 「而有自利、利人之異」 tr. "there is the difference of benefiting oneself and benefiting others", and the distinction of the Great and Small Vehicles is established from this. At the end he concludes: for the sake of these two kinds of people, what the Buddha's mouth taught was 「以文字語言分為二種:三藏是聲聞法,摩訶衍是大乘法」 tr. "divided by letters and words into two kinds: the three baskets are the śrāvaka Dharma; the Mahāyāna is the Great Vehicle Dharma". This passage is extremely important—the division of great and small lies not in the flavour of the Dharma but in the arousing of the mind; dividing the teaching is an arrangement made according to capacity, not the Dharma having two substances.
74. Again, while the Buddha was in the world there was no name "three baskets", only bhikṣus who held the sūtra, held the Vinaya, and held the mātṛkā; the sūtra has two divisions, and the Vinaya too has two divisions—the Vinaya of the land of Mathurā includes the avadāna and the jātaka, with eighty sections; the Vinaya of the land of Jibin removes the jātaka and the avadāna, taking only what is essential to make ten sections. At the very end the treatise-author speaks from the source and course of names and categories. While the Buddha was in the world there was originally no name 「三藏」 tr. "three baskets"; there were only 「持修多羅比丘、持毘尼比丘、持摩多羅迦比丘」 tr. "bhikṣus who held the sūtra, bhikṣus who held the Vinaya, and bhikṣus who held the mātṛkā". Next he explains sūtra: it is the name of the scriptures in the four Āgamas, and also the name of the scriptures in the Mahāyāna; it has two divisions—the sūtra within the four Āgamas, and the Mahāyāna scriptures, which are named great; so 「修多羅入二分,亦大乘、亦小乘」 tr. "the sūtra enters both divisions; it is both the Great Vehicle and the Small Vehicle", and the two hundred and fifty precepts and the like are also named sūtra. Next he explains the Vinaya: 「名比丘作罪,佛結戒:應行是、不應行是,作是事得是罪」 tr. "it speaks of the offences bhikṣus commit; the Buddha lays down the precepts: one should do this, one should not do that; doing this matter incurs this offence"; briefly told there are eighty sections, and it too has two divisions—the Vinaya of the land of Mathurā includes the avadāna and the jātaka, with eighty sections; the Vinaya of the land of Jibin removes the jātaka and the avadāna, 「但取要用作十部」 tr. "taking only what is essential to make ten sections", and there are eighty sections of vibhāṣā explaining it. What this passage shows is something readers of the teaching often overlook: the names of the categories arose later, and what was compiled differed from place to place; using later names to measure the reality of an earlier age often gives rise to pointless disputes.
75. Therefore one knows that the Mahāprajñāpāramitā Sūtra and the others are within the sūtra scriptures; because the sūtras are great and their matters different they are spoken of separately, and therefore they are not within the compiling of the three baskets. The treatise-author settles the whole question with one sentence: the Mahāprajñāpāramitā Sūtra and the others are originally within the sūtra scriptures, and are set out separately only because 「經大、事異」 tr. "the sūtras are great and their matters different"; it is not that outside the three baskets there is some separate Dharma. The doubt of the earlier question, 「何以不說」 tr. "why is it not mentioned", is here wholly resolved—it is not that it was not passed on, but that it circulated separately. The fourteen rounds of question and answer of the whole chapter end here, and the matter of doctrine is finished.
76. The colophon of the translation hall: the Dharma master Kumārajīva arrived at Chang'an in the third year of Hongshi of the Qin; in the summer of the fourth year in the Xiaoyao Garden he brought out this Expository Treatise for the Heavenly King Yao, and on the twenty-seventh day of the twelfth month of the seventh year it was finished; he also brought out sūtras, Vinaya, and treatises of nearly five hundred thousand words, which with this Expository Treatise make one million five hundred thousand words; the first chapter, thirty-four fascicles, is the full complete text of the treatise, and from the second chapter onward the Dharma master abridged it. What stands at the end of the whole treatise is not doctrine but a record of the translation hall; it is enough to read it as it is, without forcing a doctrinal explanation on it. What it records are four matters: time and place—in the third year of Hongshi, the year xinchou, on the twentieth day of the twelfth month, he arrived at Chang'an; in the summer of the fourth year, in the upper storey of the western gate in the Xiaoyao Garden, he brought out this Expository Treatise for the Heavenly King Yao, and on the twenty-seventh day of the twelfth month of the seventh year it was finished; what was done alongside—in the meantime he also brought out sūtra texts, dhyāna sūtras, precepts and Vinaya, the Hundred Treatise, and the Essential Explanations of the Dhyāna Method, 「向五十萬言」 tr. "nearly five hundred thousand words", which together with this Expository Treatise make 「一百五十萬言」 tr. "one million five hundred thousand words"; the pattern of the text—「論初品三十四卷,解釋一品,是全論具本;二品已下,法師略之,取其足以開釋文意而已,不復備其廣釋」 tr. "the treatise's first chapter, thirty-four fascicles, explains one chapter, and is the full complete text of the treatise; from the second chapter onward the Dharma master abridged it, taking what sufficed to open up and explain the meaning of the text, and no longer providing its full extended explanation"; the quantity—「得此百卷,若盡出之,將十倍於此」 tr. "as for these hundred fascicles that we have obtained, were it brought out in full, it would be ten times this". These four matters stand exactly in contrast with the entrustment spoken of in this chapter: what the sūtra hands over is ‘do not let it be cut off’, and what is recorded here is how this treatise, in the land of Han, caught up that one entrustment. Having read the whole treatise to this point, one should pause a little—the hundred fascicles one has read are the one-tenth that remains after 「略之」 tr. "he abridged it".
Do Not Misread
Do not read 「囑累」 tr. "entrustment" as the Buddha having given rise to love and clinging toward prajñā. The treatise-author's first round of question and answer has already broken this doubt head-on: what the Buddha never abandons is beings, not the Dharma; between the twin śāla trees he even broke his body into pieces like hemp seeds and rice by the vajra samādhi for the sake of beings, 「何況經法多所饒益而不囑累」 tr. "how much more would he entrust the sūtra-dharma, which enriches so many!" If it is read as the Buddha loving and clinging to this Dharma, then the later sentence 「佛雖於一切法無憎愛、常寂滅相,而囑累是般若」 tr. "although the Buddha is without hatred and without love toward all dharmas, always having the mark of quiescence, he entrusts this prajñā" has nowhere to stand.
Do not read ‘entrusting it to Ānanda and not to the bodhisattvas’ as śrāvakas surpassing bodhisattvas. The reasons the treatise-author gives are three-sided: Ānanda is fit and able to pass it on and keep it; the great bodhisattvas each scatter after the passing into extinction and already deeply know the power of prajñā; and Ānanda 「隨小乘法」 tr. "follows the dharma of the Small Vehicle" and so needs earnestness. Taking the three sides together, what is taken up is ‘needing earnestness’ and ‘being able to stay long in this land to pass it on and keep it’, not high or low in rank. If it is read as a judgement of high and low, then the text in the same treatise, ‘the unshared prajñā is taught only for the great bodhisattvas dwelling on the ten grounds’, contradicts it.
Do not read 「莫令斷滅」 tr. "do not let it be cut off and extinguished" as prajñā itself being something people can extinguish. The treatise-author answers very distinctly: prajñā as the real mark is 「寂滅、無生無滅相、如虛空、不可戲論」 tr. "quiescent extinction, the mark of non-arising and non-ceasing, like space, not to be made the object of idle discourse", and in this layer there is nothing to extinguish; what is entrusted is the layer of 「文字語言書般若波羅蜜經卷,為他人說」 tr. "the scrolls of the prajñāpāramitā sūtra written in letters and words, taught to others", which is 「於此因中而說其果」 tr. "its result is spoken of within this cause". What can be cut off is the layer of the circulation of letters that serves as the cause; the layer that is like space has nothing to extinguish—if the two layers are not kept apart, ‘neither increased nor decreased’ and 「莫令斷滅」 tr. "do not let it be cut off and extinguished" must become a self-contradiction.
Do not read 「滅般若波羅蜜」 tr. "extinguishing prajñāpāramitā" as a thing done by people from outside. The extinguishers of the Dharma the treatise-author points to are those who hear prajñā and 「生著心,取般若相,分別諸法」 tr. "give rise to a clinging mind, grasp at the mark of prajñā, and discriminate dharmas"—because of discriminating they give rise to clinging, because of clinging fighting and strife, because of fighting and strife they raise up all sinful deeds. If a mind that protects the Dharma carries grasping at marks, it falls right into this. On the contrary, only 「如般若波羅蜜相,莫著文字語言,教化眾生」 tr. "in accordance with the mark of prajñāpāramitā, not clinging to letters and words, teaching and transforming beings" is 「是名不滅」 tr. "this is called not extinguishing".
Do not read 「有般若在世,則為佛在」 tr. "when there is prajñā in the world, the Buddha is present" as a sentence of consolation. What the treatise-author gives is a reason, not words of comfort: prajñā is the mother of the buddhas, 「諸佛以法為師。法者,即是般若波羅蜜」 tr. "the buddhas take the Dharma as their teacher. The Dharma is precisely prajñāpāramitā", so 「若師在、母在,不名為失利」 tr. "if the teacher is present and the mother is present, it is not named losing the benefit"—why? 「利本在故。」 tr. "Because the root of the benefit is present." And he takes as proof that a bodhisattva possessing the marks and minor signs is not named Buddha, and 「得法寶故名為佛」 tr. "because he obtains the Dharma Jewel, he is named Buddha". What is established is the relation of root and branch between the Dharma and the Buddha, not an emotional substitute.
Do not read ‘hearing, receiving, writing out, and upholding, one at once obtains not being apart from seeing the Buddha’ as not needing faith and practice. The treatise-author divides those who hear the Dharma into two kinds, and only those who 「一心聽聞,信受奉行,厭世、愛涅槃,離小乘、樂大乘」 tr. "hear with one mind, believe, receive, and carry it out, grow weary of the world and love nirvāṇa, leave the Small Vehicle and delight in the Great Vehicle" are such that 「是名真聽」 tr. "this is called true hearing"; offerings too are divided into knowing and not knowing, and merit is heavy or thin. It is not that a person of heavy sin does not obtain this benefit, but that 「償眾罪已,久後亦必當得佛」 tr. "after he has repaid his many sins, after a long time he too will certainly attain buddhahood". If these distinctions are left out, what the sūtra text grants becomes a gate of trusting to luck.
Do not read ‘the Mahāyāna is not mentioned in the three baskets’ as the Mahāyāna not being the Buddha's teaching. The treatise-author's answers are three: because it is hard to believe and hard to understand, it was not taught at that time; because the quantity is great and the vessel small, it did not enter those collections; because it circulated separately, 「以經大、事異故別說」 tr. "because the sūtras are great and their matters different, they are spoken of separately". He also records the saying that Mañjuśrī, Maitreya, and the other great bodhisattvas led Ānanda to compile this Mahāyāna. At the end he further sets the point of asking right—if one is to ask, one should say 「小乘何以不在摩訶衍中?」 tr. "Why is the Small Vehicle not within the Mahāyāna?" If the reader takes ‘not within the three baskets’ straight to mean ‘not from the Buddha's mouth’, it wholly contradicts the treatise-author's establishing that 「佛法皆是一種一味」 tr. "the Buddha-dharma is all of one kind and one flavour".
Bearing on Practice
The first use to receive is to take ‘revering prajñā as one reveres the Buddha’ as a thing one can do right now. What the Buddha gives Ānanda is not a new assignment but a turning: the love, reverence, offerings, and provision now given to the Buddha are, after the passing into extinction, turned just as they are toward prajñā. The treatise-author explains why—prajñā is 「無形、無色,智者能知」 tr. "without shape, without form; the wise can know it", so the Buddha's body, seen alike by the foolish and the wise, is used as a simile. The practitioner can ask himself here: the portion of solemnity that arises in me toward images of the Buddha and toward a place of practice—has the same portion turned toward the sūtras and the Dharma?
The second use to receive is to recognise whether one is oneself 「真聽」 tr. "truly hearing". The criteria the treatise-author gives are four: hearing with one mind, believing, receiving, and carrying it out, growing weary of the world and loving nirvāṇa, leaving the Small Vehicle and delighting in the Great Vehicle; he takes as the comparison for 「不聽」 tr. "not hearing" a disciple who does not believe, receive, and carry out his teacher's words, and at the end adds 「誦、讀亦如是」 tr. "reciting and reading are likewise". This one can be tested daily—the passage read today, did it enter the mind, or only pass before the eyes?
The third use to receive is to keep the measure of ‘not clinging to letters and words’. The extinguishers of the Dharma the treatise-author rebukes are exactly those who grasp at the mark of prajñā and discriminate this is wholesome, this is unwholesome, this is worldly, this is nirvāṇa, give rise to clinging through discrimination, and give rise to strife through clinging. The practitioner reading the sūtras falls into this most easily: the more familiar one's reading, the more easily one measures others by the words one has gained. At such a time one can hold up one sentence of the treatise-author's to look at oneself—「汝當如般若波羅蜜相,莫著文字語言,教化眾生。」 tr. "You should, in accordance with the mark of prajñāpāramitā, not cling to letters and words, and teach and transform beings."
The fourth use to receive is to learn the measure of 「語不過三」 tr. "speech does not exceed three". The Buddha deeply loves prajñā and entrusts it three times, and beyond three says no more; the treatise-author says it plainly: said once it is still too slack, beyond three too urgent, 「似如凡夫貪著者」 tr. "like an ordinary person who craves and clings". Anyone who urges the Dharma on others can take this as a rule—speak when one should speak; if one has spoken to the second and third time and the other does not receive it, stop. Stopping is not abandoning; it is not letting the Dharma be made light of through forceful clamour.
The fifth use to receive is to take up that lamp. The treatise-author states what the entrustment is for in one sentence only: 「為不令法滅故。」 tr. "So as not to let the Dharma be extinguished." Its method is 「汝當教化弟子,弟子復教餘人,展轉相教」 tr. "you should teach and transform disciples, and the disciples in turn teach others, teaching one another in turn", and its simile is 「一燈復然餘燈,其明轉多」 tr. "one lamp lights other lamps, and its light grows ever more"; the reverse side is 「莫作最後斷種人」 tr. "do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage". This one asks neither high or low position nor deep or shallow realisation—everyone who has gained a portion of benefit from the Dharma stands at the place where this lamp is passed on. The whole treatise closes with this; its intent is worth pondering.
Further Resonances
The backbone of this chapter is one passage of sūtra text and one passage of treatise explanation. Sūtra ① begins with the Buddha asking Ānanda 「佛是汝大師不?汝是佛弟子不?」 tr. "Is the Buddha your great teacher? Are you the Buddha's disciple?"; Ānanda answers that the Buddha is his great teacher, the Sugata is his great teacher, and he is the Buddha's disciple; the Buddha confirms it and says that what a disciple ought to do he has already done, then bids him after the passing into extinction to love, revere, and make offerings to prajñāpāramitā with the love, reverence, offerings, and provision given to the Buddha, 「乃至第二、第三,以般若波羅蜜囑累汝」 tr. "and so on up to a second time and a third time, I entrust prajñāpāramitā to you", admonishes him not to forget, not to lose, and not to be the last person who cuts off the lineage, and shows two matters—that as long as prajñā is in the world one knows there is a Buddha in the world teaching the Dharma, and that those who write it out, uphold, read, recite, rightly recollect, widely explain, and make all kinds of offerings are not apart from seeing the Buddha, not apart from hearing the Dharma, and always close to the Buddha; at the end it concludes by narration with Maitreya and the other bodhisattva-mahāsattvas, the venerable Subhūti and the other great disciples, together with the whole great assembly, and the gods, humans, gandharvas, asuras, and others, hearing what the Buddha said and all greatly rejoicing. Treatise ① takes fourteen rounds of question and answer as its skeleton, interspersed with re-explanations that cite the sūtra, and with supplements introduced by what someone says or by a further point: first it answers why the Buddha, having already severed love of dharmas, entrusts, and brings out the never-abandoned mind of great kindness and compassion and the matter of breaking his body into pieces like hemp seeds and rice; next it answers why he entrusts to the śrāvaka Ānanda and not to Maitreya and the other great bodhisattvas, setting out Ānanda's virtues fit for passing it on and the reasons why the bodhisattvas scatter and deeply know; next it answers why the Lotus and the other vaipulya sūtras are entrusted to the bodhisattvas King of Joy and the others; next it answers whether there is some further dharma very deep and surpassing prajñā, establishing that prajñā is not a secret dharma, bringing out the simile of the great physician using poison as medicine, and the division of the two kinds of prajñā, shared and unshared; next it answers what difference there is between the entrustment in the earlier chapter "Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha" and the present entrustment, establishing the two gates of the path of prajñā and the path of skilful means, and teaching the simile of the goldsmith making different things out of gold and the marks of two layers of skilful means; next it answers why he is so earnest and solemn, bringing out four sayings: the simile of the merchant chief entrusting precious jewels, that entrusting it himself among his disciples there is no suspicion, that the Buddha does not cling to the dharma of emptiness, and that wishing to show the middle way he parts from the two extremes; next it answers why the Buddha asks whether he is his disciple, bringing up the disciples in name and the doubt of those of the outside paths; next it cites the sūtra and explains the dharmas a disciple ought to do and revering prajñā as one reveres me, answers why, prajñā being the teacher of the buddhas, Ānanda reveres the Buddha, and brings out the meaning of the Buddha using his body as a simile for prajñā; next it answers why go to three when one entrustment would be enough, establishing three sayings: the constant way of the buddhas, that speech does not exceed three; once is still too slack and beyond three too urgent; and the minds of the recipients are of three kinds; next it explains that the reason for entrusting is so as not to let the Dharma be extinguished, the simile of one lamp lighting other lamps, and the admonition not to be the last person who cuts off the lineage; next it answers why, the earlier chapter having made clear that it is neither increased nor decreased, it now says do not let it be cut off and extinguished, dividing prajñā as the real mark from prajñā as letters and speaking of the result within the cause, and defines what is named extinguishing prajñā and what is named not extinguishing; next it explains the principle that when prajñā is in the world the Buddha is present, and the meaning that the Dharma Jewel is not apart from the Buddha Jewel; next it answers how people of heavy sin who hear, receive, write out, and uphold it can be not apart from the buddhas, dividing true hearing from not hearing, and pure and thick merit from thin and slight; next it answers why the great arhats who have already realised the limit of reality greatly rejoice, bringing out the two meanings of severing doubt and of the Buddha's being able to make discriminations within non-discrimination; at the end it answers why the Mahāyāna is not mentioned in the compiling of the three baskets, bringing out three answers—hard to believe, great in quantity, circulating separately—and records the saying that Mañjuśrī and Maitreya led Ānanda to compile the Mahāyāna, the meaning that the Great and Small Vehicles are divided by the arousing of the mind, and the source and course of the names of the three baskets; the whole treatise closes with the colophon on how the Dharma master Kumārajīva brought out this Expository Treatise from beginning to end.
As for the vein of meaning between this chapter and the chapters before and after it, two things can be seen. First, continuing from what precedes: the preceding chapter, "Dharmodgata", ends with the matter of Ever Weeping seeking the Dharma, and this chapter begins with the Buddha entrusting Ānanda to protect and uphold prajñā; seeking the Dharma and protecting the Dharma face each other, front and back, the one in being able to seek, the other in being able to keep. Second, this chapter is the last chapter of the whole treatise, and after it there is no next chapter to hand down to—the whole treatise is gathered in by the end-of-fascicle title 「大智度論卷第一百」 tr. "Fascicle one hundred of the Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa", and before the end of the fascicle there is first a passage of colophon from the translation hall, recording how this treatise was translated in the land of Han from beginning to end. The 「莫作最後斷種人」 tr. "do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage" admonished in the sūtra and the matter of its translation recorded at the end of the fascicle join exactly head to tail: the one charges that it not be cut off, the other records that in fact it was not cut off.
Of the explanations of the ancient masters, for this chapter one school can be recorded. Jizang's Commentary on the Larger Sūtra explains this chapter; there its chapter title is written 「囑累品第九十」 tr. "Entrustment, Chapter Ninety", the same as this treatise's chapter title. His sectioning of the main divisions of this chapter says: 「此下第二、明付屬流通方便。」 tr. "From here below is the second: it clarifies entrusting the circulation of skilful means." He at once sets up a question about the sameness and difference of prajñā and skilful means and answers it himself, saying: 「般若此品別而為論,付屬流通方便智慧與方便云何異耶?答:論云般若方便無有二物,隨用不同故開二耳。如金剛與金更無有異,而善巧以金為釧,故有金有釧二事不同也。」 tr. "Prajñā is discussed separately in this chapter; in entrusting the circulation of skilful means, how do wisdom and skilful means differ? Answer: the treatise says prajñā and skilful means are not two things; because their uses are not the same, they are opened into two. As vajra and gold have no further difference, yet with skill gold is made into a bracelet, so there are gold and bracelet, two things not the same."—the 「論云」 tr. "the treatise says" that he cites takes the same meaning as this chapter of this treatise's 「般若與方便,本體是一,以所用小異故別說」 tr. "prajñā and skilful means are one in their original substance; because there is a small difference in what they are used for, they are spoken of separately" and its simile of the goldsmith making different things out of gold, while the simile he sets up is of gold and bracelet, differing in fullness from this treatise's goldsmith making all kinds of different things; they are recorded side by side without judgement. His explanation of why the Buddha entrusts says: 「問:何故佛付屬流通耶?答:慈悲攝物何俟問耶?佛尚破身利益,況法寶耶?又上說空破有捨,今何屬破空?欲示中道故付屬也。」 tr. "Question: why does the Buddha entrust its circulation? Answer: kindness and compassion gather in beings; why wait to ask? The Buddha even broke his body to benefit them, how much more the Dharma Jewel! Again, above he taught emptiness to break existence and let it go; now, why does the entrustment break emptiness? Because he wishes to show the middle way, he entrusts it."—explaining it in two steps, first by kindness and compassion gathering in beings (taking the Buddha's even breaking his body to benefit them as a comparison) and next by wishing to show the middle way, which correspond to this treatise's first round of question and answer and to the saying 「佛欲現中道故囑累」 tr. "the Buddha entrusts it because he wishes to show the middle way". His explanation of why it is entrusted to Ānanda says: 「問:知付屬有利,何故不付屬菩薩而屬阿難?阿難是聲聞人,般若是菩薩法也。答:欲令物信故。」 tr. "Question: knowing that entrusting is of benefit, why not entrust it to the bodhisattvas, but entrust it to Ānanda? Ānanda is a śrāvaka, and prajñā is the dharma of bodhisattvas. Answer: because he wishes to make beings believe." And again he says: 「菩薩知般若恩德,自弘宣之,不須付屬。阿難是小乘人,不知般若恩,是故佛付屬也。」 tr. "The bodhisattvas know the kindness and virtue of prajñā and spread it of themselves; they need no entrusting. Ānanda is a person of the Small Vehicle who does not know the kindness of prajñā; therefore the Buddha entrusts it." His explanation of why the Lotus and other sūtras are entrusted to bodhisattvas says: 「答:法華明二乘作佛是秘密法,般若是顯現法。顯現法易用,秘密法難用。小藥師能用藥為藥,大藥師乃用毒作藥也。」 tr. "Answer: the Lotus makes clear that those of the two vehicles become Buddhas, which is a secret dharma; prajñā is a manifest dharma. A manifest dharma is easy to use; a secret dharma is hard to use. A lesser physician can use medicine as medicine; a great physician even uses poison to make medicine." And again he says: 「又有共、不共二般若,不共般若付屬菩薩,共者付聲聞也。」 tr. "Again, there are two prajñās, shared and unshared; the unshared prajñā is entrusted to bodhisattvas, the shared one to śrāvakas."—this treatise says 「般若波羅蜜非祕密法」 tr. "prajñāpāramitā is not a secret dharma" and takes what the Lotus and others say of arhats receiving the prediction and becoming Buddhas as what great bodhisattvas can receive, uphold, and use, while Jizang directly sets 「秘密」 tr. "secret" and 「顯現」 tr. "manifest" against each other and assigns them separately; the meaning taken is close while the names set up differ; they are recorded side by side without judgement. His question about where the Mahāyāna was compiled says: 「問:付屬阿難三藏,三藏在屬山,與迦葉結集。付阿難般若,何處集耶?答:文殊將阿難結集,未知何處。一云還在屬山,二云是鐵圍山邊也。」 tr. "Question: the three baskets were entrusted to Ānanda; the three baskets were at Mount Shu, compiled with Kāśyapa. Prajñā was entrusted to Ānanda; where was it compiled? Answer: Mañjuśrī led Ānanda to compile it; it is not known where. One saying is that it was again at Mount Shu; a second says it was beside the Iron Ring Mountains."—this treatise only records that Mañjuśrī, Maitreya, and the other great bodhisattvas led Ānanda to compile this Mahāyāna and does not state the place, while Jizang sets two sayings side by side about the place and himself marks 「未知何處」 tr. "it is not known where"; this is recorded without judgement. His sectioning of the passages of the sūtra text says: 「品為二:初、明付屬流通;二、大眾歡喜奉行。初三:第一、明慇懃付屬,令尊重供養;二、明付屬阿難,令流通不絕;三、明付囑之意也。今是初文。」 tr. "The chapter is in two: first, clarifying the entrusting of circulation; second, the great assembly rejoicing and carrying it out. The first has three: first, clarifying the earnest entrusting, bidding him honour and make offerings; second, clarifying the entrusting to Ānanda, bidding him circulate it without break; third, clarifying the intent of the entrustment. Now this is the first text." His explanation of why the Buddha asks Ānanda says: 「問:佛知阿難是弟子,何故今方問耶?答:二義:一、為簡真偽。」 tr. "Question: the Buddha knows that Ānanda is his disciple; why does he only now ask? Answer: there are two meanings: first, to sift the true from the false."—the same in intent as this treatise's bringing up the two matters of the disciples in name and the doubt of those of the outside paths. His explanation of the second and third entrustments says: 「第二、第三者,佛法不過三事,不受佛語便是逆人,金剛神便煞之。又過多則大,過不足故,但其三也。」 tr. "As for ‘a second time and a third time’: in the Buddha-dharma a matter does not exceed three; one who does not receive the Buddha's words is then a rebellious person, and the vajra spirit then kills him. Again, going beyond into many would be too great, and falling short would not suffice; therefore it is only three." His explanation of the section on not forgetting and not losing says: 「汝莫忘莫失下,第一、付囑令流通不斷絕也。人子不能紹繼家業,為斷種人,最為耻。」 tr. "From ‘do not forget it, do not lose it’ below is the first: entrusting it so that its circulation is not cut off. When a son cannot continue the family's work, he is a person who cuts off the lineage, the greatest shame." His explanation of the passage of the great assembly rejoicing says: 「問:無憂無喜是羅漢功德,尚無不喜云何言大喜?答:羅漢於四諦無疑、於一切法中皆疑,今說般若破其種種疑心,喜也,盡此無餘也。」 tr. "Question: being without sorrow and without joy is the merit of an arhat; since they have not even non-joy, how can it say great joy? Answer: the arhats have no doubt about the four truths, but within all dharmas they have doubts throughout; now prajñā is taught and breaks all kinds of doubting minds in them, so they rejoice; this exhausts them without remainder."—this treatise explains it by 「未得一切智慧故,於諸甚深法中猶疑不了」 tr. "because they have not yet obtained all wisdom, within all the very deep dharmas they still have doubts and do not understand them clearly", while Jizang says 「於四諦無疑、於一切法中皆疑」 tr. "they have no doubt about the four truths, but within all dharmas they have doubts throughout"; the placing of the doubt judged differs slightly, and they are recorded side by side without judgement. Jizang's commentary stops its explanation at this chapter, and right after it is titled 「大品經義疏卷第十」 tr. "Fascicle ten of the Commentary on the Larger Sūtra", so his book too ends with the Entrustment chapter, closing at the same place in the chapter order as this treatise; at the end of the fascicle there is separately a colophon of the copyist of the manuscript, recording the text he collated against: 「嘉元三年二月下旬候,以東南院古本終,交合切了……」 tr. "In the last ten days of the second month of the third year of Kagen, the collation against the old text of the Tōnan-in was finished and completed ……"; it belongs to the copyist, not to Jizang, and is recorded for reference. The extant part of Huiying's Commentary does not reach this chapter, and the lack is marked as it is, without filling it with text from elsewhere; only a few words of his sectioning point ahead to this chapter (see the Apparatus layer); his book also has an explanation of a chapter of the same name, "Entrustment", but what it explains is a different chapter of the same name in the earlier part of this treatise, not an explanation of this chapter, and it must not be cited to make up the number. Junzheng's book is not in the form of a chapter-by-chapter commentary, and for this chapter there is no text that can be cited; its lack too is recorded as it is. The variant titles of this chapter's name in the various editions and the differences of chapter names in the sūtra line are detailed in the Apparatus layer.
考據Apparatus
一、科判
本品在《大智度論》釋《大品般若》之次第中屬〈釋餘品〉一段,為全論最末一品,全在卷一百,單一單元。卷一百起於〔T25 0750b20〕,其卷首題所繫者猶是前品——「大智度論釋曇無竭品第八十九」〔T25 0750b20〕,其下即「龍樹菩薩造」「後秦龜茲國三藏鳩摩羅什譯」造署譯署二行。本品品題「大智度論釋囑累品第九十」〔T25 0753c28〕逕接前品〈曇無竭品第八十九〉之末而起,品首無卷題、無造署譯署(二者唯見於每卷卷首,本品起於卷一百之中段,故不重出)。品身訖於卷尾題「大智度論卷第一百」〔T25 0756c19〕,其後無次品品題——全論品目至此而盡。故本品為居卷末·品尾即卷尾即全論之尾之型:與品六十二〈同學品〉之居卷中不涉卷界異,與品四十八〈佛母品〉之跨卷型異;與品五十三〈趣一切智品〉之『居卷末·品尾繫卷尾』同型,而多一重——彼之卷尾後尚有次卷次品,本品之卷尾後更無一字。
全品純漢字四千零四十九(機械重計值),為〈釋餘品〉中之中量品。品內結構一【經】一【論】、單一單元:【經】〔T25 0753c29〕、【論】〔T25 0754a20〕。【經】標記有校記,宋、元、宮三本無此結構標記;【論】標記亦有校記,宋、宮二本無之(下帳第三、第十五條)——標記存否屬底本傳承層,結構計數仍依底本標籤為準。
說者結構:經①全段唯佛與阿難兩人,三輪換說皆有明文——〔T25 0753c29〕「爾時,佛告阿難」(佛起說,反問其師弟名分)、〔T25 0754a01〕「阿難言」(阿難答)、〔T25 0754a02〕「佛言」(佛可其答而付囑般若);其下〔T25 0754a14〕「佛說般若波羅蜜已」一段為敘事收束,列大眾之名而收以「聞佛所說,皆大歡喜。」〔T25 0754a19〕,無說者、非對話,如實分記。
論①以問答直起,無「釋曰」起論標記。正式問答十四對,其問答標籤之位如次:〔T25 0754a20〕/〔T25 0754a22〕、〔T25 0754a29〕/〔T25 0754b02〕、〔T25 0754b13〕/〔T25 0754b14〕、〔T25 0754b18〕/〔T25 0754b20〕、〔T25 0754b27〕/〔T25 0754b28〕、〔T25 0754c21〕/〔T25 0754c22〕、〔T25 0755a10〕/〔T25 0755a12〕、〔T25 0755a28〕/〔T25 0755a29〕、〔T25 0755b08〕/〔T25 0755b08〕(問答同行緊接)、〔T25 0755b09〕/〔T25 0755b10〕、〔T25 0755b22〕/〔T25 0755b24〕、〔T25 0755c18〕/〔T25 0755c20〕、〔T25 0756a09〕/〔T25 0756a11〕、〔T25 0756a21〕/〔T25 0756a23〕。「有人言」「復有人言」型六見(〔T25 0754b02〕〔T25 0754b14〕〔T25 0754c19〕〔T25 0755a01〕〔T25 0755a06〕〔T25 0756b14〕,不計入問答對數);「復次」型補充義九見(〔T25 0754b22〕〔T25 0754c14〕〔T25 0754c27〕〔T25 0755b03〕〔T25 0755b13〕〔T25 0755b14〕〔T25 0756a14〕〔T25 0756a26〕〔T25 0756b24〕;〔T25 0756b14〕之「復次,有人言」已入前欄,不重計)。
論段之中,論主以「佛告阿難:『……』」句式重牒經文五處——〔T25 0755a21〕〔T25 0755a26〕〔T25 0755b02〕〔T25 0755b07〕〔T25 0755c03〕。此五處皆論主為推展釋義而回牒經語,繫論主之敘述,非另起一經段,如實分記(同品六十二論段「佛告阿難」之重述體例)。
末段〔T25 0756c09〕起之譯場跋文,屬歷史記事而非教義命題,文體與前全異,本目仍逐字列入不撮要(義理分位見第七目)。
二、術語考
囑累。 全品之總名。其經證在佛語:「乃至第二、第三,以般若波羅蜜囑累汝。」〔T25 0754a08〕。「囑累」一語於本論全書六十三見,本品居其三十八(本目以漢字流重掃所得·計數剝校記與目錄標記),本品所以獨以之名者,在其為全論收束之付託——論自釋其所以:「所以囑累者,為不令法滅故。」〔T25 0755b17〕。囑累之事非本品所創:論主自指前文「先〈見阿閦佛品〉中囑累,今復囑累,有何等異?」〔T25 0754b27〕,可知般若之囑累前後兩處;而本品之囑累,論判其別在道之所屬(見下「般若道·方便道」條)。又「囑累」與同名之品六十六〈囑累品〉為同名異品,二者各有其品身,不可相淆(見第七目)。
大師·弟子。 經之發端不說般若,先立師弟之名分。佛問:「佛是汝大師不?汝是佛弟子不?」〔T25 0753c29〕;阿難答:「世尊!佛是我大師,脩伽陀是我大師,我是佛弟子。」〔T25 0754a01〕;佛印之曰:「我是汝大師,汝是我弟子。」〔T25 0754a03〕。論釋此問之不虛設,出二因緣:其一防偽——「佛有惡弟子須那剎多羅等,有少因緣故作弟子,欲於佛所取射法」〔T25 0755a12〕,「又如須尸摩為盜法故作弟子。如是等,是名字弟子。」〔T25 0755a15〕;其二釋疑——「阿難曾作外道弟子,著草衣,求神仙;今以佛是其親族,尊重故給侍。」〔T25 0755a17〕。故此問之實義在「若言是真弟子,當隨我勅。」〔T25 0755a20〕——名分既定,付囑乃有所繫。「須那剎多羅」於本論全書二見(〔T25 0303b16〕〔T25 0755a12〕)、「須尸摩」三見(〔T25 0233c04〕〔T25 0620b28〕〔T25 0755a15〕),本品各一見。
弟子法。 論所出之師弟相待之界:「弟子法者,所謂以善身、口、意業供給師。」〔T25 0755a22〕,其全者在「不惜身命、不難懃勞,自捨其心,隨師教勅」〔T25 0755a25〕。經文所印者即此三業——「汝用身、口、意慈業供養供給我,亦常如我意,無有違失。」〔T25 0754a04〕。
般若道·方便道。 本品義理之樞,論以之分判兩處囑累之異:「菩薩道有二種:一者、般若波羅蜜道,二者、方便道。」〔T25 0754b28〕,「先囑累者,為說般若波羅蜜體竟;今以說令眾生得是般若方便竟,囑累。」〔T25 0754b29〕。其二者之際,論明言非二物:「般若與方便,本體是一,以所用小異故別說」〔T25 0754c05〕。方便之界,論出二義:其一在不取證——「一切法性空,涅槃亦空,我今於菩薩功德未具足,不應取證」〔T25 0754c10〕,「住菩薩位中,知甚深微妙無文字法,引導眾生,是名方便。」〔T25 0754c13〕;其二在除邪疑——「若能生四種事:若疑、若邪見、若入涅槃、若作佛」〔T25 0754c16〕,「若能除邪、疑,不入涅槃,是為方便。」〔T25 0754c18〕。吉藏釋本品亦以般若方便之辨開章,其說與此相值而喻不同(見第六目)。
斷種人。 經之誡語:「阿難!汝莫忘莫失,莫作最後斷種人!」〔T25 0754a09〕。論訓其語出世法:「世人有子,若不紹繼,則名斷種,最為可恥。」〔T25 0755b20〕,而收之於般若:「汝莫於汝身上令般若斷絕!」〔T25 0755b21〕。「最後斷種人」五字於本論全書二見,即經文〔T25 0754a09〕與論釋〔T25 0755b19〕,皆在本品——此語為本品所專有,本目逐字重掃所得。
滅般若。 本品最易誤讀之目,論自設難以顯之。難曰:般若「說亦不增、不說亦不減,畢竟寂滅相」〔T25 0755b22〕,則「譬如虛空,誰能滅者?」〔T25 0755b24〕。論之答分兩路:其一,所謂不令滅者,指文字流通——「而文字語言書般若波羅蜜經卷,為他人說,是此中般若,於此因中而說其果。」〔T25 0755b26〕;其二,真所謂滅者,指著心分別——「凡人聞般若波羅蜜微妙,即生著心,取般若相,分別諸法」〔T25 0755b27〕,「以分別故,於是法中生著心,著心故鬪諍,鬪諍故起諸罪業」〔T25 0755c01〕,「如是人名為滅般若波羅蜜。」〔T25 0755c02〕。故其不滅之法亦即在此:「汝當如般若波羅蜜相,莫著文字語言,教化眾生。」〔T25 0755c03〕,「是名不滅。」〔T25 0755c04〕。
般若在世·佛在世。 本品之總結性教誡。經:「隨爾所時般若波羅蜜在世,當知爾所時有佛在世說法。」〔T25 0754a10〕;論牒而釋之:「有般若在世,則為佛在」〔T25 0755c07〕,其所以然者二——其一「般若波羅蜜是諸佛母,諸佛以法為師。」〔T25 0755c08〕,「若師在、母在,不名為失利。」〔T25 0755c09〕;其二「又法寶不離佛寶。」〔T25 0755c11〕,「菩薩有三十二相、八十隨形好,不名為佛,得法寶故名為佛。」〔T25 0755c12〕,故「是故說般若在世,如佛在世,說法無異。」〔T25 0755c16〕。「般若波羅蜜是諸佛母」一語於本論全書四見(〔T25 0314a21〕〔T25 0549b07〕〔T25 0550a28〕〔T25 0755c08〕),本品一見。
真聽。 論釋重罪之人聽般若何以亦得不離見佛,其判準不在聽之事,在受之心:「一者、但聽而不信受行,二者、聽而信受奉行。」〔T25 0755c22〕,「若以一心聽聞,信受奉行,厭世、愛涅槃,離小乘、樂大乘——作如是聽受,是名真聽。」〔T25 0755c24〕。與之相續者為正憶念之訓:「正憶念,隨如佛意,離有無二邊,行於中道。」〔T25 0755c26〕——正憶念即中道行,非記誦之謂。
摩訶衍·三藏。 末番問答之要目。論答結集何以不收摩訶衍,先出其難信:「摩訶衍甚深難信、難解難行。」〔T25 0756a23〕;次出其量——「三藏正有三十萬偈,并為九百六十萬言。」〔T25 0756a26〕,而「〈般若波羅蜜品〉有二萬二千偈,〈大般若品〉有十萬偈」〔T25 0756a28〕,故「云何可入三藏中?小物應在大中,大物不得入小。」〔T25 0756b10〕。其分判之語最明:「三藏是聲聞法,摩訶衍是大乘法。」〔T25 0756b23〕,而二者非二味:「佛法皆是一種一味,所謂苦盡解脫味。」〔T25 0756b18〕,其異唯在「一者、但自為身,二者、兼為一切眾生。」〔T25 0756b20〕。吉藏於此段亦有其數,與本論不同(見第六目)。
修多羅·毘尼·摩多羅迦。 論所出佛世本無三藏名之證:「佛在世時,無有三藏名,但有持修多羅比丘、持毘尼比丘、持摩多羅迦比丘。」〔T25 0756b24〕。毘尼之訓在其下:「毘尼名比丘作罪,佛結戒:應行是、不應行是,作是事得是罪。」〔T25 0756c01〕,其二分為「一者、摩偷羅國毘尼,含阿波陀那、本生,有八十部」〔T25 0756c03〕、「二者、罽賓國毘泥,除却本生、阿波陀那,但取要用作十部。」〔T25 0756c04〕——同段之內「毘尼」「毘泥」兩形並見,底本如是,如實誌錄不齊一化(校記見第八目第六十五條,宋、元、明、宮、石五本於後一處作「尼」)。
釋論·具本·略本。 末段跋文之自述語。「出此釋論」〔T25 0756c11〕之「釋論」,即本書之自名;其體例之自陳在「論初品三十四卷,解釋一品,是全論具本;二品已下,法師略之,取其足以開釋文意而已,不復備其廣釋。」〔T25 0756c14〕,而收以「得此百卷,若盡出之,將十倍於此。」〔T25 0756c17〕。「得此百卷」四字於本論全書二見——一在論首之序〔T25 0057b11〕,一即此跋〔T25 0756c17〕,首尾相扣(見第七目)。
三、譬喻與故事
本品要喻六、引事二,皆繫於所釋之義,無泛設。
碎身如麻米(大悲不捨之喻)。 論釋佛何以既斷法愛而猶慇懃囑累,舉佛自身之事為證:「於娑羅雙樹間,以金剛三昧為眾生碎身如麻米,何況經法多所饒益而不囑累!」〔T25 0754a23〕——身尚可碎,何況一言之囑。喻之力在一「何況」:以極難者反顯極易者,囑累之非愛著,於此自明。「麻米」一語於本論全書一見,即此處。
大藥師以毒為藥(深法屬誰之喻)。 論釋《法華》等經何以反囑累菩薩,取醫家為比:「譬如大藥師能以毒為藥。」〔T25 0754b22〕——毒之為藥,不在毒而在用之者。故般若之囑累聲聞、《法華》之囑累菩薩,非法有高下,是受者之堪不堪。吉藏於同一處亦用藥喻而分大小二師(見第六目),兩家之喻同源而分疏各異。
金作異物(般若與方便之喻)。 論釋般若道與方便道之一體異名:「譬如金師以巧方便故,以金作種種異物,雖皆是金,而各異名。」〔T25 0754c06〕——金是體,器是用;名可二,金不二。此喻正承前句「般若與方便,本體是一,以所用小異故別說」〔T25 0754c05〕而下,非另立一義。吉藏釋本品開章即用「金剛與金」「以金為釧」之同型喻(見第六目),兩造之喻構相值而所取之器不同。
估客主囑愛子珍寶(慇懃鄭重之喻)。 論釋何以囑累至於慇懃鄭重,取商賈之事:「譬如估客主,欲遠出他國,雖以財寶囑累於子,大價妙寶偏獨慇懃,以其子未識妙寶價重故。」〔T25 0754c23〕——慇懃之所以偏在此一物,正因受者不識其貴。其下更出一層:「若聞其子讚說寶價,則不信之。」〔T25 0754c26〕——故佛不於他眾中自讚其法,「人則譏佛自稱讚法,疑而不信;自於弟子中囑累,則無嫌。」〔T25 0754c28〕。「譬如估客主」於本論全書二見(〔T25 0236b29〕〔T25 0754c23〕),本品一見。
一燈然餘燈(展轉相教之喻)。 論釋囑累之所為在不令法滅,出流通之法:「汝當教化弟子,弟子復教餘人,展轉相教;譬如一燈復然餘燈,其明轉多。」〔T25 0755b17〕——燈之相然,不減其本明而增其總明。此喻與下句「斷種」之誡恰成正反兩面:一則轉多,一則斷絕。「如一燈復然餘燈」一語於本論全書一見,即此處。
虛空誰能滅(寂滅不可滅之喻)。 出於論主自設之難:般若既「畢竟寂滅相」〔T25 0755b23〕,則「譬如虛空,誰能滅者?」〔T25 0755b24〕——以虛空之不可滅,質「莫令斷滅」〔T25 0755b23〕之語。此喻非立義而是設難,其解在「於此因中而說其果」〔T25 0755b27〕一語(見第二目「滅般若」條)。
執金剛神擬杵(語不過三之引事)。 論釋何以三告而止,引諸佛常法:「諸佛常法,語不過三。」〔T25 0755b10〕,「若過三不從,執金剛神則以杵擬之」〔T25 0755b11〕。「執金剛神」於本論全書六見(〔T25 0575b15〕〔T25 0575b17〕〔T25 0576b28〕〔T25 0614c10〕〔T25 0755b11〕〔T25 0755b12〕),本品二見——本品之兩見同在一句之內外,且此二處之「剛」字校勘互為交叉引照(見第八目第四十四條)。吉藏於同一處亦引此事(見第六目)。
佛以身喻般若(引事二·經佛自取)。 論釋阿難何以恭敬佛而不恭敬般若:「阿難雖得初道,漏未盡故,不深知法實,如佛所知。」〔T25 0755a29〕;其下出佛之所以自以身為喻:「般若波羅蜜微妙甚深,無形、無色,智者能知。」〔T25 0755b04〕,「佛身相好,愚、智視之,皆無厭足,是故佛以身喻般若。」〔T25 0755b05〕——佛身在此不是所敬之極,是所敬之階:以可見者引向不可見者,此即經文「當愛敬、供養般若波羅蜜」〔T25 0754a07〕之所以繫於「汝愛敬供養供給」之後。
四、所釋經文
品名網:兩藏品名全同·諸本 -1 階兩端一貫(並錄不判)。 本品品名之網,異於品六十二之兩造分立,其目有三。
其一,底本品題〔T25 0753c28〕作「大智度論釋囑累品第九十」,所釋經 T223 側本品品題〔T08 0423c21〕作「摩訶般若波羅蜜經囑累品第九十」——除各自書名之冠首外,品名字形完全相同,皆作「囑累品第九十」,無如品八十七「涅槃如化/如化」之異名情形,亦無如品六十二「同學/魔愁」之兩造。
其二,聖、石二本之 -1 階。品題注之異讀三造:聖本作「釋八十九品」(校記原文記作「(釋八十九品)六字」,而所錄之字實五,原記之數與所錄不合,如實並存不代判),以本品為其自家第八十九品;石本作「摩訶般若波羅蜜品第八十九後囑累」(經題式·品序 -1·並綴「後囑累」以標其位);明本則校記作「〔大智度論〕-」,即僅省「大智度論」四字,非品序異動。宮本於「第九十」後綴一「品」字,屬純用字差異(下帳第一、二條)。-1 階鏈於全論最末一品仍無斷裂——此為本品所獨能證者:品四十四以下逐品順推之 -1 階,至此得其終端。
其三,卷尾題之 -1 階(第二端·與品題互證)。卷尾題〔T25 0756c19〕之異讀:聖本作「大智度經論卷第一百釋第八十八品下訖第八十九品」、石本作「釋八十九品竟大智度經卷一百」(下帳第八十條)——兩本皆以「八十九」記本品,與品題起處之記法完全一致。故 -1 階於本品首尾兩端皆規律,無一端落差;此與品七十七曾見之前後端不一情形不同,如實分記。又聖本卷尾題並出其所釋之品域「第八十八品下訖第八十九品」,可知聖本卷一百之所收為其自家八十八品之下半至八十九品——底本/聖本之卷品分劃不疊合,如實誌錄不強解。
前品之同品異名(見證事實·誌錄不判)。 本品之前品,本論作〈曇無竭品第八十九〉——其品目〔T25 0744c16〕、其卷首題〔T25 0750b20〕皆作「曇無竭」;所釋經 T223 側同品作「法尚品」〔T08 0421b24〕;吉藏疏亦作「法尚品第八十九」〔X24n0451 0342c20〕,其書卷首總目一款相同。故前品為同品而兩名並行(本論作「曇無竭」;所釋經正題與吉藏疏作「法尚」,而所釋經側丹本夾註亦作「曇無竭品」〔T08 0421b25〕,故非整齊之經論兩造),與本品之品名兩造全同恰成對照。本目誌此見證事實,不判兩名孰正;下文及第七目稱前品,一律從本論之名作〈曇無竭品〉。
所釋經目次屬性 +1 偏移(續存·常設體例不重判)。 所釋經 T223 側本品之目次標九十一而顯文標「90 囑累品」〔T08 0423c21〕——此 +1 偏移自品四十一以來屢見,本品續存(承〈佛母品〉已誌之常設現象,不重判)。其前品〈曇無竭品〉一款相同,二品相續而偏移不變,屬底本目次層之固有瑕疵,與品名、品序之異讀無涉,如實分記。
兩藏品界與卷界之配置(本品兩造皆繫卷尾)。 所釋經 T223 側本品訖〔T08 0424a13〕,其下即卷尾題「摩訶般若波羅蜜經卷第二十七」〔T08 0424a14〕——T223 側本品亦為全經最末一品,品尾即卷尾即全經之尾。本論側同型(見第一目)。兩傳承於此品之收束位置完全同步,此與品六十二之『兩傳承卷品分劃不合』恰成反例,如實分記。T223 卷尾題之卷次亦有異讀:宋、元、明、宮四本作「三十」、聖本作「四十」〔T08 0424a14〕——諸本卷數分劃不同而品序不異,如實誌錄。
全量牒經對讀(兩側對勘·異文九處·逐處誌其校記之有無)。 本論經①〔T25 0753c29–0754a19〕與所釋經本品〔T08 0423c22–0424a13〕逐字幾近同文(兩造漢字流各三百二十九、三百二十八字),除本論多一【經】結構標記外,其異九處:
- 脩伽陀/修伽陀——本論作「世尊!佛是我大師,脩伽陀是我大師,我是佛弟子。」〔T25 0754a01〕,T223 作「世尊!佛是我大師,修伽陀是我大師;我是佛弟子。」〔T08 0423c23〕。本論側此處有注「陀【大】|他【聖】」(下帳第五條),所校者在「陀」不在「脩」;T223 側此處無校記。「脩/修」之異兩造皆無校記,屬傳承用字之異,如實誌錄,不以一造之讀判另一造。
- 汝莫忘莫失/汝莫忘失——本論作「阿難!汝莫忘莫失,莫作最後斷種人!」〔T25 0754a09〕,T223 作「阿難!汝莫忘失,莫作最後斷種人。」〔T08 0424a02〕。T223 側此處有注「失【大】,莫失【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】」〔T08 0424a02〕——T223 之宋、元、明、宮、聖五本皆作「莫忘莫失」,正與本論底本之讀合;本論側此處無校記。
- 常親近佛/為常親近佛——本論作「當知是人不離見佛、不離聞法、常親近佛。」〔T25 0754a13〕,T223 作「當知是人不離見佛、不離聞法,為常親近佛。」〔T08 0424a07〕,多一「為」字。兩造於此皆無校記,如實誌錄。
- 慧命舍利弗(T223 多「慧命」二字)——本論作「慧命須菩提、舍利弗、大目犍連」〔T25 0754a15〕,T223 作「慧命須菩提、慧命舍利弗、大目揵連」〔T08 0424a09〕。兩造於此皆無校記,屬列名體例之異,如實誌錄。
- 大目犍連/大目揵連——本論側此處有星記注「犍【大】*,揵【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】*」(下帳第九條)——本論之宋、元、明、宮、聖五本皆作「揵」,正是 T223 底本之讀;T223 側此處無校記。
- 富樓那彌多隷耶尼子/富樓那彌多羅尼子——本論側此處有注二:「隷【大】|羅【石】」(下帳第十條)與「耶【大】|〔-〕【聖】【石】」(下帳第十一條)——石本作「彌多羅尼子」(隷→羅·耶字缺),正與 T223 底本之讀合;T223 側此處無校記。
- 摩訶俱絺羅/摩訶拘絺羅——本論側有注「俱【大】|拘【聖】【石】」(下帳第十二條)——聖、石二本之讀正與 T223 底本合;T223 側此處無校記。
- 摩訶迦旃延/大迦旃延——本論側有注「摩訶【大】|大【聖】【石】」(下帳第十三條),T223 側亦有注「大【大】,摩訶【宋】【元】【明】【宮】」〔T08 0424a11〕——兩造校記恰成鏡像:本論之聖石二本讀法(大)正是 T223 底本之讀,T223 之宋元明宮四本讀法(摩訶)正是本論底本之讀。此為本品唯一雙向皆有校記而互為鏡像之異文,如實誌錄,不判孰正。
- 犍闥婆/揵闥婆——本論側有注「犍【大】|乾【聖】【石】」(下帳第十四條),T223 側有注「揵【大】,乾【宋】【元】【明】」〔T08 0424a12〕——兩造之異本皆作「乾」,而兩造之底本各作「犍」「揵」:三形並存,異在字符不在義,如實誌錄。
同型異讀之兩藏並見(讀誦/誦讀)。 本論作「受持、讀、誦、正憶念、為人廣說」〔T25 0754a11〕,其注「讀誦【大】|誦讀【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】」(下帳第八條);T223 同位作「若有書般若波羅蜜,受持讀誦、正憶念、為人廣說」〔T08 0424a04〕,其處為星記交叉引照,所指之注作「讀誦【大】*,誦讀【聖】*」〔T08 0423c17〕。兩藏各自之異本皆出「誦讀」倒文——此非一藏之內部游移,是兩藏傳承各自並存之兩讀,如實誌錄,不判孰先。又本論底本正文於「讀」「誦」之間帶一頓號而其校記不帶,屬編校兩層之差,顯式並存(見第八目專列)。
對照組(六串·兩藏各自見數誠實記·對位唯一)。 「隨爾所時般若波羅蜜在世,當知爾所時有佛在世說法。」〔T25 0754a10〕/〔T08 0424a03〕;「阿難!汝莫忘莫失,莫作最後斷種人!」〔T25 0754a09〕/同位作「阿難!汝莫忘失,莫作最後斷種人。」〔T08 0424a02〕;「佛是汝大師不?汝是佛弟子不?」〔T25 0753c29〕/〔T08 0423c22〕;「我是汝大師,汝是我弟子。」〔T25 0754a03〕/〔T08 0423c25〕;「當知是人不離見佛、不離聞法、常親近佛。」〔T25 0754a13〕/同位作「當知是人不離見佛、不離聞法,為常親近佛。」〔T08 0424a07〕;「聞佛所說,皆大歡喜。」〔T25 0754a19〕/〔T08 0424a12〕。以上六串之漢字流,於 T25n1509 全論各唯一見(本目逐串於兩藏以容錯法獨立重掃,非轉抄),對位唯一、無他品可淆。判為『同品同名』——品名、品序、品界、收束位置四事兩造皆合,為〈釋餘品〉諸品中兩造最相契之一品。
論層之無對應(非異文)。 本論【論】層十四番問答為論體之結構性擴增,所釋經為純經文,T223 側無此層,不構成異文,如實分記。又論主於論段所牒之經語五處(見第一目),其文字與本論經①同系,非別出一本,亦不入異文之數。
五、般若義眼
本品是全論之末品,也是全論唯一一品把『這部書往後怎麼辦』寫成教法的。其義可約為五重。
其一,付囑先立名分,不先說法。經之開卷不先出付囑之語,而是一句反問:「佛是汝大師不?汝是佛弟子不?」〔T25 0753c29〕。阿難答畢,佛才印可:「我是汝大師,汝是我弟子。」〔T25 0754a03〕。論解得極實:這一問是為了防偽與釋疑——佛座下確有「名字弟子」〔T25 0755a16〕,外人亦確疑阿難是因親族之故而侍佛。故此問之落點在「若言是真弟子,當隨我勅。」〔T25 0755a20〕。法之所以能付,先在人之肯受;名分不定,付囑無所繫。全論收束於此,而不收束於一段更高的義理,其意正在於此。
其二,愛敬般若即愛敬佛,而佛以身為般若之階。經之正文只一句轉換:「我身現在,汝愛敬供養供給,心常清淨;我滅度後,是一切愛敬、供養、供給事,當愛敬、供養般若波羅蜜!」〔T25 0754a05〕。論主於此自設一問,甚順人情——「般若是諸佛師,而阿難何以不恭敬其師,而恭敬佛?」〔T25 0755a28〕。論之答不避其實:「阿難雖得初道,漏未盡故,不深知法實,如佛所知。」〔T25 0755a29〕;「般若波羅蜜微妙甚深,無形、無色,智者能知。」〔T25 0755b04〕,「佛身相好,愚、智視之,皆無厭足,是故佛以身喻般若。」〔T25 0755b05〕。佛身在此不是所敬之極,是所敬之階:看得見的那一位,是為了把心引到看不見的那一法上去。故囑累不是換一個對象去崇拜,是把同一分恭敬轉到法上。
其三,慇懃至三,是為離二邊,不是因為愛著。論主自設的第一問就極不客氣:佛既已斷法愛,「今何以種種因緣囑累是法,似如愛著?」〔T25 0754a21〕。答有三路。一路是大悲——「諸佛大慈悲心,從初發意已來乃至到涅槃門,常不捨離。」〔T25 0754a22〕,其極證在「於娑羅雙樹間,以金剛三昧為眾生碎身如麻米,何況經法多所饒益而不囑累!」〔T25 0754a23〕。一路是受者——「譬如估客主,欲遠出他國,雖以財寶囑累於子,大價妙寶偏獨慇懃,以其子未識妙寶價重故。」〔T25 0754c23〕;慇懃之偏在此一物,不是持者愛它,是受者不識它。最深的一路在中道:「佛欲現中道故囑累:先說諸法空,以遮有邊;今慇懃囑累,則破無邊,是則中道。」〔T25 0755a06〕——前面說了一部書的空,若無這一番慇懃,人便要把空讀成斷滅;囑累之慇懃,正是那一邊的遮。至於何以三而止,論出常法:「諸佛常法,語不過三。」〔T25 0755b10〕,並補一句極平實的量度:「復次,若一說,猶緩;過三,太急,似如凡夫貪著者。」〔T25 0755b13〕。
其四,法之可滅不可滅,全繫於著心。論主設下全品最鋒利的一難:般若「說亦不增、不說亦不減,畢竟寂滅相」〔T25 0755b22〕,那麼「譬如虛空,誰能滅者?」〔T25 0755b24〕。答亦分兩層。就所囑累者言,所指是文字流通——「而文字語言書般若波羅蜜經卷,為他人說,是此中般若,於此因中而說其果。」〔T25 0755b26〕:經卷不是般若,但是般若之因,故於因中說果之名。就所謂滅者言,真能滅般若的從來不是外難:「凡人聞般若波羅蜜微妙,即生著心,取般若相,分別諸法」〔T25 0755b27〕,「以分別故,於是法中生著心,著心故鬪諍,鬪諍故起諸罪業」〔T25 0755c01〕,「如是人名為滅般若波羅蜜。」〔T25 0755c02〕。滅法者不在法外,在讀法的人心裡那一點取相。故不滅之法亦只一句:「汝當如般若波羅蜜相,莫著文字語言,教化眾生。」〔T25 0755c03〕——依般若之相而教化,才是流通;執文字而教化,正是斷絕。與此相扣者是流通之喻:「譬如一燈復然餘燈,其明轉多。」〔T25 0755b18〕與斷絕之誡:「世人有子,若不紹繼,則名斷種,最為可恥。」〔T25 0755b20〕——一則轉多,一則到此為止,兩事都落在傳的人身上。
其五,般若在世即佛在世——這是全論最後的教誡。經:「隨爾所時般若波羅蜜在世,當知爾所時有佛在世說法。」〔T25 0754a10〕;論釋其所以然者二:「般若波羅蜜是諸佛母,諸佛以法為師。」〔T25 0755c08〕,「若師在、母在,不名為失利。」〔T25 0755c09〕;「又法寶不離佛寶。」〔T25 0755c11〕,「菩薩有三十二相、八十隨形好,不名為佛,得法寶故名為佛。」〔T25 0755c12〕。相好不足以成佛,得法寶才成佛——所以法在,佛便在,「說法無異」〔T25 0755c16〕。而末番問答補足了它的反面:般若既如此重,何以結集三藏時不收?論答之要不在貶三藏,在明其量與其機——「小物應在大中,大物不得入小。」〔T25 0756b11〕,「摩訶衍能兼小乘法故,是故不應如汝所問。」〔T25 0756b13〕;而二者之味本一:「佛法皆是一種一味,所謂苦盡解脫味。」〔T25 0756b18〕,其異唯在「一者、但自為身,二者、兼為一切眾生。」〔T25 0756b20〕。一部百卷之論,收在「有般若在世,則為佛在」〔T25 0755c07〕一句上;而這一句能不能成立,又全看前面那一條——聽的人是不是真聽,傳的人有沒有著心。
六、諸家異釋
《大智度論》本無逐文全疏之傳統,古德引釋率屬據實偏倚。本品古德覆讀唯一家:釋所釋經之吉藏疏存完整專章,且其疏亦止於本品;釋本論之慧影疏於本品闕釋(其現存文本不及本品,惟科判數語前指),均正書零命中,天台系諸書零命中——與品六十二之『兩家專章俱存』相反,本品為古疏最寡之一品。此目誌錄其所疏所引與本品之對應,不判各家詮釋高下。
吉藏《大品經義疏》(X24n0451)。 於所釋經〈囑累品〉之逐文疏,起「囑累品第九十」〔X24n0451 0345a04〕,迄全書末〔X24n0451 0345c20〕。其後無次品——吉藏疏之品目亦止於本品,與本論之品目收束處完全對應(見第七目)。又本品名於該書卷首總目一見〔X24n0451 0195c20〕、於品身標題一見〔X24n0451 0345a04〕,此處所繫者為品身標題,非總目。其可誌者八。
其一,品位與大科——「此下第二、明付屬流通方便。」〔X24n0451 0345a05〕:吉藏以本品屬全經大科之第二段「付屬流通方便」。其開章即設般若與方便之辨:「般若此品別而為論,付屬流通方便智慧與方便云何異耶?」〔X24n0451 0345a05〕,其答逕引本論:「論云般若方便無有二物,隨用不同故開二耳。」〔X24n0451 0345a06〕——與本論「般若與方便,本體是一,以所用小異故別說」〔T25 0754c05〕同指,而其喻不同:吉藏作「如金剛與金更無有異,而善巧以金為釧,故有金有釧二事不同也。」〔X24n0451 0345a07〕,本論作「譬如金師以巧方便故,以金作種種異物,雖皆是金,而各異名。」〔T25 0754c06〕——一以釧為器、一以種種異物為器,喻構相值而取象各異,並錄不判。
其二,方便之界與所治之惑——「直觀法無依無得無生無滅,畢竟名實慧,知空而空而於空不證,然度眾生備行諸行名方便也。」〔X24n0451 0345a08〕;其所治者亦逕引本論:「論云直明般若惑生四事:若疑、若耶見也、若入涅槃、若作佛。」〔X24n0451 0345a11〕——與本論「若能生四種事:若疑、若邪見、若入涅槃、若作佛」〔T25 0754c16〕之四事相值,其「耶見」即本論之「邪見」(本論此處底本作「邪」而聖本作「耶」,見下帳第三十一、三十二條;吉藏所據之讀與聖本同系,如實誌錄不判)。
其三,何以付囑——「何故佛付屬流通耶?答:慈悲攝物何俟問耶?」〔X24n0451 0345a16〕,其下更出中道一義:「又上說空破有捨,今何屬破空?欲示中道故付屬也。」〔X24n0451 0345a18〕——與本論「佛欲現中道故囑累:先說諸法空,以遮有邊;今慇懃囑累,則破無邊,是則中道。」〔T25 0755a06〕同指,而本論以之屬「有人言」之一說,吉藏則逕立為答,繫屬有別,如實分記。
其四,何以屬阿難不屬菩薩——「何故不付屬菩薩而屬阿難?阿難是聲聞人,般若是菩薩法也。」〔X24n0451 0345a19〕,答之要在「阿難得總是佛從弟子,又為給侍」〔X24n0451 0345a21〕、「菩薩知般若恩德,自弘宣之,不須付屬。」〔X24n0451 0345b01〕、「阿難是小乘人,不知般若恩,是故佛付屬也。」〔X24n0451 0345b02〕——三義與本論之三語逐條相值——本論初義作「阿難常侍佛左右」〔T25 0754b02〕,次義作「佛又以是諸菩薩深知般若波羅蜜力,不須苦囑累。」〔T25 0754b11〕,三義作「阿難是聲聞人,隨小乘法,是故佛慇懃囑累。」〔T25 0754b12〕,為兩造最密合之一段。
其五,《法華》等經之囑累——「若爾,法華等付屬喜王等菩薩耶?」〔X24n0451 0345b03〕,其答出顯密之辨:「法華明二乘作佛是秘密法,般若是顯現法。」〔X24n0451 0345b03〕,「顯現法易用,秘密法難用。」〔X24n0451 0345b04〕,「小藥師能用藥為藥,大藥師乃用毒作藥也。」〔X24n0451 0345b05〕——本論於同一處作「般若波羅蜜非祕密法。」〔T25 0754b20〕與「譬如大藥師能以毒為藥。」〔T25 0754b22〕,二家之藥喻同源而吉藏增出「小藥師」一造;其下吉藏更出共不共之分:「又有共、不共二般若,不共般若付屬菩薩,共者付聲聞也。」〔X24n0451 0345b05〕——與本論「一者、共聲聞說;二者、但為十方住十地大菩薩說」〔T25 0754b23〕之二種般若相值,而本論不以之配囑累之對象,吉藏配之,二家立義小異,並錄不判。
其六,偈數與結集——「此般若定有幾偈而付屬?答:大般若十萬偈,今萬二千偈也。」〔X24n0451 0345b07〕;本論同段作「〈般若波羅蜜品〉有二萬二千偈,〈大般若品〉有十萬偈」〔T25 0756a28〕——十萬偈之數兩造相合,而本品所屬之偈數本論作二萬二千、吉藏作萬二千,兩造不合,如實誌錄不判。又結集處所:「付阿難般若,何處集耶?答:文殊將阿難結集,未知何處。」〔X24n0451 0345b09〕——吉藏於此自陳「未知何處」,而本論作「文殊尸利、彌勒諸大菩薩亦將阿難集是摩訶衍。」〔T25 0756b15〕,本論多出彌勒一造而亦不出處所。三藏之量:吉藏作「三藏正有三十萬偈,九百九十萬言。」〔X24n0451 0345b11〕,本論作「三藏正有三十萬偈,并為九百六十萬言。」〔T25 0756a26〕——偈數相合而言數不合(九百九十萬/九百六十萬),如實誌錄,不以一造之數校另一造。其收束之理則相值:吉藏「佛非一身說,一世說,無量世已說,豈入三藏小法中?」〔X24n0451 0345b13〕、「又教門名異,大小不同,故結集亦別也。」〔X24n0451 0345b14〕,本論「佛非但一身所說,無量世中或變化作無數身,是故所說無量。」〔T25 0756b05〕、「三藏是聲聞法,摩訶衍是大乘法。」〔T25 0756b23〕。
其七,品之分科——「品為二:初、明付屬流通;二、大眾歡喜奉行。」〔X24n0451 0345b15〕,其初科更三分:「初三:第一、明慇懃付屬,令尊重供養;二、明付屬阿難,令流通不絕;三、明付囑之意也。」〔X24n0451 0345b15〕;其三分之起處自標:「隨爾所時下,第三、付屬意也。以有利深,故付屬耳。」〔X24n0451 0345c06〕、「佛說是經以下,第二、奉行也。」〔X24n0451 0345c08〕——本論無科判之語,此為吉藏所獨出,如實分記。
其八,隨文三釋——釋佛何以問師弟名分:「佛知阿難是弟子,何故今方問耶?答:二義:一、為簡真偽。」〔X24n0451 0345b17〕,「佛有偽弟子,如須那剎多為財寶故,詐為弟子」〔X24n0451 0345b18〕,「又須尸為盜佛法故,作為弟子,是故今問也。」〔X24n0451 0345b20〕,「二者、釋疑。諸外道謂阿難本事外道,著草衣求仙」〔X24n0451 0345b21〕——與本論〔T25 0755a12〕以下之二因緣逐條相值,人名作「須那剎多」「須尸」(本論作「須那剎多羅」「須尸摩」),字數不同而所指同一,如實分記。釋語不過三:「第二、第三者,佛法不過三事,不受佛語便是逆人,金剛神便煞之。」〔X24n0451 0345c01〕,並增一量度之義:「又過多則大,過不足故,但其三也。」〔X24n0451 0345c03〕——與本論「諸佛常法,語不過三。」〔T25 0755b10〕及「復次,若一說,猶緩;過三,太急」〔T25 0755b13〕相值。釋斷種:「人子不能紹繼家業,為斷種人,最為耻。」〔X24n0451 0345c04〕——與本論「世人有子,若不紹繼,則名斷種,最為可恥。」〔T25 0755b20〕逐字相近(「耻/恥」異體)。釋大眾歡喜:「無憂無喜是羅漢功德,尚無不喜云何言大喜?」〔X24n0451 0345c08〕,「羅漢於四諦無疑、於一切法中皆疑,今說般若破其種種疑心,喜也,盡此無餘也。」〔X24n0451 0345c09〕——與本論「是諸大阿羅漢已證實際,無復憂喜,小喜尚無,何況大歡喜!」〔T25 0756a09〕之問、及「雖離三界欲,未得一切智慧故,於諸甚深法中猶疑不了」〔T25 0756a11〕之答相值,兩造於此段最為密合。
慧影《大智度論疏》(X46n0791)·闕釋(惟科判前指)。 慧影疏為釋本論之唯一古疏,僅殘卷存世,其現存文本止於〔X46n0791 0917b12〕(品六十九之中)——本品在其現存範圍之外,記闕釋,非零命中。須特為分記者:該書「囑累」一語二十四見(〔X46n0791 0794b23〕之卷首總目一見,餘二十三見集中於〔X46n0791 0908b23〕至〔X46n0791 0912c13〕之間),其所在為同名之前一〈囑累品〉之疏文及其前後二品之疏文,無一處疏解本品之經論。然其中科判之語數度前指本品,逐字錄之:「次從不盡品已下訖後囑累,有二十四品經文,名為方便道。」〔X46n0791 0909c15〕;「從此品去至曇無竭品,通明方便道義;囑累一品,明其付囑。」〔X46n0791 0912c12〕;「一云二周囑累,為波若與方便二道經文故為二周,不開命說。當此品為生下分一周囑累故,所以此中釋此命說等義也。」〔X46n0791 0908b24〕;又謂若餘處「經名為中囑累品,今此中經只云囑累品」〔X46n0791 0910a01〕。『訖後囑累』『囑累一品』『下分一周囑累』所指皆全經之末品,即本品;『中囑累品』之稱亦與石本品題之綴「後囑累」相對(見第四目);其以二周囑累配波若、方便二道,與本品論段「菩薩道有二種:一者、般若波羅蜜道,二者、方便道。」〔T25 0754b28〕之判相值。凡此皆科判提要,非疏解本品內容,故記『闕釋,惟科判曾前指』,不記零命中(前品〈曇無竭品〉之考據同此處置)。又慧影自數之品序較底本少一:「第六十五品者,名為囑累品」〔X46n0791 0909c13〕、「第六十六品者,名為不盡品。」〔X46n0791 0912c04〕——與聖、石二本之 -1 階同向,順錄為旁證,不判。同名之命中若不逐條讀其文、核其所繫,極易誤植為本品之覆讀證據——此為本品考據之首要陷阱,本目逐條核實後如實誌錄,不以同名之命中充覆讀之數。
均正《大乘四論玄義》(X46n0784)·零命中(如實誌)。 全檔回搜「囑累」零命中。該書為主題式論書(非逐品疏解),於本品無具名引,據實誌錄闕如,非文本範圍問題。
智顗《摩訶止觀》(T46n1911)·《妙法蓮華經玄義》(T33n1716)·《釋禪波羅蜜次第法門》(T46n1916)、湛然《法華玄義釋籤》(T33n1717)·零命中(如實誌)。 四檔全檔獨立回搜「囑累」,皆零命中;另以本品專有之四串(「莫作最後斷種人」「般若波羅蜜在世」「恭敬般若」「究摩羅耆婆」)回搜四檔,亦皆零命中——本品於此四書無明稱之引,候補不登,如實誌錄負結果。
跨文本同名之偽陽性(三檔·逐條攔截·不入承衍)。 「囑累」一語於下列三檔皆有命中,逐條核其所繫之文本後確認全數非本品,以其所繫非本品而攔截,不列入諸家異釋亦不入第七目:
- 《維摩經玄疏》(T38n1777)二見(〔T38 0519b01〕〔T38 0545a27〕)、《維摩經略疏》(T38n1778)九見(〔T38 0563a18〕〔T38 0563a23〕〔T38 0563b23〕〔T38 0563b24〕〔T38 0567a27〕〔T38 0652a04〕〔T38 0706a16〕〔T38 0708a08〕〔T38 0708a13〕)——皆指《維摩詰經》自家之〈囑累品〉(該經第十四品·末品),與本論釋《般若經》之〈囑累品第九十〉為完全不同文本之同名品目。
- 《妙法蓮華經文句》(T34n1718)十七見(首見〔T34 0001c24〕·末見〔T34 0144a11〕)——皆屬《法華經》自家文脈(品名及牒經、科判之通語),無一指本品,同理攔截。
- 《止觀輔行傳弘決》(T46n1912)「囑累」一見〔T46 0165a01〕,其文作「如諸經末受佛囑累發誓弘經」——為泛指諸經末品之通語,非引本品,如實誌錄不充數。
湛然《止觀輔行傳弘決》(T46n1912)·「大論一百」之引非本品(專列·誌錄不判)。 該書「大論一百」一語一見〔T46 0208c18〕,其文作「大論一百云。外書說。此山純黃金色。眾生投中其色無二。」——其所指者為本論卷一百之〔T25 0752b09〕「外書說須彌山一色,純是黃金。」一段,該段在品八十九〈曇無竭品〉範圍之內,非本品(本品起於〔T25 0753c28〕)。卷數雖合而品不合:古德以卷數引論,卷內容多品,不可以卷數逕推所引之品,本目逐字定位其所指後如實分記,不以之充本品之覆讀。
七、互讀與承衍
本品之義脈,前後相承者有六,皆此目所誌,不代定讀。
其一,『囑累』之兩品同名(品六十六/品九十·硬鏈本論自身)。 本論品目之中,「囑累品」凡二:一為品六十六〈釋囑累品第六十六〉、一即本品〈釋囑累品第九十〉。二者品名全同而品身各別、所釋之經段各別。慧影疏之「囑累」命中多在前者之疏,惟科判數語前指本品(見第六目)——同名之命中須逐條讀其文方能分繫。本論「囑累」一語全書六十三見(本品三十八見·計數剝校記與目錄標記),其分佈跨〔T25 0069a27〕至〔T25 0756a21〕之全書,非本品所專有——故「囑累」之為品名,其取捨在科段而不在語之孤見,與品六十二「魔愁」之取名同理。誌其關聯,不判兩品之名孰先。
其二,『見阿閦佛品—漚和拘捨羅品』之品次回指(論主自證)。 論釋本品之囑累與前處之異,自指二品:「先〈見阿閦佛品〉中囑累,今復囑累,有何等異?」〔T25 0754b27〕,並自出二品相次之故:「以是故,〈見阿閦佛〉後,說〈漚和拘捨羅品〉。」〔T25 0754c02〕。「見阿閦佛品」與「漚和拘捨羅品」二語於本論全書各一見,皆在本品(〔T25 0754b27〕〔T25 0754c03〕),本目逐串重掃所得——即論主唯於此一處回指前二品,以立般若道/方便道之分(見第二目)。前處囑累說般若之體,本品囑累說般若之用,品次相生,誌其承。
其三,『喜王·不可思議解脫』之他經旁引。 論釋《法華》等經何以囑累菩薩,旁引二事:「若爾者,《法華經》、諸餘方等經,何以囑累喜王諸菩薩等?」〔T25 0754b13〕與「五百阿羅漢雖在佛邊而不聞,或時得聞而不能用。」〔T25 0754b16〕。「喜王」一語於本論全書一見,即此處;「不可思議解脫經」六見(〔T25 0303b24〕〔T25 0308b11〕〔T25 0308b15〕〔T25 0576c25〕〔T25 0754b16〕〔T25 0756b07〕),本品二見——其第二見在末番問答所列之大經目中。誌其關聯,不代定讀。
其四,『序—跋』之全論首尾相扣(最顯之一條)。 本品末段譯場跋文〔T25 0756c09〕與本論卷首之〈摩訶般若波羅蜜經釋論序〉〔T25 0057a03〕(長安釋僧叡述)為全論兩端,其所記之事逐項相扣:
- 至長安之年月日——跋作「究摩羅耆婆法師,以秦弘始三年歲在辛丑十二月二十日至長安」〔T25 0756c09〕,序作「以秦弘始三年,歲次星紀,十二月二十日,自姑臧至長安。」〔T25 0057a27〕:年、月、日全合,其紀年之法一作「歲在辛丑」一作「歲次星紀」,並錄不判;序多出「自姑臧」三字之所從來。
- 譯場之地——跋作「四年夏,於逍遙園中西門閣上為姚天王出此釋論」〔T25 0756c10〕,序作「集於渭濱逍遙園堂」〔T25 0057b05〕:「逍遙園」一語於本論全書二見,即此二處,本目逐串重掃所得。
- 成書之卷數——跋作「得此百卷,若盡出之,將十倍於此。」〔T25 0756c17〕,序作「三分除二,得此百卷。」〔T25 0057b10〕:「得此百卷」四字於本論全書二見,即此二處;跋以「十倍於此」言其所略,序以「三分除二」言其所除,兩造之量詞不同,如實誌錄不強解。
- 書之自名——跋作「出此釋論」〔T25 0756c11〕,序作「經本既定,乃出此釋論」〔T25 0057b08〕:「此釋論」之自名兩端一致。 一部百卷之論,以僧叡之序起、以譯場之跋收,其所記為同一事之兩端;跋文非教義命題而其位在全論之末,如實誌錄其為譯事之記,不與論義相混(見第一目、第二目「釋論·具本·略本」條)。
其五,『疏亦止於此品』之兩造同收(吉藏)。 吉藏《大品經義疏》之本品疏起〔X24n0451 0345a04〕,其後更無次品,全書收於「大品經義疏卷第十」〔X24n0451 0345c13〕一題(其「終」字於底本作夾註,附題之末,如實分記)。其下〔X24n0451 0345c17〕至〔X24n0451 0345c20〕為寫本抄寫者之跋——「嘉元三年二月下旬候,以東南院古本終,交合切了」〔X24n0451 0345c17〕,「但彼本第二、第四欠之,間至第四卷者,以真禪院本補之」〔X24n0451 0345c18〕,「第二卷者,兩本共欠,迄尋他本,可書續者也。」〔X24n0451 0345c19〕——此跋所記為寫本傳鈔之事(所據古本之終、第二第四卷之欠、以他本補配),屬寫本層而非疏義,如實誌錄,不與吉藏之疏語相混。本論之末品、所釋經之末品、吉藏疏之末品三者收束於同一品,其中本論之末繫譯場之跋、疏本之末繫寫本之跋,所釋經則自「皆大歡喜」〔T08 0424a13〕直接卷尾題而無跋,如實誌錄此一並見,不引為一事。
其六,寶庫掛鏈(穩定徵引·軟引)。 本品「以般若波羅蜜囑累汝」之付囑、「愛敬、供養般若波羅蜜」如愛敬佛之訓、「有般若在世,則為佛在」之判、「莫作最後斷種人」之誡、與「著心故鬪諍」乃名滅般若之界,為後世論法之住世、論持經流通、論敬法如敬佛之所本,落穩定徵引〔T25n1509 囑累品·卷一百〕;諸帙引本論處尚未定稿,故軟引,俟其逐字核存。此屬般若義下貫住持門之承衍,誌錄不判。
八、校本與版本說明
本品底本為《大智度論》卷一百〔T25 0753c28–0756c19〕(品身正文自品題〔T25 0753c28〕起,終於卷尾題「大智度論卷第一百」〔T25 0756c19〕;其後無次品品題,本品範圍含全論卷尾題);所釋經校本為《摩訶般若波羅蜜經》〈囑累品〉〔T08 0423c21–0424a14〕;古德疏校本為吉藏《大品經義疏》(X24n0451,覆所釋經〔X24n0451 0345a04–0345c20〕,含寫本跋)。慧影《大智度論疏》(X46n0791)本品闕釋(惟科判前指)、均正《大乘四論玄義》(X46n0784)零命中、智顗諸書及《釋籤》零命中(見第六目)。異讀校記依大正校勘,涉大正底本與宋、元、明、宮、聖、石(石山寺本)諸本及 CBETA 校之異——本品八十一條之帳內未見聖乙本、麗本、磧本入帳,所見之 witness 唯【大】【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】【石】【CB】八造。
品題與卷尾題之校記(品名網與 -1 階之底據·入帳·專列並析)。 與品六十二不同,本品之品題校記與卷尾題校記皆為品內成對之異讀條,逐條入八十一條之帳(下帳第一、二、八十、八十一條),非旁列。品題條之校記原文:「大智度論釋囑累品第九十【大】,(釋八十九品)六字【聖】,摩訶般若波羅蜜品第八十九後囑累【石】,〔大智度論〕-【明】」。其中聖本一造校記自記「六字」,而所錄「釋八十九品」實五字——原記之數與所錄不合,如實並存,不代判;石本一造帶其經題式全銜;明本一造記作「〔大智度論〕-」,所刪者為「大智度論」四字。此條之異讀另有展開之文一層:聖本逕作「釋八十九品」而不帶字數之記,明本逕出刪後之全題「釋囑累品第九十」——與校記字面不同,下帳依校記錄,展開之文之異於此誌之。卷尾題條之校記原文:「大智度論卷第一百【大】,大智度經論卷第一百釋第八十八品下訖第八十九品【聖】,釋八十九品竟大智度經卷一百【石】」。兩條互證聖、石二本之 -1 階於全論首尾兩端一貫(析論見第四目)。又品題條之內另嵌一條(下帳第二條「第九十【大】|第九十品【宮】」)、卷尾題條之內亦另嵌一條(下帳第八十一條「論【大】|論釋【宋】【元】【宮】」)——兩處皆為大條之內套小條之型,逐條分立入帳,不合併計數。
交叉引照記三枚(專列·三枚一體皆列)。 本品範圍內帶交叉引照之異讀條三處,其型完全同款——皆各有其成對之異讀條、皆以引照指回本品之定義條、皆與所指之條同文,故三枚一體,逐枚各立條入帳:
- 〔T25 0754c18〕「邪」字——所指為本品〔T25 0754c17〕之條(下帳第三十一條),品內自共用;另立一條(下帳第三十二條)。
- 〔T25 0755b12〕「剛」字——所指為本品〔T25 0755b11〕之條(下帳第四十四條),品內自共用;另立一條(下帳第四十六條)。
- 〔T25 0756c09〕「婆」字——所指為本品〔T25 0756c06〕之條(下帳第六十六條),品內自共用;另立一條(下帳第七十條)。 三枚既各立一條,本品異讀條之總數為八十一。帳內帶交叉引照記號之條凡七:除上三枚所立之三條外,餘四條——其中三條(下帳第三十一、四十四、六十六條)即上列三枚之定義端;餘一條(下帳第九條「犍」)之記號,其另一端〔查無〕:本論全書無一處引照指回此條,原樣保留其記號,不補不刪。
編校兩層之差(頓號一處·顯式並存)。 〔T25 0754a12〕一條,底本正文之被校字帶一頓號而作「讀、誦」,其校記則不帶頓號而作「讀誦」——兩層之字面不同。本目下列依校記之原文錄作「讀誦【大】」,而正文之讀者面仍從底本現行標點作「受持、讀、誦」,兩層之差顯式標出,不以一層改另一層(同型之對讀見第四目)。
CBETA 校訂層二條(非傳統諸本並陳型·專列)。 〔T25 0754a24〕(下帳第十六條)與〔T25 0755b11〕(下帳第四十四條)兩條,其型皆為:CBETA 據宮、聖、石三本校訂底本【大】之「鋼」為「剛」(「金剛三昧」「執金剛神」),故其首造作「剛【CB】【宮】【聖】【石】」而【大】造作「鋼」。此二條之首造並非另一寫本,而是現代校訂層之定讀;其原條之內另帶字形溯源之對讀附註(前者指向 X21n0383_p0652a13、後者指向 T25n1509_p0575b15),屬編輯層之附註而非底本字元,本目不錄入條文,於此專列誌之。本版讀者面從 CBETA 現行文本讀法作「剛」。
義理負載之增文二條(專列)。 其一,〔T25 0754a27〕(下帳第十七條)「持【大】|持是般若【聖】【石】」——聖、石二本於「汝當好受持無令忘失」之「持」下增「是般若」三字,其所補者正是所囑之物,屬義理負載之增文,如實誌錄。其二,〔T25 0755b28〕(下帳第五十一條)「若【大】|若波羅蜜【石】」——石本於「般若」下增「波羅蜜」三字,屬名相之足成,非義之異。二者皆不改本版讀法。
校勘總帳(八十一條全量對帳·一律依校記原文·條內各造以|分隔)。 下依出現序全量列之,內含交叉引照條三(下帳第三十二、四十六、七十條),隨條標明其所指。異本讀法並列保存,正文仍從現行底本讀法:
異讀條(八十一·出現序·交叉引照記隨條標明)
- 〔T25 0753c28〕大智度論釋囑累品第九十【大】|(釋八十九品)六字【聖】|摩訶般若波羅蜜品第八十九後囑累【石】|〔大智度論〕-【明】(品題條·聖石 -1 階之第一端·聖本原記六字而所錄五字·明本刪「大智度論」四字·展開之文之異見上專列·見第四目)
- 〔T25 0753c28〕第九十【大】|第九十品【宮】(嵌於品題條之內·純用字差異)
- 〔T25 0753c29〕【經】【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【宮】(結構標記存否條)
- 〔T25 0754a01〕阿難【大】|阿難報【聖】【石】
- 〔T25 0754a02〕陀【大】|他【聖】(脩伽陀/脩伽他)
- 〔T25 0754a06〕常【大】|〔-〕【聖】
- 〔T25 0754a09〕汝【大】|〔-〕【聖】【石】
- 〔T25 0754a12〕讀誦【大】|誦讀【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】(正文之被校字帶頓號作「讀、誦」·編校兩層之差見上專列·所釋經同位有同型異讀·見第四目)
- 〔T25 0754a16〕犍【大】*|揵【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】*(帶交叉引照記·五本之讀正是所釋經底本之讀·見第四目)
- 〔T25 0754a16〕隷【大】|羅【石】(富樓那彌多隷耶尼子·石本之讀近所釋經·見第四目)
- 〔T25 0754a16〕耶【大】|〔-〕【聖】【石】(同上條合成「彌多羅尼子」)
- 〔T25 0754a17〕俱【大】|拘【聖】【石】(摩訶俱絺羅/摩訶拘絺羅·聖石之讀合所釋經底本)
- 〔T25 0754a17〕摩訶【大】|大【聖】【石】(摩訶迦旃延/大迦旃延·與所釋經校記成鏡像·見第四目)
- 〔T25 0754a18〕犍【大】|乾【聖】【石】(犍闥婆·所釋經同位亦有「乾」造·見第四目)
- 〔T25 0754a20〕【論】【大】|〔-〕【宋】【宮】(結構標記存否條)
- 〔T25 0754a24〕剛【CB】【宮】【聖】【石】|鋼【大】(CBETA 校訂層·金剛三昧·原條另帶字形溯源附註不入條文·見上專列)
- 〔T25 0754a27〕持【大】|持是般若【聖】【石】(義理負載之增文·見上專列)
- 〔T25 0754b03〕給【大】|養【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0754b04〕弟【大】|第【石】
- 〔T25 0754b09〕至隨【大】|隨至【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0754b11〕佛【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0754b11〕以【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0754b12〕苦【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0754b19〕而【大】|而有【聖】
- 〔T25 0754b20〕密【大】|蜜【宮】【聖】(祕密/祕蜜)
- 〔T25 0754b24〕住【大】|地【聖】【石】(住十地/地十地)
- 〔T25 0754c03〕拘捨羅【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】(漚和拘捨羅品·四本省其半名)
- 〔T25 0754c04〕中【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】
- 〔T25 0754c04〕波羅蜜【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】
- 〔T25 0754c05〕小【大】|小乘【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0754c17〕邪【大】*|耶【聖】*(交叉引照之定義端·邪見/耶見·吉藏所據之讀與聖本同系·見第六目)
- 〔T25 0754c18〕邪【大】*|耶【聖】*(交叉引照條·所指=本品〔T25 0754c17〕之條·品內自共用)
- 〔T25 0754c21〕尚【大】|當【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0754c23〕導【大】|道【石】
- 〔T25 0754c23〕估【大】|賈【元】【明】(估客主/賈客主)
- 〔T25 0754c24〕偏【大】|遍【宮】
- 〔T25 0755a04〕中【大】|中受【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0755a08〕以【大】|已【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0755a13〕作【大】|作佛【聖】【石】
- 〔T25 0755a25〕懃勞【大】|勞懃【石】
- 〔T25 0755b01〕實【大】|寶【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0755b04〕大【大】|丈【聖】(大光明/丈光明)
- 〔T25 0755b04〕明【大】|〔-〕【聖】【石】
- 〔T25 0755b11〕剛【CB】【宮】【聖】【石】*|鋼【大】*(CBETA 校訂層·執金剛神·帶交叉引照記·原條另帶字形溯源附註不入條文·見上專列)
- 〔T25 0755b11〕則【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0755b12〕剛【CB】【宮】【聖】【石】*|鋼【大】*(交叉引照條·所指=本品〔T25 0755b11〕之條·品內自共用·CBETA 校訂層·執金剛神)
- 〔T25 0755b13〕殺【大】|亟【宋】【宮】|殛【元】【明】(三造並陳)
- 〔T25 0755b14〕太【大】|大【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【石】
- 〔T25 0755b27〕人【大】|夫【聖】(凡人/凡夫)
- 〔T25 0755b28〕聞【大】|問【聖】
- 〔T25 0755b28〕若【大】|若波羅蜜【石】(名相足成·見上專列)
- 〔T25 0755c02〕鬪【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0755c11〕世【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】【石】(六本俱無·本品缺字造最廣之一條)
- 〔T25 0755c16〕在世【大】|世在【聖】
- 〔T25 0756a10〕歡【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0756b03〕不【大】|無【聖】
- 〔T25 0756b06〕作【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】|身【石】(三造並陳)
- 〔T25 0756b07〕寶【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】|法【聖】(三造並陳·寶雲經/法雲經之名相涉下條)
- 〔T25 0756b08〕法雲經【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】(四本無此經名·與上條並觀·大經目之造有廣狹)
- 〔T25 0756b19〕味【大】|門【宋】【元】【明】【宮】|聞【聖】(三造並陳·解脫味/解脫門)
- 〔T25 0756b21〕俱【大】|但【聖】
- 〔T25 0756b26〕鋡【大】|含【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【石】(四阿鋡/四阿含)
- 〔T25 0756b29〕是【大】|是語【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0756c02〕是【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0756c04〕泥【大】|尼【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【石】(罽賓國毘泥/毘尼·本論同段「毘尼」「毘泥」兩形並見·見第二目)
- 〔T25 0756c06〕婆【大】*|波【聖】*(交叉引照之定義端·毘婆沙/毘波沙)
- 〔T25 0756c07〕經【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0756c07〕大【大】|本【聖】
- 〔T25 0756c09〕究【大】|鳩【宋】【元】【明】【宮】(究摩羅耆婆/鳩摩羅耆婆·譯場跋文之首·四本之讀合論首序之常稱)
- 〔T25 0756c09〕婆【大】*|波【聖】*(交叉引照條·所指=本品〔T25 0756c06〕之條·品內自共用)
- 〔T25 0756c10〕長【大】|常【宮】【聖】(至長安/至常安·同型之異亦見論首序之校記)
- 〔T25 0756c10〕夏【大】|邊【聖】(四年夏/四年邊)
- 〔T25 0756c11〕園【大】|薗【石】(逍遙園·異體)
- 〔T25 0756c12〕釋【大】|釋此釋【聖】
- 〔T25 0756c14〕品【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0756c15〕論【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0756c15〕具【大】|其【宋】【元】【明】【聖】【石】|〔-〕【宮】(三造並陳·全論具本/全論其本·「具本」一語之底據唯【大】一造,餘六本皆不作「具」——本品之義理負載最重之一條,如實誌錄不判)
- 〔T25 0756c15〕本【大】|論本【石】
- 〔T25 0756c16〕足【大】|要足【聖】
- 〔T25 0756c19〕大智度論卷第一百【大】|大智度經論卷第一百釋第八十八品下訖第八十九品【聖】|釋八十九品竟大智度經卷一百【石】(卷尾題條·聖石 -1 階之第二端·聖本並出其所釋之品域·見第四目)
- 〔T25 0756c19〕論【大】|論釋【宋】【元】【宮】(嵌於卷尾題條之內)
所釋經 witness 對讀(已展開九處·餘逐條並錄未展開·誌闕待補)。 所釋經 T223 側本品對讀範圍〔T08 0423c21–0424a14〕內,逐條掃得編號條七(〔T08 0423c27〕〔T08 0424a02〕×二〔T08 0424a04〕〔T08 0424a11〕〔T08 0424a12〕〔T08 0424a14〕)、交叉引照記一枚(〔T08 0424a05〕·所指為〔T08 0423c17〕之條·跨品共用),其品題處無校記——此為兩造品名全同之直接佐證(見第四目)。其與本論互印之九處異文(脩伽陀/修伽陀·汝莫忘莫失/汝莫忘失·常親近佛/為常親近佛·慧命舍利弗·大目犍連/大目揵連·彌多隷耶尼子/彌多羅尼子·摩訶俱絺羅/摩訶拘絺羅·摩訶迦旃延/大迦旃延·犍闥婆/揵闥婆)已逐條誌於第四目,其中一處(摩訶迦旃延/大迦旃延)兩造皆有校記而成鏡像。所釋經側另一條〔T08 0424a14〕為卷次之異(二十七/三十/四十),已誌於第四目。餘條之逐條並錄未展開,據實誌其未展開,待後續補查,不以估值充數。
I. Structural Placement
Within the sequence in which the Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa comments on the Larger Sūtra, this chapter belongs to the section of the "Commentary on the Remaining Chapters"; it is the very last chapter of the whole treatise, lying wholly within Fascicle 100, as a single unit. Fascicle 100 begins at〔T25 0750b20〕, and what its fascicle-head title is tied to is still the preceding chapter—「大智度論釋曇無竭品第八十九」 tr. "Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa, Commentary on the Chapter on Dharmodgata, the Eighty-ninth"〔T25 0750b20〕—and immediately below it come the two lines of the author's signature and the translator's signature, 「龍樹菩薩造」 tr. "Composed by the Bodhisattva Nāgārjuna" and 「後秦龜茲國三藏鳩摩羅什譯」 tr. "Translated by Kumārajīva, Tripiṭaka master of Kucha, in the Later Qin". This chapter's title, 「大智度論釋囑累品第九十」 tr. "Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa, Commentary on the Chapter on Entrustment, the Ninetieth"〔T25 0753c28〕, follows straight on from the end of the preceding chapter, "Dharmodgata", Chapter 89, and at the head of the chapter there is no fascicle title and no author's or translator's signature (these two are seen only at the head of each fascicle; this chapter begins in the middle of Fascicle 100, so they are not repeated). The body of the chapter ends with the fascicle-end title 「大智度論卷第一百」 tr. "Fascicle 100 of the Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa ends here."〔T25 0756c19〕, and after it there is no title of a next chapter—the list of the treatise's chapters ends here. Hence this chapter is of the type placed at the end of the fascicle · the chapter's end is the fascicle's end and the end of the whole treatise: it differs from Chapter 62, "Training Alike", which lies within the fascicle without touching a fascicle boundary, and differs from the fascicle-spanning type of Chapter 48, "The Mother of the Buddhas"; it is of the same type as Chapter 53, "Tending toward Omniscience", with its ‘placed at the end of the fascicle · the chapter's end tied to the fascicle-end’, yet it goes one layer further—after that chapter's fascicle-end there are still a next fascicle and a next chapter, whereas after this chapter's fascicle-end there is not one character more.
The whole chapter has four thousand and forty-nine pure Chinese characters (a mechanically recounted value), and it is a chapter of middling size within the "Commentary on the Remaining Chapters". The structure within the chapter is one 【經】 and one 【論】, a single unit: 【經】〔T25 0753c29〕 and 【論】〔T25 0754a20〕. The 【經】 marker has a collation note: the Song, Yuan, and Palace texts lack this structural marker; the 【論】 marker too has a collation note: the Song and Palace texts lack it (entries three and fifteen of the ledger below)—whether a marker is present belongs to the layer of the base text's transmission, and the structural count still follows the base text's labels.
The speaker structure: in Sūtra ① there are throughout only two people, the Buddha and Ānanda, and the three changes of speaker are all explicitly marked—〔T25 0753c29〕 「爾時,佛告阿難」 tr. "At that time the Buddha told Ānanda" (the Buddha begins to speak, asking back about the standing of teacher and disciple), 〔T25 0754a01〕 「阿難言」 tr. "Ānanda said" (Ānanda answers), and 〔T25 0754a02〕 「佛言」 tr. "The Buddha said" (the Buddha approves his answer and entrusts prajñā); below them the passage from〔T25 0754a14〕, 「佛說般若波羅蜜已」 tr. "When the Buddha had finished teaching prajñāpāramitā", is a narrative close, which lists the names of the great assembly and closes with 「聞佛所說,皆大歡喜。」 tr. "hearing what the Buddha said, all greatly rejoiced."〔T25 0754a19〕; it has no speaker and is not dialogue, and is recorded separately, as it is.
Treatise ① starts directly with question and answer, with no marker 「釋曰」 tr. "the explanation says" to open the treatise. The formal questions and answers are fourteen pairs, and the positions of their question and answer labels are as follows: 〔T25 0754a20〕 / 〔T25 0754a22〕, 〔T25 0754a29〕 / 〔T25 0754b02〕, 〔T25 0754b13〕 / 〔T25 0754b14〕, 〔T25 0754b18〕 / 〔T25 0754b20〕, 〔T25 0754b27〕 / 〔T25 0754b28〕, 〔T25 0754c21〕 / 〔T25 0754c22〕, 〔T25 0755a10〕 / 〔T25 0755a12〕, 〔T25 0755a28〕 / 〔T25 0755a29〕, 〔T25 0755b08〕 / 〔T25 0755b08〕 (question and answer following immediately on the same line), 〔T25 0755b09〕 / 〔T25 0755b10〕, 〔T25 0755b22〕 / 〔T25 0755b24〕, 〔T25 0755c18〕 / 〔T25 0755c20〕, 〔T25 0756a09〕 / 〔T25 0756a11〕, 〔T25 0756a21〕 / 〔T25 0756a23〕. The form 「有人言」 tr. "someone says" or 「復有人言」 tr. "again someone says" is seen six times (〔T25 0754b02〕〔T25 0754b14〕〔T25 0754c19〕〔T25 0755a01〕〔T25 0755a06〕〔T25 0756b14〕, not counted among the pairs of question and answer); the supplementary meaning of the form 「復次」 tr. "furthermore" is seen nine times (〔T25 0754b22〕〔T25 0754c14〕〔T25 0754c27〕〔T25 0755b03〕〔T25 0755b13〕〔T25 0755b14〕〔T25 0756a14〕〔T25 0756a26〕〔T25 0756b24〕; the 「復次,有人言」 tr. "furthermore, someone says" at〔T25 0756b14〕 has already entered the preceding column and is not counted again).
Within the treatise section, the treatise-author, in the sentence pattern 「佛告阿難:『……』」 tr. "The Buddha told Ānanda: ‘……’", re-quotes the sūtra text in five places—〔T25 0755a21〕〔T25 0755a26〕〔T25 0755b02〕〔T25 0755b07〕〔T25 0755c03〕. These five places are all the treatise-author returning to quote the words of the sūtra in order to unfold his explanation; they are tied to the treatise-author's narration and do not begin a separate sūtra segment, and are recorded separately, as they are (the same practice as the restatements of 「佛告阿難」 tr. "the Buddha told Ānanda" in the treatise section of Chapter 62).
The colophon of the translation hall from〔T25 0756c09〕 in the last passage belongs to a historical record and not to a doctrinal proposition, and its style is wholly different from all that precedes it; this section nevertheless lists it character by character, without summarising (for its doctrinal placement see Section VII).
II. Terms Examined
Entrustment. The general name of the whole chapter. Its sūtra proof lies in the Buddha's words: 「乃至第二、第三,以般若波羅蜜囑累汝。」 tr. "And so on up to a second time and a third time, I entrust prajñāpāramitā to you."〔T25 0754a08〕. The word 「囑累」 tr. "entrust" is seen sixty-three times in the whole of this treatise, thirty-eight of them in this chapter (obtained by this section's rescanning of the stream of Chinese characters · the count strips out collation notes and table-of-contents markers); the reason this chapter alone takes its name from it lies in its being the closing entrustment of the whole treatise—the treatise itself explains why: 「所以囑累者,為不令法滅故。」 tr. "The reason for entrusting it is so as not to let the Dharma be extinguished."〔T25 0755b17〕. The matter of entrustment is not first made in this chapter: the treatise-author himself points back to an earlier passage, 「先〈見阿閦佛品〉中囑累,今復囑累,有何等異?」 tr. "Earlier, in the chapter ‘Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha’, he entrusted it; now he entrusts it again—what difference is there?"〔T25 0754b27〕, from which it can be known that the entrustment of prajñā is made in two places, an earlier and a later; and as for this chapter's entrustment, the treatise judges its distinction to lie in which path it belongs to (see the entry 「般若道·方便道」 tr. "the path of prajñā · the path of skilful means" below). Further, 「囑累」 tr. "Entrustment" and Chapter 66, likewise named "Entrustment", are two different chapters of the same name, each with its own chapter body, and they must not be confused (see Section VII).
Great teacher · disciple. The opening of the sūtra does not speak of prajñā; it first establishes the standing of teacher and disciple. The Buddha asks: 「佛是汝大師不?汝是佛弟子不?」 tr. "Is the Buddha your great teacher? Are you the Buddha's disciple?"〔T25 0753c29〕; Ānanda answers: 「世尊!佛是我大師,脩伽陀是我大師,我是佛弟子。」 tr. "World-Honored One! The Buddha is my great teacher, the Sugata is my great teacher; I am the Buddha's disciple."〔T25 0754a01〕; the Buddha confirms it, saying: 「我是汝大師,汝是我弟子。」 tr. "I am your great teacher; you are my disciple."〔T25 0754a03〕. The treatise explains that this question is not set up idly, and gives two causes and conditions for it. The first is guarding against the false—「佛有惡弟子須那剎多羅等,有少因緣故作弟子,欲於佛所取射法」 tr. "The Buddha had evil disciples, Sunakṣatra and others, who became disciples for some scant causes and conditions, wishing to obtain archery at the Buddha's place"〔T25 0755a12〕, 「又如須尸摩為盜法故作弟子。如是等,是名字弟子。」 tr. "And again, as Susīma became a disciple in order to steal the Dharma. Such as these are named disciples in name."〔T25 0755a15〕; the second is resolving a doubt—「阿難曾作外道弟子,著草衣,求神仙;今以佛是其親族,尊重故給侍。」 tr. "Ānanda was once a disciple of the outside paths, wearing grass robes and seeking the spirit-immortals; now, because the Buddha is his kinsman, he attends on him out of respect."〔T25 0755a17〕. Hence the real meaning of this question lies in 「若言是真弟子,當隨我勅。」 tr. "If you say you are a true disciple, you should follow my command."〔T25 0755a20〕—once the standing is settled, the entrustment has something to be tied to. 「須那剎多羅」 tr. "Sunakṣatra" is seen twice in the whole of this treatise (〔T25 0303b16〕〔T25 0755a12〕), and 「須尸摩」 tr. "Susīma" three times (〔T25 0233c04〕〔T25 0620b28〕〔T25 0755a15〕); each is seen once in this chapter.
The dharma of a disciple. The boundary the treatise sets out for how teacher and disciple stand toward each other: 「弟子法者,所謂以善身、口、意業供給師。」 tr. "The dharma of a disciple is to provide for the teacher with wholesome deeds of body, speech, and mind."〔T25 0755a22〕, and its fullness lies in 「不惜身命、不難懃勞,自捨其心,隨師教勅」 tr. "not sparing body and life, not counting diligent toil as hard, abandoning his own intentions and following the teacher's command"〔T25 0755a25〕. What the sūtra text confirms is precisely these three kinds of deed—「汝用身、口、意慈業供養供給我,亦常如我意,無有違失。」 tr. "You have made offerings to me and provided for me with deeds of kindness of body, speech, and mind, and always accorded with my mind, without fault or failing."〔T25 0754a04〕.
The path of prajñā · the path of skilful means. The pivot of this chapter's meaning; the treatise uses it to distinguish the entrustments of the two places: 「菩薩道有二種:一者、般若波羅蜜道,二者、方便道。」 tr. "The bodhisattva path is of two kinds: first, the path of prajñāpāramitā; second, the path of skilful means."〔T25 0754b28〕, 「先囑累者,為說般若波羅蜜體竟;今以說令眾生得是般若方便竟,囑累。」 tr. "The earlier entrustment was because the teaching of the substance of prajñāpāramitā had been completed; now he entrusts it because the teaching of the skilful means by which beings are brought to obtain this prajñā has been completed."〔T25 0754b29〕. As to the border between the two, the treatise states plainly that they are not two things: 「般若與方便,本體是一,以所用小異故別說」 tr. "prajñā and skilful means are one in their original substance; because there is a small difference in what they are used for, they are spoken of separately"〔T25 0754c05〕. For the boundary of skilful means the treatise gives two meanings. The first lies in not taking the realisation—「一切法性空,涅槃亦空,我今於菩薩功德未具足,不應取證」 tr. "The nature of all dharmas is empty, and nirvāṇa too is empty; I have not yet made complete the merit of a bodhisattva, and should not take the realisation"〔T25 0754c10〕, 「住菩薩位中,知甚深微妙無文字法,引導眾生,是名方便。」 tr. "Abiding in the bodhisattva's position, knowing the very deep and subtle dharma without letters, and guiding beings—this is named skilful means."〔T25 0754c13〕; the second lies in removing wrong views and doubt—「若能生四種事:若疑、若邪見、若入涅槃、若作佛」 tr. "It can give rise to four kinds of matter: doubt, wrong view, entering nirvāṇa, or becoming a Buddha"〔T25 0754c16〕, 「若能除邪、疑,不入涅槃,是為方便。」 tr. "If one can remove wrong views and doubt, and does not enter nirvāṇa, this is skilful means."〔T25 0754c18〕. Jizang too, in explaining this chapter, opens it with the distinction between prajñā and skilful means; his account meets this one, though the simile differs (see Section VI).
The person who cuts off the lineage. The sūtra's words of warning: 「阿難!汝莫忘莫失,莫作最後斷種人!」 tr. "Ānanda! Do not forget it, do not lose it, do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage!"〔T25 0754a09〕. The treatise explains the expression from worldly usage: 「世人有子,若不紹繼,則名斷種,最為可恥。」 tr. "When people of the world have sons, if they do not continue the line, it is named cutting off the lineage, the greatest shame."〔T25 0755b20〕, and gathers it back to prajñā: 「汝莫於汝身上令般若斷絕!」 tr. "Do not let prajñā be cut off in your own person!"〔T25 0755b21〕. The five Chinese characters 「最後斷種人」 tr. "the last person who cuts off the lineage" are seen twice in the whole of this treatise, namely in the sūtra text〔T25 0754a09〕 and in the treatise's explanation〔T25 0755b19〕, both in this chapter—this expression belongs to this chapter alone, as obtained by this section's character-by-character rescanning.
Extinguishing prajñā. The item in this chapter most easily misread; the treatise brings it out by setting itself a difficulty. The difficulty says: prajñā is 「說亦不增、不說亦不減,畢竟寂滅相」 tr. "not increased by being taught, nor decreased by not being taught, having the mark of ultimate quiescent extinction"〔T25 0755b22〕, so 「譬如虛空,誰能滅者?」 tr. "Like space, who could extinguish it?"〔T25 0755b24〕. The treatise's answer goes by two roads. First, what is meant by not letting it be extinguished refers to the circulation of the written word—「而文字語言書般若波羅蜜經卷,為他人說,是此中般若,於此因中而說其果。」 tr. "And the scrolls of the prajñāpāramitā sūtra written in letters and words, taught to others, are the prajñā here; its result is spoken of within this cause."〔T25 0755b26〕; second, what is truly called extinguishing refers to the clinging and discriminating mind—「凡人聞般若波羅蜜微妙,即生著心,取般若相,分別諸法」 tr. "Ordinary people, hearing that prajñāpāramitā is subtle, at once give rise to a clinging mind, grasp at the mark of prajñā, and discriminate dharmas"〔T25 0755b27〕, 「以分別故,於是法中生著心,著心故鬪諍,鬪諍故起諸罪業」 tr. "because of discriminating, within this dharma they give rise to a clinging mind; because of the clinging mind, fighting and strife; because of fighting and strife, they raise up all sinful deeds"〔T25 0755c01〕, 「如是人名為滅般若波羅蜜。」 tr. "Such people are named those who extinguish prajñāpāramitā."〔T25 0755c02〕. Hence the dharma of not extinguishing lies just here: 「汝當如般若波羅蜜相,莫著文字語言,教化眾生。」 tr. "You should, in accordance with the mark of prajñāpāramitā, not cling to letters and words, and teach and transform beings."〔T25 0755c03〕, 「是名不滅。」 tr. "This is called not extinguishing."〔T25 0755c04〕.
Prajñā in the world · the Buddha in the world. This chapter's summing-up admonition. The sūtra: 「隨爾所時般若波羅蜜在世,當知爾所時有佛在世說法。」 tr. "For however long a time prajñāpāramitā is in the world, know that for so long a time there is a Buddha in the world teaching the Dharma."〔T25 0754a10〕; the treatise quotes it again and explains it: 「有般若在世,則為佛在」 tr. "when there is prajñā in the world, the Buddha is present"〔T25 0755c07〕, and the reasons for this are two—first, 「般若波羅蜜是諸佛母,諸佛以法為師。」 tr. "Prajñāpāramitā is the mother of the buddhas; the buddhas take the Dharma as their teacher."〔T25 0755c08〕, 「若師在、母在,不名為失利。」 tr. "If the teacher is present and the mother is present, it is not named losing the benefit."〔T25 0755c09〕; second, 「又法寶不離佛寶。」 tr. "Again, the Dharma Jewel is not apart from the Buddha Jewel."〔T25 0755c11〕, 「菩薩有三十二相、八十隨形好,不名為佛,得法寶故名為佛。」 tr. "A bodhisattva with the thirty-two marks and the eighty minor marks is not named Buddha; because he obtains the Dharma Jewel he is named Buddha."〔T25 0755c12〕, and therefore 「是故說般若在世,如佛在世,說法無異。」 tr. "Therefore it is said that prajñā being in the world is like the Buddha being in the world, teaching the Dharma with no difference."〔T25 0755c16〕. The expression 「般若波羅蜜是諸佛母」 tr. "prajñāpāramitā is the mother of the buddhas" is seen four times in the whole of this treatise (〔T25 0314a21〕〔T25 0549b07〕〔T25 0550a28〕〔T25 0755c08〕), once in this chapter.
True hearing. The treatise explains why people of heavy sin who hear prajñā can also be not apart from seeing the Buddha; its criterion lies not in the act of hearing but in the mind that receives: 「一者、但聽而不信受行,二者、聽而信受奉行。」 tr. "First, those who only hear and do not believe, receive, and practise; second, those who hear and believe, receive, and carry it out."〔T25 0755c22〕, 「若以一心聽聞,信受奉行,厭世、愛涅槃,離小乘、樂大乘——作如是聽受,是名真聽。」 tr. "If one hears with one mind, believes, receives, and carries it out, grows weary of the world and loves nirvāṇa, leaves the Small Vehicle and delights in the Great Vehicle—to hear and receive thus is named true hearing."〔T25 0755c24〕. Continuous with it is the instruction on right recollection: 「正憶念,隨如佛意,離有無二邊,行於中道。」 tr. "Rightly recollect, following the Buddha's intent, parting from the two extremes of existence and non-existence, and practising the middle way."〔T25 0755c26〕—right recollection is the practice of the middle way, not what is meant by memorising and reciting.
Mahāyāna · the three baskets. The key item of the final round of question and answer. In answering why the compilation did not include the Mahāyāna, the treatise first sets out how hard it is to believe: 「摩訶衍甚深難信、難解難行。」 tr. "The Mahāyāna is very deep, hard to believe, hard to understand, hard to practise."〔T25 0756a23〕; next it sets out its quantity—「三藏正有三十萬偈,并為九百六十萬言。」 tr. "The three baskets have exactly three hundred thousand verses, making nine million six hundred thousand words."〔T25 0756a26〕, whereas 「〈般若波羅蜜品〉有二萬二千偈,〈大般若品〉有十萬偈」 tr. "the ‘Prajñāpāramitā’ chapter has twenty-two thousand verses, and the ‘Great Prajñā’ chapter has a hundred thousand verses"〔T25 0756a28〕, and so 「云何可入三藏中?小物應在大中,大物不得入小。」 tr. "How could it enter into the three baskets? A small thing should be within a great one; a great thing cannot enter a small one."〔T25 0756b10〕. Its words of distinction are clearest of all: 「三藏是聲聞法,摩訶衍是大乘法。」 tr. "The three baskets are the śrāvaka Dharma; the Mahāyāna is the Great Vehicle Dharma."〔T25 0756b23〕, and yet the two are not two flavours: 「佛法皆是一種一味,所謂苦盡解脫味。」 tr. "The Buddha-dharma is all of one kind and one flavour, namely the flavour of liberation that is the exhaustion of suffering."〔T25 0756b18〕; their difference lies only in 「一者、但自為身,二者、兼為一切眾生。」 tr. "First, being only for one's own person; second, being also for all beings."〔T25 0756b20〕. Jizang too has his numbers for this passage, which differ from this treatise (see Section VI).
Sūtra · Vinaya · mātṛkā. The proof the treatise gives that in the Buddha's lifetime there was as yet no name of the three baskets: 「佛在世時,無有三藏名,但有持修多羅比丘、持毘尼比丘、持摩多羅迦比丘。」 tr. "When the Buddha was in the world, there was no name of the three baskets; there were only bhikṣus who held the sūtra, bhikṣus who held the Vinaya, and bhikṣus who held the mātṛkā."〔T25 0756b24〕. The gloss on Vinaya comes below it: 「毘尼名比丘作罪,佛結戒:應行是、不應行是,作是事得是罪。」 tr. "Vinaya speaks of the offences bhikṣus commit; the Buddha lays down the precepts: one should do this, one should not do that; doing this matter incurs this offence."〔T25 0756c01〕, and its two divisions are 「一者、摩偷羅國毘尼,含阿波陀那、本生,有八十部」 tr. "first, the Vinaya of the land of Mathurā, which includes the avadāna and the jātaka, with eighty sections"〔T25 0756c03〕 and 「二者、罽賓國毘泥,除却本生、阿波陀那,但取要用作十部。」 tr. "second, the Vinaya of the land of Jibin, which removes the jātaka and the avadāna, taking only what is essential to make ten sections."〔T25 0756c04〕—within the same passage the two forms 「毘尼」 tr. "Vinaya" and 「毘泥」 tr. "Vinaya (in another writing)" are both seen; the base text is so, and it is recorded as it is, without being made uniform (for the collation note see Section VIII, entry sixty-five: the Song, Yuan, Ming, Palace, and Ishiyama texts, five in all, read 「尼」 tr. "ni" at the latter place).
Expository Treatise · complete text · abridged text. Words of self-description in the colophon of the last passage. In 「出此釋論」 tr. "brought out this Expository Treatise"〔T25 0756c11〕, the 「釋論」 tr. "Expository Treatise" is this book's name for itself; its own statement of its pattern lies in 「論初品三十四卷,解釋一品,是全論具本;二品已下,法師略之,取其足以開釋文意而已,不復備其廣釋。」 tr. "The treatise's first chapter, thirty-four fascicles, explains one chapter, and is the full complete text of the treatise; from the second chapter onward the Dharma master abridged it, taking only what sufficed to open up and explain the meaning of the text, and no longer providing its full extended explanation."〔T25 0756c14〕, and it closes with 「得此百卷,若盡出之,將十倍於此。」 tr. "We obtained these hundred fascicles; were it brought out in full, it would be ten times this."〔T25 0756c17〕. The four Chinese characters 「得此百卷」 tr. "obtained these hundred fascicles" are seen twice in the whole of this treatise—once in the preface at the head of the treatise〔T25 0057b11〕, and once in this colophon〔T25 0756c17〕, head and tail clasping each other (see Section VII).
III. Similes and Stories
This chapter has six key similes and two cited incidents, all tied to the meaning being explained, none set up idly.
Breaking his body into pieces like hemp seeds and rice (the simile of great compassion that never abandons). In explaining why the Buddha, having already severed love of dharmas, still earnestly entrusts, the treatise brings up the Buddha's own deed as proof: 「於娑羅雙樹間,以金剛三昧為眾生碎身如麻米,何況經法多所饒益而不囑累!」 tr. "Between the twin śāla trees, by the vajra samādhi he broke his body into pieces like hemp seeds and rice for the sake of beings; how much more would he entrust the sūtra-dharma, which enriches so many!"〔T25 0754a23〕—if even the body can be broken, how much more one word of entrustment. The force of the simile lies in a single 「何況」 tr. "how much more": by the hardest it shows the easiest in reverse, and that entrustment is not love and clinging becomes plain of itself here. The expression 「麻米」 tr. "hemp seeds and rice" is seen once in the whole of this treatise, namely here.
A great physician uses poison as medicine (the simile of to whom the deep Dharma belongs). In explaining why the Lotus and other sūtras entrust, the other way round, to bodhisattvas, the treatise takes the physician's art as its comparison: 「譬如大藥師能以毒為藥。」 tr. "Just as a great physician can use poison as medicine."〔T25 0754b22〕—that poison becomes medicine lies not in the poison but in the one who uses it. Hence that prajñā is entrusted to a śrāvaka and the Lotus to bodhisattvas is not because the dharmas are higher or lower, but because of whether the recipients are equal to them. Jizang, at the same place, also uses the simile of medicine but divides it into a lesser and a great physician (see Section VI); the two masters' similes share a source but are explained apart, each in its own way.
Gold made into different things (the simile of prajñā and skilful means). In explaining that the path of prajñā and the path of skilful means are one in substance with different names, the treatise says: 「譬如金師以巧方便故,以金作種種異物,雖皆是金,而各異名。」 tr. "Just as a goldsmith, with clever skilful means, makes all kinds of different things out of gold: although all are gold, each has a different name."〔T25 0754c06〕—the gold is the substance, the vessel is the use; the names can be two, the gold is not two. This simile follows directly upon the preceding sentence, 「般若與方便,本體是一,以所用小異故別說」 tr. "prajñā and skilful means are one in their original substance; because there is a small difference in what they are used for, they are spoken of separately"〔T25 0754c05〕, and does not set up a separate meaning. Jizang, in opening his explanation of this chapter, uses similes of the same type, 「金剛與金」 tr. "vajra and gold" and 「以金為釧」 tr. "making gold into a bracelet" (see Section VI); the two sides' similes meet in their construction, while the vessels they take differ.
A merchant chief entrusts precious jewels to his beloved son (the simile of earnestness and solemnity). In explaining why the entrustment goes as far as earnestness and solemnity, the treatise takes a matter of trade: 「譬如估客主,欲遠出他國,雖以財寶囑累於子,大價妙寶偏獨慇懃,以其子未識妙寶價重故。」 tr. "Just as a merchant chief, about to go far away to another country, though he entrusts his wealth and jewels to his son, is specially and earnestly insistent about the precious jewels of great price, because his son does not yet recognise how heavy the price of the precious jewels is."〔T25 0754c23〕—the earnestness falls specially on this one thing precisely because the recipient does not recognise its value. Below it a further layer is given: 「若聞其子讚說寶價,則不信之。」 tr. "If others were to hear his son praise the price of the jewels, they would not believe it."〔T25 0754c26〕—therefore the Buddha does not praise his own Dharma among other assemblies: 「人則譏佛自稱讚法,疑而不信;自於弟子中囑累,則無嫌。」 tr. "people would then mock the Buddha for praising his own dharma, doubt and not believe; entrusting it himself among his disciples, there is no suspicion."〔T25 0754c28〕. 「譬如估客主」 tr. "Just as a merchant chief" is seen twice in the whole of this treatise (〔T25 0236b29〕〔T25 0754c23〕), once in this chapter.
One lamp lights other lamps (the simile of teaching one another in turn). In explaining that the purpose of entrustment is not to let the Dharma be extinguished, the treatise sets out the way of circulation: 「汝當教化弟子,弟子復教餘人,展轉相教;譬如一燈復然餘燈,其明轉多。」 tr. "You should teach and transform disciples, and the disciples in turn teach others, teaching one another in turn; just as one lamp lights other lamps, and its light grows ever more."〔T25 0755b17〕—when lamps light one another, the original light is not lessened and the total light increases. This simile and the warning about 「斷種」 tr. "cutting off the lineage" in the following sentence form exactly the front and back of one thing: in the one the light grows ever more, in the other it is cut off. The expression 「如一燈復然餘燈」 tr. "as one lamp lights other lamps" is seen once in the whole of this treatise, namely here.
Space—who could extinguish it? (the simile that quiescent extinction cannot be extinguished). It comes from a difficulty the treatise-author sets himself: since prajñā has 「畢竟寂滅相」 tr. "the mark of ultimate quiescent extinction"〔T25 0755b23〕, then 「譬如虛空,誰能滅者?」 tr. "Like space, who could extinguish it?"〔T25 0755b24〕—by the fact that space cannot be extinguished, it questions the words 「莫令斷滅」 tr. "do not let it be cut off and extinguished"〔T25 0755b23〕. This simile does not establish a meaning but raises a difficulty; its resolution lies in the phrase 「於此因中而說其果」 tr. "its result is spoken of within this cause"〔T25 0755b27〕 (see the entry 「滅般若」 tr. "extinguishing prajñā" in Section II).
The vajra-holding spirit raises his pestle (a cited incident on speech not exceeding three). In explaining why he stops after telling three times, the treatise cites the constant way of the buddhas: 「諸佛常法,語不過三。」 tr. "The constant way of the buddhas is that their speech does not exceed three."〔T25 0755b10〕, 「若過三不從,執金剛神則以杵擬之」 tr. "if after three someone does not comply, the vajra-holding spirit raises his pestle at him"〔T25 0755b11〕. 「執金剛神」 tr. "the vajra-holding spirit" is seen six times in the whole of this treatise (〔T25 0575b15〕〔T25 0575b17〕〔T25 0576b28〕〔T25 0614c10〕〔T25 0755b11〕〔T25 0755b12〕), twice in this chapter—this chapter's two occurrences lie within and just beyond a single sentence, and the collation notes on the character 「剛」 tr. "gang, adamantine" at these two places cross-refer to each other (see Section VIII, entry forty-four). Jizang, at the same place, also cites this incident (see Section VI).
The Buddha uses his body as a simile for prajñā (the second cited incident · taken by the Buddha of the sūtra himself). In explaining why Ānanda reveres the Buddha and does not revere prajñā, the treatise says: 「阿難雖得初道,漏未盡故,不深知法實,如佛所知。」 tr. "Although Ānanda has obtained the first path, because his outflows are not yet exhausted he does not deeply know the reality of dharmas as the Buddha knows it."〔T25 0755a29〕; below it the treatise gives the reason why the Buddha takes his own body as a simile: 「般若波羅蜜微妙甚深,無形、無色,智者能知。」 tr. "Prajñāpāramitā is subtle and very deep, without shape, without form; the wise can know it."〔T25 0755b04〕, 「佛身相好,愚、智視之,皆無厭足,是故佛以身喻般若。」 tr. "The Buddha's body with its marks and minor signs—whether the foolish or the wise look at it, none is ever satisfied; therefore the Buddha uses his body as a simile for prajñā."〔T25 0755b05〕—here the Buddha's body is not the end-point of what is revered but the step toward it: by the one who can be seen it leads toward the one who cannot be seen, and this is why the sūtra's 「當愛敬、供養般若波羅蜜」 tr. "you should love, revere, and make offerings to prajñāpāramitā"〔T25 0754a07〕 is tied on after 「汝愛敬供養供給」 tr. "you love, revere, make offerings to, and provide for".
IV. The Sūtra Passage Explained
The net of chapter names: the chapter names of the two canons wholly the same · the -1 step of the texts consistent at both ends (recorded side by side without judgement). The net of this chapter's names differs from the two-sided split of Chapter 62; it has three items.
First, the base text's chapter title〔T25 0753c28〕 reads 「大智度論釋囑累品第九十」 tr. "Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa, Commentary on the Chapter on Entrustment, the Ninetieth", and this chapter's title on the side of the sūtra explained, T223,〔T08 0423c21〕 reads 「摩訶般若波羅蜜經囑累品第九十」 tr. "Mahāprajñāpāramitā Sūtra, the Chapter on Entrustment, the Ninetieth"—apart from the book name each places at its head, the written form of the chapter name is wholly the same, both reading 「囑累品第九十」 tr. "Entrustment, Chapter Ninety"; there is neither a case of different names like the 「涅槃如化/如化」 tr. "‘Nirvāṇa Is Like a Conjuration’ / ‘Like a Conjuration’" of Chapter 87, nor the two sides of 「同學/魔愁」 tr. "Training Alike / Māra's Grief" of Chapter 62.
Second, the -1 step of the Shōgozō and Ishiyama texts. The variant readings of the note on the chapter title come from three witnesses: the Shōgozō reads 「釋八十九品」 tr. "explanation of the eighty-ninth chapter" (the original wording of the collation note records it as 「(釋八十九品)六字」 tr. "(explanation of the eighty-ninth chapter) six characters", while the characters recorded are actually five; the number in the original record does not agree with what is recorded, and both are kept as they are, without a judgement made on its behalf), taking this chapter as its own eighty-ninth chapter; the Ishiyama reads 「摩訶般若波羅蜜品第八十九後囑累」 tr. "the Mahāprajñāpāramitā chapter, the eighty-ninth, followed by Entrustment" (sūtra-title form · chapter order -1 · with 「後囑累」 tr. "the Later Entrustment" appended to mark its place); the Ming's collation note reads 「〔大智度論〕-」 tr. "[Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa] omitted", that is, it merely omits the four characters 「大智度論」 tr. "Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa", and is not a change in chapter order. The Palace text, after 「第九十」 tr. "the ninetieth", appends one character, 「品」 tr. "chapter", a purely orthographic difference (entries one and two of the ledger below). The chain of the -1 step remains unbroken even in the very last chapter of the whole treatise—this is what this chapter alone can prove: the -1 step followed chapter by chapter from Chapter 44 onward here reaches its terminal end.
Third, the -1 step of the fascicle-end title (the second end · proving and being proved by the chapter title). The variant readings of the fascicle-end title〔T25 0756c19〕: the Shōgozō reads 「大智度經論卷第一百釋第八十八品下訖第八十九品」 tr. "Great Wisdom-Crossing Sūtra-Treatise, Fascicle One Hundred, explaining from the latter part of the eighty-eighth chapter through the eighty-ninth chapter", and the Ishiyama reads 「釋八十九品竟大智度經卷一百」 tr. "the explanation of the eighty-ninth chapter ends; Great Wisdom-Crossing Sūtra, Fascicle One Hundred" (entry eighty of the ledger below)—both texts record this chapter as 「八十九」 tr. "eighty-nine", wholly consistent with the way it is recorded where the chapter title begins. Hence the -1 step in this chapter is regular at both ends, head and tail, with no drop at either end; this differs from the inconsistency between the front and back ends once seen in Chapter 77, and is recorded separately, as it is. Further, the Shōgozō's fascicle-end title also gives the range of chapters it explains, 「第八十八品下訖第八十九品」 tr. "from the latter part of the eighty-eighth chapter through the eighty-ninth chapter", from which it can be known that what the Shōgozō's Fascicle 100 contains is from the latter half of its own eighty-eighth chapter to its eighty-ninth chapter—the division of fascicles and chapters in the base text and in the Shōgozō does not overlap, and this is recorded as it is, without a forced explanation.
The same chapter under different names in the preceding chapter (a fact of the witnesses · recorded without judgement). This chapter's preceding chapter is, in this treatise, "Dharmodgata", Chapter 89—its entry in the chapter list〔T25 0744c16〕 and its fascicle-head title〔T25 0750b20〕 both read 「曇無竭」 tr. "Dharmodgata"; the same chapter on the side of the sūtra explained, T223, reads 「法尚品」 tr. "the Dharma-Esteeming chapter"〔T08 0421b24〕; Jizang's commentary too reads 「法尚品第八十九」 tr. "the chapter ‘Dharma-Esteeming’, the eighty-ninth"〔X24n0451 0342c20〕, and the one item in the general table of contents at the head of his book is the same. Hence the preceding chapter is one chapter with two names in use side by side (this treatise reads 「曇無竭」 tr. "Dharmodgata"; the proper title of the sūtra explained and Jizang's commentary read 「法尚」 tr. "Dharma-Esteeming", while the interlinear note of the Khitan edition on the side of the sūtra explained also reads 「曇無竭品」 tr. "the chapter ‘Dharmodgata’"〔T08 0421b25〕, so it is not a neat two-sided split between sūtra and treatise), standing in exact contrast to the two sides of this chapter's name being wholly the same. This section records this fact of the witnesses, without judging which of the two names is correct; below and in Section VII, the preceding chapter is always called by this treatise's name, "Dharmodgata".
The +1 offset of the table-of-contents attribute of the sūtra explained (continuing · a standing practice, not judged again). On the side of the sūtra explained, T223, this chapter's table-of-contents marker reads ninety-one while its displayed text reads 「90 囑累品」 tr. "90 Entrustment chapter"〔T08 0423c21〕—this +1 offset has been seen repeatedly since Chapter 41, and in this chapter it continues (following the standing phenomenon already recorded at "The Mother of the Buddhas", not judged again). Its preceding chapter, "Dharmodgata", is the same in this one item; the two chapters follow on with the offset unchanged, which is an inherent flaw of the table-of-contents layer of the base text, and has nothing to do with the variant readings of chapter names or chapter order; recorded separately, as it is.
The arrangement of chapter boundaries and fascicle boundaries in the two canons (both sides of this chapter tied to the fascicle-end). On the side of the sūtra explained, T223, this chapter ends at〔T08 0424a13〕, and immediately below it is the fascicle-end title 「摩訶般若波羅蜜經卷第二十七」 tr. "Fascicle Twenty-seven of the Mahāprajñāpāramitā Sūtra"〔T08 0424a14〕—on the T223 side too this chapter is the very last chapter of the whole sūtra; its chapter's end is the fascicle's end and the end of the whole sūtra. This treatise's side is of the same type (see Section I). The two transmissions are wholly synchronised in where this chapter closes, standing as the exact counter-example to the ‘division of fascicles and chapters not agreeing between the two transmissions’ of Chapter 62; recorded separately, as it is. The fascicle number of T223's fascicle-end title also has variant readings: the Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace texts, four in all, read 「三十」 tr. "thirty", and the Shōgozō reads 「四十」 tr. "forty"〔T08 0424a14〕—the texts differ in their division into fascicles while the chapter order does not differ; recorded as it is.
Full comparative reading of the quoted sūtra (both sides collated · nine places of variant wording · each place recorded with whether it has a collation note). This treatise's Sūtra ①〔T25 0753c29–0754a19〕 and this chapter of the sūtra explained〔T08 0423c22–0424a13〕 are almost the same character by character (the streams of Chinese characters of the two sides being three hundred and twenty-nine and three hundred and twenty-eight characters respectively); apart from this treatise having one more structural marker, 【經】, they differ in nine places:
- xiujiatuo / xiujiatuo (the Sugata, in two writings)—this treatise reads 「世尊!佛是我大師,脩伽陀是我大師,我是佛弟子。」 tr. "World-Honored One! The Buddha is my great teacher, the Sugata is my great teacher; I am the Buddha's disciple."〔T25 0754a01〕, and T223 reads 「世尊!佛是我大師,修伽陀是我大師;我是佛弟子。」 tr. "World-Honored One! The Buddha is my great teacher, the Sugata is my great teacher; I am the Buddha's disciple."〔T08 0423c23〕. On this treatise's side there is a note here, 「陀【大】|他【聖】」 tr. "tuo (Taishō) | ta (Shōgozō)" (entry five of the ledger below), and what it collates is the character 「陀」 tr. "tuo", not 「脩」 tr. "xiu"; on the T223 side there is no collation note here. The difference of 「脩/修」 tr. "xiu / xiu (two graphs)" has no collation note on either side; it belongs to a difference of characters used in the transmissions, and is recorded as it is, without judging one side's reading by the other's.
- Do not forget it, do not lose it / do not forget or lose it—this treatise reads 「阿難!汝莫忘莫失,莫作最後斷種人!」 tr. "Ānanda! Do not forget it, do not lose it, do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage!"〔T25 0754a09〕, and T223 reads 「阿難!汝莫忘失,莫作最後斷種人。」 tr. "Ānanda! Do not forget or lose it; do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage."〔T08 0424a02〕. On the T223 side there is a note here, 「失【大】,莫失【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】」 tr. "lose (Taishō), do not lose (Song, Yuan, Ming, Palace, Shōgozō)"〔T08 0424a02〕—the five T223 texts of the Song, Yuan, Ming, Palace, and Shōgozō all read 「莫忘莫失」 tr. "do not forget it, do not lose it", agreeing exactly with the reading of this treatise's base text; on this treatise's side there is no collation note here.
- always close to the Buddha / is always close to the Buddha—this treatise reads 「當知是人不離見佛、不離聞法、常親近佛。」 tr. "Know that this person is not apart from seeing the Buddha, not apart from hearing the Dharma, and always close to the Buddha."〔T25 0754a13〕, and T223 reads 「當知是人不離見佛、不離聞法,為常親近佛。」 tr. "Know that this person is not apart from seeing the Buddha, not apart from hearing the Dharma, and is always close to the Buddha."〔T08 0424a07〕, having one more character, 「為」 tr. "is". Neither side has a collation note here; recorded as it is.
- the venerable Śāriputra (T223 has the two more characters 「慧命」 tr. "the venerable")—this treatise reads 「慧命須菩提、舍利弗、大目犍連」 tr. "the venerable Subhūti, Śāriputra, Mahāmaudgalyāyana"〔T25 0754a15〕, and T223 reads 「慧命須菩提、慧命舍利弗、大目揵連」 tr. "the venerable Subhūti, the venerable Śāriputra, Mahāmaudgalyāyana"〔T08 0424a09〕. Neither side has a collation note here; it belongs to a difference in the practice of listing names, and is recorded as it is.
- Mahāmaudgalyāyana, written with jian / with jian of another graph—on this treatise's side there is a star-marked note here, 「犍【大】*,揵【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】*」 tr. "jian (Taishō) star, jian in the other graph (Song, Yuan, Ming, Palace, Shōgozō) star" (entry nine of the ledger below)—the five texts of this treatise, the Song, Yuan, Ming, Palace, and Shōgozō, all read 「揵」 tr. "jian (the other graph)", which is exactly the reading of T223's base text; on the T223 side there is no collation note here.
- Pūrṇa Maitrāyaṇīputra, in two writings—on this treatise's side there are two notes here, 「隷【大】|羅【石】」 tr. "li (Taishō) | luo (Ishiyama)" (entry ten of the ledger below) and 「耶【大】|〔-〕【聖】【石】」 tr. "ye (Taishō) | omitted (Shōgozō, Ishiyama)" (entry eleven of the ledger below)—the Ishiyama reads 「彌多羅尼子」 tr. "Maitrāyaṇīputra" (li becoming luo · the character ye missing), agreeing exactly with the reading of T223's base text; on the T223 side there is no collation note here.
- Mahākauṣṭhila, in two writings—on this treatise's side there is a note, 「俱【大】|拘【聖】【石】」 tr. "ju (Taishō) | ju in another graph (Shōgozō, Ishiyama)" (entry twelve of the ledger below)—the reading of the Shōgozō and Ishiyama texts agrees exactly with T223's base text; on the T223 side there is no collation note here.
- Mahākātyāyana, with mohe / with da—on this treatise's side there is a note, 「摩訶【大】|大【聖】【石】」 tr. "mohe (Taishō) | da, great (Shōgozō, Ishiyama)" (entry thirteen of the ledger below), and on the T223 side too there is a note, 「大【大】,摩訶【宋】【元】【明】【宮】」 tr. "da, great (Taishō), mohe (Song, Yuan, Ming, Palace)"〔T08 0424a11〕—the collation notes of the two sides form an exact mirror image: the reading of this treatise's Shōgozō and Ishiyama texts (da) is exactly the reading of T223's base text, and the reading of T223's Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace texts (mohe) is exactly the reading of this treatise's base text. This is this chapter's only variant that has collation notes in both directions mirroring each other; recorded as it is, without judging which is correct.
- gandharva, written with jian / with jian of another graph—on this treatise's side there is a note, 「犍【大】|乾【聖】【石】」 tr. "jian (Taishō) | qian (Shōgozō, Ishiyama)" (entry fourteen of the ledger below), and on the T223 side there is a note, 「揵【大】,乾【宋】【元】【明】」 tr. "jian in the other graph (Taishō), qian (Song, Yuan, Ming)"〔T08 0424a12〕—the variant texts of both sides read 「乾」 tr. "qian", while the base texts of the two sides read 「犍」 tr. "jian" and 「揵」 tr. "jian (the other graph)" respectively: three forms stand side by side, differing in the character and not in meaning; recorded as it is.
Variant readings of the same type seen in both canons (reading and reciting / reciting and reading). This treatise reads 「受持、讀、誦、正憶念、為人廣說」 tr. "receive and uphold, read, recite, rightly recollect, and explain it widely for others"〔T25 0754a11〕, with the note 「讀誦【大】|誦讀【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】」 tr. "reading and reciting (Taishō) | reciting and reading (Song, Yuan, Ming, Palace, Shōgozō)" (entry eight of the ledger below); T223 at the same position reads 「若有書般若波羅蜜,受持讀誦、正憶念、為人廣說」 tr. "if anyone writes out prajñāpāramitā, receives and upholds, reads and recites, rightly recollects, and explains it widely for others"〔T08 0424a04〕, where there is a star-marked cross-reference, and the note it points to reads 「讀誦【大】*,誦讀【聖】*」 tr. "reading and reciting (Taishō) star, reciting and reading (Shōgozō) star"〔T08 0423c17〕. The variant texts of each of the two canons both give the inverted 「誦讀」 tr. "reciting and reading"—this is not a wavering within one canon; it is two readings standing side by side in the transmissions of the two canons, each on its own, and is recorded as it is, without judging which came first. Further, in this treatise's base text the main text carries an enumeration comma between 「讀」 tr. "read" and 「誦」 tr. "recite" while its collation note does not; this is a difference between the editing and collation layers, explicitly set side by side (see the separate listing in Section VIII).
The comparison group (six strings · the number of occurrences in each canon honestly recorded · the alignment unique). 「隨爾所時般若波羅蜜在世,當知爾所時有佛在世說法。」 tr. "For however long a time prajñāpāramitā is in the world, know that for so long a time there is a Buddha in the world teaching the Dharma."〔T25 0754a10〕 / 〔T08 0424a03〕; 「阿難!汝莫忘莫失,莫作最後斷種人!」 tr. "Ānanda! Do not forget it, do not lose it, do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage!"〔T25 0754a09〕 / the same position reading 「阿難!汝莫忘失,莫作最後斷種人。」 tr. "Ānanda! Do not forget or lose it; do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage."〔T08 0424a02〕; 「佛是汝大師不?汝是佛弟子不?」 tr. "Is the Buddha your great teacher? Are you the Buddha's disciple?"〔T25 0753c29〕 / 〔T08 0423c22〕; 「我是汝大師,汝是我弟子。」 tr. "I am your great teacher; you are my disciple."〔T25 0754a03〕 / 〔T08 0423c25〕; 「當知是人不離見佛、不離聞法、常親近佛。」 tr. "Know that this person is not apart from seeing the Buddha, not apart from hearing the Dharma, and always close to the Buddha."〔T25 0754a13〕 / the same position reading 「當知是人不離見佛、不離聞法,為常親近佛。」 tr. "Know that this person is not apart from seeing the Buddha, not apart from hearing the Dharma, and is always close to the Buddha."〔T08 0424a07〕; 「聞佛所說,皆大歡喜。」 tr. "Hearing what the Buddha said, all greatly rejoiced."〔T25 0754a19〕 / 〔T08 0424a12〕. The streams of Chinese characters of the six strings above are each seen only once in the whole treatise T25n1509 (this section independently rescanned each string in both canons by the tolerant method, not copying from elsewhere); the alignment is unique, and there is no other chapter they could be confused with. It is judged to be ‘the same chapter under the same name’—chapter name, chapter order, chapter boundary, and place of closing, all four matters agree on both sides, making it one of the chapters in which the two sides fit each other most closely among the "Commentary on the Remaining Chapters".
What has no counterpart in the treatise layer (not a variant). This treatise's fourteen rounds of question and answer in the 【論】 layer are a structural expansion belonging to the form of a treatise, while the sūtra explained is pure sūtra text, and this layer does not exist on the T223 side; it does not constitute a variant, and is recorded separately, as it is. Further, the five places of sūtra wording that the treatise-author quotes in the treatise section (see Section I) are of the same lineage in their wording as this treatise's Sūtra ①; they do not come from a separate text, and do not enter the count of variants either.
V. The Prajñā Eye
This chapter is the last chapter of the whole treatise, and also the only chapter of the whole treatise that writes ‘what is to be done with this book from now on’ into a teaching of the Dharma. Its meaning can be summed up in five layers.
First, the entrustment first establishes standing; it does not first teach the Dharma. The sūtra opens not with the words of entrustment but with a question asked back: 「佛是汝大師不?汝是佛弟子不?」 tr. "Is the Buddha your great teacher? Are you the Buddha's disciple?"〔T25 0753c29〕. Only after Ānanda has answered does the Buddha confirm it: 「我是汝大師,汝是我弟子。」 tr. "I am your great teacher; you are my disciple."〔T25 0754a03〕. The treatise explains this with the utmost concreteness: this question is for guarding against the false and for resolving a doubt—under the Buddha's seat there really were 「名字弟子」 tr. "disciples in name"〔T25 0755a16〕, and outsiders really did suspect that Ānanda attended the Buddha because of kinship. So the point of this question lands on 「若言是真弟子,當隨我勅。」 tr. "If you say you are a true disciple, you should follow my command."〔T25 0755a20〕. That the Dharma can be handed over lies first in a person's willingness to receive it; if the standing is not settled, the entrustment has nowhere to be tied. The whole treatise is gathered in here and not in some higher passage of doctrine, and the intent lies exactly here.
Second, to love and revere prajñā is to love and revere the Buddha, and the Buddha takes his body as the step toward prajñā. The proper text of the sūtra is only one sentence of transfer: 「我身現在,汝愛敬供養供給,心常清淨;我滅度後,是一切愛敬、供養、供給事,當愛敬、供養般若波羅蜜!」 tr. "While my body is present, you love, revere, make offerings to, and provide for it, and your mind is always pure; after my passing into extinction, all this loving, revering, making offerings, and providing you should turn to loving, revering, and making offerings to prajñāpāramitā!"〔T25 0754a05〕. Here the treatise-author sets himself a question that follows human feeling closely—「般若是諸佛師,而阿難何以不恭敬其師,而恭敬佛?」 tr. "Prajñā is the teacher of the buddhas; why then does Ānanda not revere that teacher, and instead revere the Buddha?"〔T25 0755a28〕. The treatise's answer does not avoid the fact: 「阿難雖得初道,漏未盡故,不深知法實,如佛所知。」 tr. "Although Ānanda has obtained the first path, because his outflows are not yet exhausted he does not deeply know the reality of dharmas as the Buddha knows it."〔T25 0755a29〕; 「般若波羅蜜微妙甚深,無形、無色,智者能知。」 tr. "Prajñāpāramitā is subtle and very deep, without shape, without form; the wise can know it."〔T25 0755b04〕, 「佛身相好,愚、智視之,皆無厭足,是故佛以身喻般若。」 tr. "The Buddha's body with its marks and minor signs—whether the foolish or the wise look at it, none is ever satisfied; therefore the Buddha uses his body as a simile for prajñā."〔T25 0755b05〕. Here the Buddha's body is not the end-point of what is revered but the step toward it: the one who can be seen is there to lead the mind on to the one dharma that cannot be seen. So entrustment is not changing to another object of worship; it is turning the same portion of reverence onto the Dharma.
Third, earnestness up to three times is for parting from the two extremes, not because of love and clinging. The first question the treatise-author sets himself is asked very bluntly: since the Buddha has already severed love of dharmas, 「今何以種種因緣囑累是法,似如愛著?」 tr. "why now, by all kinds of causes and conditions, does he entrust this Dharma, as if in love and clinging?"〔T25 0754a21〕. The answer takes three roads. One road is great compassion—「諸佛大慈悲心,從初發意已來乃至到涅槃門,常不捨離。」 tr. "The mind of great kindness and compassion of the buddhas, from the first arousing of intent and so on up to arriving at the gate of nirvāṇa, is never abandoned."〔T25 0754a22〕, and its utmost proof lies in 「於娑羅雙樹間,以金剛三昧為眾生碎身如麻米,何況經法多所饒益而不囑累!」 tr. "Between the twin śāla trees, by the vajra samādhi he broke his body into pieces like hemp seeds and rice for the sake of beings; how much more would he entrust the sūtra-dharma, which enriches so many!"〔T25 0754a23〕. One road is the recipient—「譬如估客主,欲遠出他國,雖以財寶囑累於子,大價妙寶偏獨慇懃,以其子未識妙寶價重故。」 tr. "Just as a merchant chief, about to go far away to another country, though he entrusts his wealth and jewels to his son, is specially and earnestly insistent about the precious jewels of great price, because his son does not yet recognise how heavy the price of the precious jewels is."〔T25 0754c23〕; that the earnestness falls specially on this one thing is not because the holder loves it, but because the recipient does not recognise it. The deepest road lies in the middle way: 「佛欲現中道故囑累:先說諸法空,以遮有邊;今慇懃囑累,則破無邊,是則中道。」 tr. "The Buddha entrusts because he wishes to show the middle way: first he taught that dharmas are empty, to block the extreme of existence; now he earnestly entrusts, and this refutes the extreme of non-existence; this then is the middle way."〔T25 0755a06〕—having taught a whole book of emptiness, without this earnestness people would read emptiness as annihilation; the earnestness of the entrustment is precisely the blocking of that other extreme. As for why he stops after three, the treatise gives the constant way: 「諸佛常法,語不過三。」 tr. "The constant way of the buddhas is that their speech does not exceed three."〔T25 0755b10〕, and adds a measure of the plainest kind: 「復次,若一說,猶緩;過三,太急,似如凡夫貪著者。」 tr. "Furthermore, if said once, it is still too slack; beyond three, too urgent, like an ordinary person who craves and clings."〔T25 0755b13〕.
Fourth, whether the Dharma can or cannot be extinguished depends wholly on the clinging mind. The treatise-author sets the sharpest difficulty of the whole chapter: prajñā is 「說亦不增、不說亦不減,畢竟寂滅相」 tr. "not increased by being taught, nor decreased by not being taught, having the mark of ultimate quiescent extinction"〔T25 0755b22〕, so then 「譬如虛空,誰能滅者?」 tr. "Like space, who could extinguish it?"〔T25 0755b24〕. The answer too is in two layers. As to what is entrusted, it refers to the circulation of the written word—「而文字語言書般若波羅蜜經卷,為他人說,是此中般若,於此因中而說其果。」 tr. "And the scrolls of the prajñāpāramitā sūtra written in letters and words, taught to others, are the prajñā here; its result is spoken of within this cause."〔T25 0755b26〕: the scrolls are not prajñā, but they are the cause of prajñā, so within the cause the name of the result is spoken. As to what is called extinguishing, what can truly extinguish prajñā was never a difficulty from outside: 「凡人聞般若波羅蜜微妙,即生著心,取般若相,分別諸法」 tr. "Ordinary people, hearing that prajñāpāramitā is subtle, at once give rise to a clinging mind, grasp at the mark of prajñā, and discriminate dharmas"〔T25 0755b27〕, 「以分別故,於是法中生著心,著心故鬪諍,鬪諍故起諸罪業」 tr. "because of discriminating, within this dharma they give rise to a clinging mind; because of the clinging mind, fighting and strife; because of fighting and strife, they raise up all sinful deeds"〔T25 0755c01〕, 「如是人名為滅般若波羅蜜。」 tr. "Such people are named those who extinguish prajñāpāramitā."〔T25 0755c02〕. The one who extinguishes the Dharma is not outside the Dharma; he is that speck of grasping at marks in the mind of the one who reads the Dharma. So the dharma of not extinguishing too is only one sentence: 「汝當如般若波羅蜜相,莫著文字語言,教化眾生。」 tr. "You should, in accordance with the mark of prajñāpāramitā, not cling to letters and words, and teach and transform beings."〔T25 0755c03〕—to teach and transform in accordance with the mark of prajñā alone is circulation; to teach and transform while grasping the letters is precisely cutting it off. Clasped to this are the simile of circulation, 「譬如一燈復然餘燈,其明轉多。」 tr. "Just as one lamp lights other lamps, and its light grows ever more."〔T25 0755b18〕, and the warning against cutting off, 「世人有子,若不紹繼,則名斷種,最為可恥。」 tr. "When people of the world have sons, if they do not continue the line, it is named cutting off the lineage, the greatest shame."〔T25 0755b20〕—in the one the light grows ever more, in the other it stops right here, and both things fall upon the one who passes it on.
Fifth, prajñā being in the world is the Buddha being in the world—this is the last admonition of the whole treatise. The sūtra: 「隨爾所時般若波羅蜜在世,當知爾所時有佛在世說法。」 tr. "For however long a time prajñāpāramitā is in the world, know that for so long a time there is a Buddha in the world teaching the Dharma."〔T25 0754a10〕; the treatise explains the reasons for it as two: 「般若波羅蜜是諸佛母,諸佛以法為師。」 tr. "Prajñāpāramitā is the mother of the buddhas; the buddhas take the Dharma as their teacher."〔T25 0755c08〕, 「若師在、母在,不名為失利。」 tr. "If the teacher is present and the mother is present, it is not named losing the benefit."〔T25 0755c09〕; 「又法寶不離佛寶。」 tr. "Again, the Dharma Jewel is not apart from the Buddha Jewel."〔T25 0755c11〕, 「菩薩有三十二相、八十隨形好,不名為佛,得法寶故名為佛。」 tr. "A bodhisattva with the thirty-two marks and the eighty minor marks is not named Buddha; because he obtains the Dharma Jewel he is named Buddha."〔T25 0755c12〕. The marks and minor signs do not suffice to make a Buddha; obtaining the Dharma Jewel makes a Buddha—so when the Dharma is present, the Buddha is present, 「說法無異」 tr. "teaching the Dharma with no difference"〔T25 0755c16〕. And the final round of question and answer fills in its reverse side: since prajñā is so weighty, why was it not included when the three baskets were compiled? The point of the treatise's answer is not to belittle the three baskets but to make clear their measure and their occasion—「小物應在大中,大物不得入小。」 tr. "A small thing should be within a great one; a great thing cannot enter a small one."〔T25 0756b11〕, 「摩訶衍能兼小乘法故,是故不應如汝所問。」 tr. "Because the Mahāyāna can include the dharma of the Small Vehicle, therefore one should not ask as you have asked."〔T25 0756b13〕; and the flavour of the two is from the first one: 「佛法皆是一種一味,所謂苦盡解脫味。」 tr. "The Buddha-dharma is all of one kind and one flavour, namely the flavour of liberation that is the exhaustion of suffering."〔T25 0756b18〕, their difference lying only in 「一者、但自為身,二者、兼為一切眾生。」 tr. "First, being only for one's own person; second, being also for all beings."〔T25 0756b20〕. A treatise of a hundred fascicles is gathered in on the one sentence 「有般若在世,則為佛在」 tr. "when there is prajñā in the world, the Buddha is present"〔T25 0755c07〕; and whether this sentence can stand depends wholly on the item before it—whether the one who hears truly hears, and whether the one who passes it on has a clinging mind.
VI. Divergent Readings of the Masters
The Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa has no tradition of a complete line-by-line commentary, and the ancient masters' citations and explanations are, as a matter of fact, partial and lopsided. For this chapter only one master's re-reading exists: Jizang's commentary, which explains the sūtra explained, preserves a complete dedicated section, and his commentary too ends at this chapter; Huiying's commentary, which explains this treatise, lacks an explanation of this chapter (its surviving text does not reach this chapter, and only a few words of its outline point ahead to it); Junzheng's book has zero hits, and the books of the Tiantai lineage have zero hits—the opposite of Chapter 62's ‘dedicated sections of both masters surviving’; this chapter is one of the chapters with the fewest ancient commentaries. This section records how what they comment on and cite corresponds to this chapter, without judging which master's interpretation is higher or lower.
Jizang's Commentary on the Larger Sūtra (X24n0451). Its line-by-line commentary on the chapter "Entrustment" of the sūtra explained begins at 「囑累品第九十」 tr. "Entrustment, Chapter Ninety"〔X24n0451 0345a04〕 and runs to the end of the whole book〔X24n0451 0345c20〕. After it there is no next chapter—the chapter list of Jizang's commentary too ends at this chapter, corresponding wholly to where the chapter list of this treatise closes (see Section VII). Further, this chapter's name is seen once in the general table of contents at the head of that book〔X24n0451 0195c20〕 and once in the heading of the chapter body〔X24n0451 0345a04〕; what is tied here is the heading of the chapter body, not the general table of contents. There are eight points worth recording.
First, the chapter's place and the major division—「此下第二、明付屬流通方便。」 tr. "From here below is the second: it clarifies entrusting the circulation of skilful means."〔X24n0451 0345a05〕: Jizang assigns this chapter to the second part of the major division of the whole sūtra, 「付屬流通方便」 tr. "entrusting the circulation of skilful means". At the opening of the section he at once sets up the distinction between prajñā and skilful means: 「般若此品別而為論,付屬流通方便智慧與方便云何異耶?」 tr. "Prajñā is discussed separately in this chapter; in entrusting the circulation of skilful means, how do wisdom and skilful means differ?"〔X24n0451 0345a05〕, and his answer cites this treatise directly: 「論云般若方便無有二物,隨用不同故開二耳。」 tr. "The treatise says prajñā and skilful means are not two things; only because their uses differ are they opened into two."〔X24n0451 0345a06〕—pointing to the same thing as this treatise's 「般若與方便,本體是一,以所用小異故別說」 tr. "prajñā and skilful means are one in their original substance; because there is a small difference in what they are used for, they are spoken of separately"〔T25 0754c05〕, while the simile differs: Jizang has 「如金剛與金更無有異,而善巧以金為釧,故有金有釧二事不同也。」 tr. "Just as vajra and gold are not at all different, yet with skill one makes gold into a bracelet, and so there are the two matters, gold and bracelet, which are not the same."〔X24n0451 0345a07〕, and this treatise has 「譬如金師以巧方便故,以金作種種異物,雖皆是金,而各異名。」 tr. "Just as a goldsmith, with clever skilful means, makes all kinds of different things out of gold: although all are gold, each has a different name."〔T25 0754c06〕—one takes the bracelet as its vessel, the other all kinds of different things as its vessels; the construction of the similes meets while the images taken differ; recorded side by side without judgement.
Second, the boundary of skilful means and the defilements it treats—「直觀法無依無得無生無滅,畢竟名實慧,知空而空而於空不證,然度眾生備行諸行名方便也。」 tr. "Directly contemplating dharmas as without support, without attainment, without arising, without ceasing, ultimately, is named real wisdom; knowing emptiness as empty and yet not realising emptiness, while saving beings and fully practising all practices, is named skilful means."〔X24n0451 0345a08〕; what it treats he also cites directly from this treatise: 「論云直明般若惑生四事:若疑、若耶見也、若入涅槃、若作佛。」 tr. "The treatise says that prajñā plainly understood gives rise, for the deluded, to four matters: doubt, wrong view, entering nirvāṇa, or becoming a Buddha."〔X24n0451 0345a11〕—meeting the four matters of this treatise's 「若能生四種事:若疑、若邪見、若入涅槃、若作佛」 tr. "It can give rise to four kinds of matter: doubt, wrong view, entering nirvāṇa, or becoming a Buddha"〔T25 0754c16〕; his 「耶見」 tr. "wrong view (written with ye)" is this treatise's 「邪見」 tr. "wrong view" (at this place this treatise's base text reads 「邪」 tr. "xie, wrong" while the Shōgozō reads 「耶」 tr. "ye"; see entries thirty-one and thirty-two of the ledger below; the reading Jizang relied on is of the same lineage as the Shōgozō, recorded as it is without judgement).
Third, why entrust—「何故佛付屬流通耶?答:慈悲攝物何俟問耶?」 tr. "Question: why does the Buddha entrust its circulation? Answer: kindness and compassion gather in beings; why wait to ask?"〔X24n0451 0345a16〕, and below it he gives a further meaning, the middle way: 「又上說空破有捨,今何屬破空?欲示中道故付屬也。」 tr. "Again, above, emptiness was taught to refute existence and relinquish it; why now entrust it, refuting emptiness? Because he wishes to show the middle way, he entrusts it."〔X24n0451 0345a18〕—pointing to the same thing as this treatise's 「佛欲現中道故囑累:先說諸法空,以遮有邊;今慇懃囑累,則破無邊,是則中道。」 tr. "The Buddha entrusts because he wishes to show the middle way: first he taught that dharmas are empty, to block the extreme of existence; now he earnestly entrusts, and this refutes the extreme of non-existence; this then is the middle way."〔T25 0755a06〕, while this treatise assigns it to one saying of 「有人言」 tr. "someone says", and Jizang sets it up directly as the answer; the attribution differs, and this is recorded separately, as it is.
Fourth, why entrust it to Ānanda and not to the bodhisattvas—「何故不付屬菩薩而屬阿難?阿難是聲聞人,般若是菩薩法也。」 tr. "Why not entrust it to the bodhisattvas, but entrust it to Ānanda? Ānanda is a śrāvaka, and prajñā is the dharma of bodhisattvas."〔X24n0451 0345a19〕; the point of the answer lies in 「阿難得總是佛從弟子,又為給侍」 tr. "Ānanda has obtained the all-retaining, is the Buddha's cousin and disciple, and moreover is his attendant"〔X24n0451 0345a21〕, 「菩薩知般若恩德,自弘宣之,不須付屬。」 tr. "The bodhisattvas know the kindness and virtue of prajñā and spread it of themselves; they need no entrusting."〔X24n0451 0345b01〕, and 「阿難是小乘人,不知般若恩,是故佛付屬也。」 tr. "Ānanda is a person of the Small Vehicle who does not know the kindness of prajñā; therefore the Buddha entrusts it."〔X24n0451 0345b02〕—the three meanings meet this treatise's three statements item by item—this treatise's first meaning reads 「阿難常侍佛左右」 tr. "Ānanda always attended at the Buddha's left and right"〔T25 0754b02〕, its second 「佛又以是諸菩薩深知般若波羅蜜力,不須苦囑累。」 tr. "Further, because these bodhisattvas deeply know the power of prajñāpāramitā, the Buddha need not bitterly entrust it to them."〔T25 0754b11〕, and its third 「阿難是聲聞人,隨小乘法,是故佛慇懃囑累。」 tr. "Ānanda is a śrāvaka who follows the dharma of the Small Vehicle; therefore the Buddha earnestly entrusts it."〔T25 0754b12〕; this is the passage in which the two sides fit most closely.
Fifth, the entrustment of the Lotus and other sūtras—「若爾,法華等付屬喜王等菩薩耶?」 tr. "If so, why do the Lotus and others entrust them to King of Joy and the other bodhisattvas?"〔X24n0451 0345b03〕; his answer gives the distinction between the hidden and the manifest: 「法華明二乘作佛是秘密法,般若是顯現法。」 tr. "The Lotus makes clear that those of the two vehicles become Buddhas, which is a secret dharma; prajñā is a manifest dharma."〔X24n0451 0345b03〕, 「顯現法易用,秘密法難用。」 tr. "A manifest dharma is easy to use; a secret dharma is hard to use."〔X24n0451 0345b04〕, 「小藥師能用藥為藥,大藥師乃用毒作藥也。」 tr. "A lesser physician can use medicine as medicine; a great physician uses even poison as medicine."〔X24n0451 0345b05〕—at the same place this treatise has 「般若波羅蜜非祕密法。」 tr. "Prajñāpāramitā is not a secret dharma."〔T25 0754b20〕 and 「譬如大藥師能以毒為藥。」 tr. "Just as a great physician can use poison as medicine."〔T25 0754b22〕; the two masters' similes of medicine share a source, while Jizang adds one more side, the 「小藥師」 tr. "lesser physician"; below it Jizang further gives the distinction of shared and unshared: 「又有共、不共二般若,不共般若付屬菩薩,共者付聲聞也。」 tr. "Again, there are two prajñās, shared and unshared; the unshared prajñā is entrusted to bodhisattvas, the shared one to śrāvakas."〔X24n0451 0345b05〕—it meets the two kinds of prajñā of this treatise's 「一者、共聲聞說;二者、但為十方住十地大菩薩說」 tr. "first, taught in common with the śrāvakas; second, taught only for the great bodhisattvas of the ten directions who abide in the ten grounds"〔T25 0754b23〕, but this treatise does not match them to the recipients of the entrustment, while Jizang does; the two masters' tenets differ slightly, and they are recorded side by side without judgement.
Sixth, the number of verses and the compilation—「此般若定有幾偈而付屬?答:大般若十萬偈,今萬二千偈也。」 tr. "How many verses does this Prajñā have, that is entrusted? Answer: the Great Prajñā has a hundred thousand verses; this present one has twelve thousand verses."〔X24n0451 0345b07〕; this treatise in the same passage has 「〈般若波羅蜜品〉有二萬二千偈,〈大般若品〉有十萬偈」 tr. "the ‘Prajñāpāramitā’ chapter has twenty-two thousand verses, and the ‘Great Prajñā’ chapter has a hundred thousand verses"〔T25 0756a28〕—the number of a hundred thousand verses agrees on the two sides, while the number of verses of the text to which this chapter belongs is twenty-two thousand in this treatise and twelve thousand in Jizang; the two sides do not agree, and this is recorded as it is, without judgement. Further, on the place of the compilation: 「付阿難般若,何處集耶?答:文殊將阿難結集,未知何處。」 tr. "Prajñā was entrusted to Ānanda; where was it compiled? Answer: Mañjuśrī led Ānanda to compile it; it is not known where."〔X24n0451 0345b09〕—Jizang here states himself that 「未知何處」 tr. "it is not known where", while this treatise has 「文殊尸利、彌勒諸大菩薩亦將阿難集是摩訶衍。」 tr. "Mañjuśrī, Maitreya, and the other great bodhisattvas also led Ānanda to compile this Mahāyāna."〔T25 0756b15〕; this treatise has the one more party, Maitreya, and also gives no place. On the size of the three baskets: Jizang has 「三藏正有三十萬偈,九百九十萬言。」 tr. "The three baskets have exactly three hundred thousand verses, nine million nine hundred thousand words."〔X24n0451 0345b11〕, and this treatise has 「三藏正有三十萬偈,并為九百六十萬言。」 tr. "The three baskets have exactly three hundred thousand verses, making nine million six hundred thousand words."〔T25 0756a26〕—the numbers of verses agree while the numbers of words do not (nine million nine hundred thousand / nine million six hundred thousand); recorded as it is, without correcting one side's number by the other's. The reasoning with which each closes does meet: Jizang has 「佛非一身說,一世說,無量世已說,豈入三藏小法中?」 tr. "The Buddha did not teach with one body, in one lifetime; he has taught in immeasurable lifetimes—how could it enter into the small dharma of the three baskets?"〔X24n0451 0345b13〕 and 「又教門名異,大小不同,故結集亦別也。」 tr. "Again, the names of the gates of teaching differ, great and small are not the same, and so the compilations too are separate."〔X24n0451 0345b14〕, and this treatise has 「佛非但一身所說,無量世中或變化作無數身,是故所說無量。」 tr. "The Buddha did not teach with one body only; in immeasurable lifetimes he sometimes transformed himself into countless bodies; therefore what he taught is immeasurable."〔T25 0756b05〕 and 「三藏是聲聞法,摩訶衍是大乘法。」 tr. "The three baskets are the śrāvaka Dharma; the Mahāyāna is the Great Vehicle Dharma."〔T25 0756b23〕.
Seventh, the division of the chapter—「品為二:初、明付屬流通;二、大眾歡喜奉行。」 tr. "The chapter is in two: first, clarifying the entrusting of circulation; second, the great assembly rejoicing and carrying it out."〔X24n0451 0345b15〕, and the first division is further divided into three: 「初三:第一、明慇懃付屬,令尊重供養;二、明付屬阿難,令流通不絕;三、明付囑之意也。」 tr. "The first has three: first, clarifying the earnest entrusting, bidding him honour it and make offerings; second, clarifying the entrusting to Ānanda, bidding that its circulation not be cut off; third, clarifying the intent of the entrustment."〔X24n0451 0345b15〕; he himself marks where the three divisions begin: 「隨爾所時下,第三、付屬意也。以有利深,故付屬耳。」 tr. "From ‘for however long a time’ below is the third: the intent of the entrusting. Because it has deep benefit, he entrusts it."〔X24n0451 0345c06〕 and 「佛說是經以下,第二、奉行也。」 tr. "From ‘the Buddha taught this sūtra’ below is the second: carrying it out."〔X24n0451 0345c08〕—this treatise has no words of division; this is given by Jizang alone, and is recorded separately, as it is.
Eighth, three explanations following the text—on explaining why the Buddha asks about the standing of teacher and disciple: 「佛知阿難是弟子,何故今方問耶?答:二義:一、為簡真偽。」 tr. "The Buddha knows that Ānanda is his disciple; why does he only now ask? Answer: there are two meanings: first, to sift the true from the false."〔X24n0451 0345b17〕, 「佛有偽弟子,如須那剎多為財寶故,詐為弟子」 tr. "The Buddha had false disciples, such as Sunakṣatra, who for the sake of wealth and treasure pretended to be a disciple"〔X24n0451 0345b18〕, 「又須尸為盜佛法故,作為弟子,是故今問也。」 tr. "and again Susīma, in order to steal the Buddha-dharma, made himself a disciple; therefore he now asks."〔X24n0451 0345b20〕, 「二者、釋疑。諸外道謂阿難本事外道,著草衣求仙」 tr. "Second, to resolve a doubt. Those of the outside paths said that Ānanda had formerly served the outside paths, wearing grass robes and seeking the immortals"〔X24n0451 0345b21〕—they meet the two causes and conditions of this treatise from〔T25 0755a12〕 onward item by item; the personal names read 「須那剎多」 tr. "Sunakṣatra (shorter writing)" and 「須尸」 tr. "Susīma (shorter writing)" (this treatise has 「須那剎多羅」 tr. "Sunakṣatra" and 「須尸摩」 tr. "Susīma"), differing in the number of characters while referring to the same persons; recorded separately, as it is. On explaining speech not exceeding three: 「第二、第三者,佛法不過三事,不受佛語便是逆人,金剛神便煞之。」 tr. "As for ‘a second time and a third time’: in the Buddha-dharma a matter does not exceed three; one who does not receive the Buddha's words is then a rebellious person, and the vajra spirit then kills him."〔X24n0451 0345c01〕, and he adds a meaning of measure: 「又過多則大,過不足故,但其三也。」 tr. "Again, going beyond into many would be too much, and falling short would not suffice; therefore it is just three."〔X24n0451 0345c03〕—meeting this treatise's 「諸佛常法,語不過三。」 tr. "The constant way of the buddhas is that their speech does not exceed three."〔T25 0755b10〕 and 「復次,若一說,猶緩;過三,太急」 tr. "Furthermore, if said once, it is still too slack; beyond three, too urgent"〔T25 0755b13〕. On explaining cutting off the lineage: 「人子不能紹繼家業,為斷種人,最為耻。」 tr. "When a son cannot continue the family's work, he is a person who cuts off the lineage, the greatest shame."〔X24n0451 0345c04〕—close word for word to this treatise's 「世人有子,若不紹繼,則名斷種,最為可恥。」 tr. "When people of the world have sons, if they do not continue the line, it is named cutting off the lineage, the greatest shame."〔T25 0755b20〕 (「耻/恥」 tr. "chi / chi (variant graphs of ‘shame’)" being variant forms). On explaining the great assembly's rejoicing: 「無憂無喜是羅漢功德,尚無不喜云何言大喜?」 tr. "Being without sorrow and without joy is the merit of an arhat; since they have not even non-joy, how can it say great joy?"〔X24n0451 0345c08〕, 「羅漢於四諦無疑、於一切法中皆疑,今說般若破其種種疑心,喜也,盡此無餘也。」 tr. "The arhats have no doubt about the four truths, but within all dharmas they have doubts throughout; now prajñā is taught to break their many kinds of doubting mind, and so they rejoice; this exhausts it without remainder."〔X24n0451 0345c09〕—meeting this treatise's question, 「是諸大阿羅漢已證實際,無復憂喜,小喜尚無,何況大歡喜!」 tr. "These great arhats have already realised the limit of reality and have no more sorrow or joy; they have not even a small joy, how much less great joy!"〔T25 0756a09〕, and its answer, 「雖離三界欲,未得一切智慧故,於諸甚深法中猶疑不了」 tr. "although they have parted from the desire of the three realms, because they have not yet obtained all wisdom, within all the very deep dharmas they still have doubts and do not understand them clearly"〔T25 0756a11〕; in this passage the two sides fit most closely.
Huiying's Commentary (X46n0791) · lacking an explanation (only pointers ahead in its outline). Huiying's commentary is the only ancient commentary explaining this treatise, and only a fragment of it survives; its surviving text stops at〔X46n0791 0917b12〕 (in the middle of Chapter 69)—this chapter lies outside its surviving range; it is recorded as lacking an explanation, not as zero hits. What must be specially recorded separately: the expression 「囑累」 tr. "entrust" is seen twenty-four times in that book (once in the general table of contents at the head of the fascicle〔X46n0791 0794b23〕, the other twenty-three concentrated between〔X46n0791 0908b23〕 and〔X46n0791 0912c13〕), and where they lie is the commentary on the earlier chapter of the same name, "Entrustment", and the commentary on the two chapters before and after it; not one place comments on the sūtra or treatise of this chapter. Yet among them words of its outline several times point ahead to this chapter, and they are recorded word for word: 「次從不盡品已下訖後囑累,有二十四品經文,名為方便道。」 tr. "Next, from the chapter ‘Not Exhausted’ onward up to the Later Entrustment, there are twenty-four chapters of sūtra text, named the path of skilful means."〔X46n0791 0909c15〕; 「從此品去至曇無竭品,通明方便道義;囑累一品,明其付囑。」 tr. "From this chapter on to the chapter ‘Dharmodgata’, they clarify throughout the meaning of the path of skilful means; the one chapter ‘Entrustment’ clarifies its entrusting."〔X46n0791 0912c12〕; 「一云二周囑累,為波若與方便二道經文故為二周,不開命說。當此品為生下分一周囑累故,所以此中釋此命說等義也。」 tr. "One account says that there are two rounds of entrustment: because of the sūtra texts of the two paths of prajñā and skilful means there are two rounds, and the command to teach is not opened out. Because this chapter is to give rise to one round of entrustment in the lower division, here it explains the meaning of this command to teach and the like."〔X46n0791 0908b24〕; and further, it says that if elsewhere 「經名為中囑累品,今此中經只云囑累品」 tr. "the sūtra names it the Middle Entrustment chapter, here the sūtra only says the Entrustment chapter"〔X46n0791 0910a01〕. What ‘up to the Later Entrustment’, ‘the one chapter Entrustment’, and ‘one round of entrustment in the lower division’ point to is in every case the last chapter of the whole sūtra, that is, this chapter; the name ‘the Middle Entrustment chapter’ also stands in contrast with the 「後囑累」 tr. "the Later Entrustment" appended to the Ishiyama's chapter title (see Section IV); and its matching of the two rounds of entrustment to the two paths of prajñā and skilful means meets this chapter's treatise-section judgement 「菩薩道有二種:一者、般若波羅蜜道,二者、方便道。」 tr. "The bodhisattva path is of two kinds: first, the path of prajñāpāramitā; second, the path of skilful means."〔T25 0754b28〕. All these are outline summaries, not comments on the content of this chapter, so it is recorded as ‘lacking an explanation; only the outline once pointed ahead’, not as zero hits (the apparatus of the preceding chapter, "Dharmodgata", handled it in the same way). Further, Huiying's own chapter numbering is one less than the base text: 「第六十五品者,名為囑累品」 tr. "The sixty-fifth chapter is named the Entrustment chapter"〔X46n0791 0909c13〕, 「第六十六品者,名為不盡品。」 tr. "The sixty-sixth chapter is named the chapter ‘Not Exhausted’."〔X46n0791 0912c04〕—in the same direction as the -1 step of the Shōgozō and Ishiyama texts; it is recorded in passing as side evidence, without judgement. If hits of the same name are not read text by text and checked for what they are tied to, they are very easily misplaced as evidence of a re-reading of this chapter—this is the foremost trap in this chapter's apparatus; this section, after checking entry by entry, records it as it is, and does not fill up the count of re-readings with hits of the same name.
Junzheng's Profound Meaning of the Four Mahāyāna Treatises (X46n0784) · zero hits (recorded as it is). A search back through the whole file for 「囑累」 tr. "entrust" gives zero hits. The book is a treatise arranged by theme (not a chapter-by-chapter commentary), and has no named citation of this chapter; the absence is recorded as it really is, and is not a question of the range of the text.
Zhiyi's Great Calming and Contemplation (T46n1911) · Profound Meaning of the Lotus (T33n1716) · Explanation of the Graded Dharma-Gates of Dhyānapāramitā (T46n1916), and Zhanran's Annotations on the Profound Meaning of the Lotus (T33n1717) · zero hits (recorded as it is). In the four files, a search back through each whole file independently for 「囑累」 tr. "entrust" gives zero hits in every case; and a further search back through the four files with four strings peculiar to this chapter (「莫作最後斷種人」 tr. "do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage", 「般若波羅蜜在世」 tr. "prajñāpāramitā is in the world", 「恭敬般若」 tr. "revere prajñā", 「究摩羅耆婆」 tr. "Kumārajīva") also gives zero hits in every case—this chapter has no explicitly named citation in these four books; no candidates are entered, and the negative result is recorded as it is.
False positives of the same name across texts (three files · intercepted entry by entry · not entered among the further resonances). The expression 「囑累」 tr. "entrust" has hits in each of the three files below; after checking entry by entry the texts they are tied to, all are confirmed not to be this chapter, and because what they are tied to is not this chapter they are intercepted, entered neither among the divergent readings of the masters nor in Section VII:
- Profound Commentary on the Vimalakīrti Sūtra (T38n1777) twice (〔T38 0519b01〕〔T38 0545a27〕), and Abridged Commentary on the Vimalakīrti Sūtra (T38n1778) nine times (〔T38 0563a18〕〔T38 0563a23〕〔T38 0563b23〕〔T38 0563b24〕〔T38 0567a27〕〔T38 0652a04〕〔T38 0706a16〕〔T38 0708a08〕〔T38 0708a13〕)—all refer to the Vimalakīrti Sūtra's own "Entrustment" chapter (that sūtra's fourteenth chapter · its last chapter), a chapter of the same name in a wholly different text from "Entrustment, Chapter Ninety", which this treatise explains in the Prajñā Sūtra.
- Words and Phrases of the Lotus (T34n1718) seventeen times (first occurrence〔T34 0001c24〕 · last occurrence〔T34 0144a11〕)—all belong to the Lotus Sūtra's own context (chapter names, and general terms of quoting the sūtra and of division); not one points to this chapter, and they are intercepted on the same ground.
- Supporting Practice and Broad Resolution of Calming and Contemplation (T46n1912): 「囑累」 tr. "entrust" once〔T46 0165a01〕, its text reading 「如諸經末受佛囑累發誓弘經」 tr. "as at the end of the sūtras, receiving the Buddha's entrustment and vowing to spread the sūtra"—a general expression referring broadly to the last chapters of the sūtras, not a citation of this chapter; recorded as it is, not counted.
Zhanran's Supporting Practice and Broad Resolution of Calming and Contemplation (T46n1912) · the citation of 「大論一百」 tr. "the Great Treatise, Fascicle One Hundred" is not this chapter (listed separately · recorded without judgement). The expression 「大論一百」 tr. "the Great Treatise, Fascicle One Hundred" is seen once in that book〔T46 0208c18〕, its text reading 「大論一百云。外書說。此山純黃金色。眾生投中其色無二。」 tr. "Fascicle One Hundred of the Great Treatise says: the outside books say this mountain is pure yellow gold in colour; beings who enter it are of no other colour."—what it points to is the passage of this treatise's Fascicle 100 at〔T25 0752b09〕, 「外書說須彌山一色,純是黃金。」 tr. "The outside books say Mount Sumeru is of one colour, pure yellow gold.", and that passage lies within the range of Chapter 89, "Dharmodgata", not this chapter (this chapter begins at〔T25 0753c28〕). The fascicle number agrees but the chapter does not: the ancient masters cite the treatise by fascicle number, and a fascicle contains many chapters, so one cannot infer directly from the fascicle number which chapter is cited; this section, having located word for word what it points to, records it separately, as it is, and does not use it to fill up the re-readings of this chapter.
VII. Cross-reading and Further Resonances
The lines of meaning by which this chapter carries on from what comes before and passes to what comes after are six; all are recorded in this section, without settling the reading on the reader's behalf.
First, the two chapters of the same name, ‘Entrustment’ (Chapter 66 / Chapter 90 · a hard link within this treatise itself). Among the chapters of this treatise, 「囑累品」 tr. "the Entrustment chapter" occurs twice: one is Chapter 66, "Commentary on the Chapter on Entrustment, the Sixty-sixth", and the other is this chapter, "Commentary on the Chapter on Entrustment, the Ninetieth". The two have wholly the same chapter name, while their chapter bodies are separate and the sūtra segments they explain are separate. The hits of 「囑累」 tr. "entrust" in Huiying's commentary lie mostly in its commentary on the former, and only a few words of its outline point ahead to this chapter (see Section VI)—hits of the same name can be assigned only by reading each text entry by entry. The expression 「囑累」 tr. "entrust" is seen sixty-three times in the whole of this treatise (thirty-eight times in this chapter · the count strips out collation notes and table-of-contents markers), spread across the whole book from〔T25 0069a27〕 to〔T25 0756a21〕, and does not belong to this chapter alone—so whether 「囑累」 tr. "Entrustment" is taken as a chapter name is decided by the division of sections and not by the word being seen in isolation, on the same principle as the naming of Chapter 62 by 「魔愁」 tr. "Māra's grief". The connection is recorded, without judging which of the two chapters' names came first.
Second, the chapter-order pointer back to ‘Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha—the Upāya-kauśalya chapter’ (the treatise-author's own proof). In explaining how this chapter's entrustment differs from that of the earlier place, the treatise points of itself to two chapters: 「先〈見阿閦佛品〉中囑累,今復囑累,有何等異?」 tr. "Earlier, in the chapter ‘Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha’, he entrusted it; now he entrusts it again—what difference is there?"〔T25 0754b27〕, and itself gives the reason the two chapters follow each other: 「以是故,〈見阿閦佛〉後,說〈漚和拘捨羅品〉。」 tr. "For this reason, after ‘Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha’, the ‘Upāya-kauśalya’ chapter is taught."〔T25 0754c02〕. The two expressions 「見阿閦佛品」 tr. "the chapter ‘Seeing Akṣobhya Buddha’" and 「漚和拘捨羅品」 tr. "the ‘Upāya-kauśalya’ chapter" are each seen once in the whole of this treatise, both in this chapter (〔T25 0754b27〕〔T25 0754c03〕), as obtained by this section's string-by-string rescanning—that is, only at this one place does the treatise-author point back to the earlier two chapters, in order to establish the division into the path of prajñā and the path of skilful means (see Section II). The earlier entrustment speaks of the substance of prajñā; this chapter's entrustment speaks of the use of prajñā—the chapter order gives rise from one to the other, and this succession is recorded.
Third, the side citations of other sūtras, ‘King of Joy · Inconceivable Liberation’. In explaining why the Lotus and other sūtras entrust to bodhisattvas, the treatise cites two matters on the side: 「若爾者,《法華經》、諸餘方等經,何以囑累喜王諸菩薩等?」 tr. "If so, why do the Lotus Sūtra and the other vaipulya sūtras entrust them to the bodhisattvas King of Joy and the others?"〔T25 0754b13〕 and 「五百阿羅漢雖在佛邊而不聞,或時得聞而不能用。」 tr. "Five hundred arhats, though at the Buddha's side, did not hear it, or at times heard it and could not use it."〔T25 0754b16〕. The expression 「喜王」 tr. "King of Joy" is seen once in the whole of this treatise, namely here; 「不可思議解脫經」 tr. "the Sūtra of Inconceivable Liberation" six times (〔T25 0303b24〕〔T25 0308b11〕〔T25 0308b15〕〔T25 0576c25〕〔T25 0754b16〕〔T25 0756b07〕), twice in this chapter—its second occurrence lies in the list of great sūtras given in the final round of question and answer. The connection is recorded, without settling the reading on the reader's behalf.
Fourth, the clasping of head and tail of the whole treatise, ‘preface—colophon’ (the most evident item). This chapter's colophon of the translation hall in the last passage〔T25 0756c09〕 and the "Preface to the Expository Treatise on the Mahāprajñāpāramitā Sūtra" at the head of this treatise's first fascicle〔T25 0057a03〕 (composed by Shi Sengrui of Chang'an) are the two ends of the whole treatise, and the matters they record clasp each other item by item:
- The year, month, and day of arriving at Chang'an—the colophon reads 「究摩羅耆婆法師,以秦弘始三年歲在辛丑十二月二十日至長安」 tr. "The Dharma master Kumārajīva, in the third year of Hongshi of the Qin, the year xinchou, on the twentieth day of the twelfth month, arrived at Chang'an"〔T25 0756c09〕, and the preface reads 「以秦弘始三年,歲次星紀,十二月二十日,自姑臧至長安。」 tr. "In the third year of Hongshi of the Qin, the year in the station Xingji, on the twentieth day of the twelfth month, he came from Guzang to Chang'an."〔T25 0057a27〕: the year, month, and day all agree; the manner of dating reads in one 「歲在辛丑」 tr. "the year xinchou" and in the other 「歲次星紀」 tr. "the year in the station Xingji", recorded side by side without judgement; the preface has in addition the three characters 「自姑臧」 tr. "from Guzang", telling where he came from.
- The place of the translation hall—the colophon reads 「四年夏,於逍遙園中西門閣上為姚天王出此釋論」 tr. "in the summer of the fourth year, in the upper storey of the western gate in the Xiaoyao Garden, he brought out this Expository Treatise for the Heavenly King Yao"〔T25 0756c10〕, and the preface reads 「集於渭濱逍遙園堂」 tr. "they gathered in the hall of the Xiaoyao Garden on the banks of the Wei"〔T25 0057b05〕: the expression 「逍遙園」 tr. "the Xiaoyao Garden" is seen twice in the whole of this treatise, namely at these two places, as obtained by this section's string-by-string rescanning.
- The number of fascicles of the finished book—the colophon reads 「得此百卷,若盡出之,將十倍於此。」 tr. "We obtained these hundred fascicles; were it brought out in full, it would be ten times this."〔T25 0756c17〕, and the preface reads 「三分除二,得此百卷。」 tr. "Of three parts two were removed, and we obtained these hundred fascicles."〔T25 0057b10〕: the four Chinese characters 「得此百卷」 tr. "obtained these hundred fascicles" are seen twice in the whole of this treatise, namely at these two places; the colophon speaks of what was abridged with 「十倍於此」 tr. "ten times this", and the preface speaks of what was removed with 「三分除二」 tr. "of three parts two were removed"; the measures of the two sides differ, and this is recorded as it is, without a forced explanation.
- The book's name for itself—the colophon reads 「出此釋論」 tr. "brought out this Expository Treatise"〔T25 0756c11〕, and the preface reads 「經本既定,乃出此釋論」 tr. "once the text of the sūtra had been settled, they then brought out this Expository Treatise"〔T25 0057b08〕: the self-name 「此釋論」 tr. "this Expository Treatise" is consistent at both ends. A treatise of a hundred fascicles begins with Sengrui's preface and closes with the colophon of the translation hall, and what they record is two ends of the same matter; the colophon is not a doctrinal proposition, yet its place is at the end of the whole treatise, and it is recorded as it is, as a record of the work of translation, without being mixed with the meaning of the treatise (see Section I, and the entry 「釋論·具本·略本」 tr. "Expository Treatise · complete text · abridged text" in Section II).
Fifth, both sides closing together, ‘the commentary too ends at this chapter’ (Jizang). Jizang's commentary on this chapter in his Commentary on the Larger Sūtra begins at〔X24n0451 0345a04〕, after which there is no next chapter, and the whole book closes with the title 「大品經義疏卷第十」 tr. "Fascicle ten of the Commentary on the Larger Sūtra"〔X24n0451 0345c13〕 (its character 「終」 tr. "end" is an interlinear note in the base text, appended at the end of the title; recorded separately, as it is). Below it, from〔X24n0451 0345c17〕 to〔X24n0451 0345c20〕, is the colophon of the copyist of the manuscript—「嘉元三年二月下旬候,以東南院古本終,交合切了」 tr. "In the last ten days of the second month of the third year of Kagen, the collation against the old text of the Tōnan-in was finished and completed"〔X24n0451 0345c17〕, 「但彼本第二、第四欠之,間至第四卷者,以真禪院本補之」 tr. "but that text lacks the second and the fourth; as for the fourth fascicle, it was supplied from the text of the Shinzen-in"〔X24n0451 0345c18〕, 「第二卷者,兩本共欠,迄尋他本,可書續者也。」 tr. "As for the second fascicle, both texts lack it; when another text has been sought out, it should be written in to continue it."〔X24n0451 0345c19〕—what this colophon records is a matter of the copying and transmission of the manuscript (the old text on which it relied having come to its end, the lack of the second and fourth fascicles, and the supplying from another text), belonging to the layer of the manuscript and not to the meaning of the commentary; recorded as it is, without being mixed with Jizang's words of commentary. The last chapter of this treatise, the last chapter of the sūtra explained, and the last chapter of Jizang's commentary—all three close at the same chapter; among them, the end of this treatise is tied to the colophon of the translation hall and the end of the commentary text to the colophon of the manuscript, while the sūtra explained goes straight from 「皆大歡喜」 tr. "all greatly rejoiced"〔T08 0424a13〕 to its fascicle-end title, with no colophon; this co-occurrence is recorded as it is, and is not drawn on as one matter.
Sixth, linking to the treasury (stable citation · soft citation). This chapter's entrustment in 「以般若波羅蜜囑累汝」 tr. "I entrust prajñāpāramitā to you", its instruction to 「愛敬、供養般若波羅蜜」 tr. "love, revere, and make offerings to prajñāpāramitā" as one loves and reveres the Buddha, its judgement that 「有般若在世,則為佛在」 tr. "when there is prajñā in the world, the Buddha is present", its warning 「莫作最後斷種人」 tr. "do not be the last person who cuts off the lineage", and its boundary that 「著心故鬪諍」 tr. "because of the clinging mind, fighting and strife" is what is named extinguishing prajñā—these are what later discussions of the Dharma abiding in the world, of upholding the sūtras and their circulation, and of revering the Dharma as one reveres the Buddha are based on, and are entered as stable citations〔T25n1509 囑累品·卷一百〕; since the places in the other texts that cite this treatise are not yet finalised, the citation is soft, awaiting their word-for-word checking. This belongs to the further resonances of the meaning of prajñā running down into the gate of upholding the Dharma; recorded without judgement.
VIII. Witnesses and Editions
The base text of this chapter is Fascicle 100 of the Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa〔T25 0753c28–0756c19〕 (the main text of the chapter body begins from the chapter title〔T25 0753c28〕 and ends at the fascicle-end title 「大智度論卷第一百」 tr. "Fascicle 100 of the Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa ends here."〔T25 0756c19〕; after it there is no title of a next chapter, and this chapter's range includes the fascicle-end title of the whole treatise); the collation text for the sūtra explained is the chapter "Entrustment" of the Mahāprajñāpāramitā Sūtra〔T08 0423c21–0424a14〕; the ancient-master commentary text for collation is Jizang's Commentary on the Larger Sūtra (X24n0451, covering the sūtra explained at〔X24n0451 0345a04–0345c20〕, including the manuscript's colophon). Huiying's Commentary (X46n0791) lacks an explanation of this chapter (only pointers ahead in its outline), Junzheng's Profound Meaning of the Four Mahāyāna Treatises (X46n0784) has zero hits, and Zhiyi's books and the Annotations have zero hits (see Section VI). The variant collation notes follow the Taishō collation, covering the Taishō base text and the Song, Yuan, Ming, Palace, Shōgozō, and Ishiyama (the Ishiyama-dera manuscript) texts, together with the differences of CBETA's collation—within this chapter's ledger of eighty-one entries the Shōgozō B, the Korean edition, and the Qisha edition are not seen to enter the ledger; the witnesses seen are only the eight, 【大】【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】【石】【CB】.
The collation notes on the chapter title and the fascicle-end title (the basis of the net of chapter names and of the -1 step · entered in the ledger · listed separately and analysed). Unlike Chapter 62, this chapter's collation note on the chapter title and its collation note on the fascicle-end title are both pairs of variant-reading entries within the chapter, each entered among the eighty-one entries of the ledger (entries one, two, eighty, and eighty-one of the ledger below), not set aside. The original wording of the collation note on the chapter-title entry: 「大智度論釋囑累品第九十【大】,(釋八十九品)六字【聖】,摩訶般若波羅蜜品第八十九後囑累【石】,〔大智度論〕-【明】」 tr. "Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa, Commentary on the Chapter on Entrustment, the Ninetieth (Taishō), (explanation of the eighty-ninth chapter) six characters (Shōgozō), the Mahāprajñāpāramitā chapter, the eighty-ninth, followed by Entrustment (Ishiyama), [Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa] omitted (Ming)". Of these, the Shōgozō's collation note records of itself 「六字」 tr. "six characters", while the 「釋八十九品」 tr. "explanation of the eighty-ninth chapter" it records is actually five characters—the number in the original record does not agree with what is recorded, and both are kept as they are, without a judgement made on its behalf; the Ishiyama carries its full style in sūtra-title form; and the Ming's collation note records 「〔大智度論〕-」 tr. "[Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa] omitted", what is deleted being the four characters 「大智度論」 tr. "Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa". The variant readings of this entry have in addition a layer of expanded text: the Shōgozō reads directly 「釋八十九品」 tr. "explanation of the eighty-ninth chapter" without the record of the character count, and the Ming gives directly the full title after the deletion, 「釋囑累品第九十」 tr. "Commentary on the Chapter on Entrustment, the Ninetieth"—different from the wording of the collation note; the ledger below records according to the collation note, and the difference of the expanded text is recorded here. The original wording of the collation note on the fascicle-end title entry: 「大智度論卷第一百【大】,大智度經論卷第一百釋第八十八品下訖第八十九品【聖】,釋八十九品竟大智度經卷一百【石】」 tr. "Fascicle 100 of the Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa (Taishō), Great Wisdom-Crossing Sūtra-Treatise, Fascicle One Hundred, explaining from the latter part of the eighty-eighth chapter through the eighty-ninth chapter (Shōgozō), the explanation of the eighty-ninth chapter ends; Great Wisdom-Crossing Sūtra, Fascicle One Hundred (Ishiyama)". The two entries prove each other: the -1 step of the Shōgozō and Ishiyama texts is consistent at both ends, head and tail, of the whole treatise (for the analysis see Section IV). Further, within the chapter-title entry another entry is embedded (entry two of the ledger below, 「第九十【大】|第九十品【宮】」 tr. "the ninetieth (Taishō) | the ninetieth chapter (Palace)"), and within the fascicle-end title entry too another entry is embedded (entry eighty-one of the ledger below, 「論【大】|論釋【宋】【元】【宮】」 tr. "treatise (Taishō) | treatise, explanation (Song, Yuan, Palace)")—both places are of the type of a small entry nested within a large entry; each is set up separately in the ledger, and they are not merged in the count.
Three cross-reference marks (listed separately · the three listed together as one body). Within the range of this chapter there are three places of variant-reading entries carrying a cross-reference; their type is wholly the same—each has its own paired variant-reading entry, each by its cross-reference points back to the defining entry within this chapter, and each has the same wording as the entry it points to; therefore the three as one body each set up an entry of its own in the ledger:
- 〔T25 0754c18〕 the character 「邪」 tr. "xie, wrong"—what it points to is the entry of this chapter at〔T25 0754c17〕 (entry thirty-one of the ledger below), shared within the chapter itself; it is set up as a separate entry (entry thirty-two of the ledger below).
- 〔T25 0755b12〕 the character 「剛」 tr. "gang, adamantine"—what it points to is the entry of this chapter at〔T25 0755b11〕 (entry forty-four of the ledger below), shared within the chapter itself; it is set up as a separate entry (entry forty-six of the ledger below).
- 〔T25 0756c09〕 the character 「婆」 tr. "po"—what it points to is the entry of this chapter at〔T25 0756c06〕 (entry sixty-six of the ledger below), shared within the chapter itself; it is set up as a separate entry (entry seventy of the ledger below). Since the three each set up an entry, the total of this chapter's variant-reading entries is eighty-one. Entries in the ledger carrying the cross-reference mark number seven: apart from the three entries set up by the three marks above, there are four more—three of them (entries thirty-one, forty-four, and sixty-six of the ledger below) are the defining ends of the three marks listed above; the mark of the remaining one (entry nine of the ledger below, 「犍」 tr. "jian") has its other end 〔not found〕: there is no place in the whole of this treatise whose cross-reference points back to this entry, and its mark is kept as it is, neither supplemented nor deleted.
The difference between the editing and collation layers (one enumeration comma · explicitly set side by side). In the entry at〔T25 0754a12〕, the collated characters of the base text's main text carry an enumeration comma, reading 「讀、誦」 tr. "reading, reciting", while its collation note carries no enumeration comma, reading 「讀誦」 tr. "reading and reciting"—the wording of the two layers differs. The list below in this section records it according to the original wording of the collation note as 「讀誦【大】」 tr. "reading and reciting (Taishō)", while the reader-facing main text still follows the base text's current punctuation, 「受持、讀、誦」 tr. "receive and uphold, read, recite"; the difference between the two layers is explicitly marked, and neither layer is used to alter the other (for the comparative reading of the same type see Section IV).
Two entries of the CBETA emendation layer (not of the type with traditional texts set side by side · listed separately). The two entries at〔T25 0754a24〕 (entry sixteen of the ledger below) and〔T25 0755b11〕 (entry forty-four of the ledger below) are both of this type: CBETA, according to the Palace, Shōgozō, and Ishiyama texts, emends the 「鋼」 tr. "gang, steel" of the base text 【大】 to 「剛」 tr. "gang, adamantine" (「金剛三昧」 tr. "the vajra samādhi", 「執金剛神」 tr. "the vajra-holding spirit"), so its first witness reads 「剛【CB】【宮】【聖】【石】」 tr. "gang, adamantine (CBETA, Palace, Shōgozō, Ishiyama)" while the 【大】 witness reads 「鋼」 tr. "gang, steel". The first witness of these two entries is not another manuscript, but the settled reading of the modern collation layer; the original entries carry within them in addition notes of comparative reading tracing the source of the character form (the former pointing to X21n0383_p0652a13, the latter to T25n1509_p0575b15), which belong to notes of the editorial layer and not to characters of the base text; this section does not record them in the entry text, and records them separately here. This edition's reader-facing text follows the reading of the current CBETA text, 「剛」 tr. "gang, adamantine".
Two additions carrying doctrinal weight (listed separately). First,〔T25 0754a27〕 (entry seventeen of the ledger below) 「持【大】|持是般若【聖】【石】」 tr. "keep (Taishō) | keep this prajñā (Shōgozō, Ishiyama)"—the Shōgozō and Ishiyama texts, in 「汝當好受持無令忘失」 tr. "you should receive and uphold it well, and not let it be forgotten or lost", add after 「持」 tr. "keep" the three characters 「是般若」 tr. "this prajñā"; what they supply is exactly the thing entrusted, an addition carrying doctrinal weight, recorded as it is. Second,〔T25 0755b28〕 (entry fifty-one of the ledger below) 「若【大】|若波羅蜜【石】」 tr. "the second character of prajñā (Taishō) | the same, followed by pāramitā (Ishiyama)"—the Ishiyama adds, after 「般若」 tr. "prajñā", the three characters 「波羅蜜」 tr. "pāramitā", a completion of the term, not a difference of meaning. Neither changes this edition's reading.
The general collation ledger (a full reckoning of eighty-one entries · uniformly according to the original wording of the collation notes · the witnesses within each entry separated by a vertical bar). Below they are listed in full in order of appearance, including the three cross-reference entries (entries thirty-two, forty-six, and seventy of the ledger below), each marked with what it points to. The readings of the variant texts are preserved side by side, while the main text still follows the reading of the current base text:
Collation entries (eighty-one · in order of appearance · cross-reference marks marked with each entry)
- 〔T25 0753c28〕大智度論釋囑累品第九十【大】|(釋八十九品)六字【聖】|摩訶般若波羅蜜品第八十九後囑累【石】|〔大智度論〕-【明】 (chapter-title entry · the first end of the Shōgozō and Ishiyama -1 step · the Shōgozō originally records six characters while what it records is five · the Ming deletes the four characters 「大智度論」 tr. "Mahāprajñāpāramitā-upadeśa" · for the difference of the expanded text see the separate listing above · see Section IV)
- 〔T25 0753c28〕第九十【大】|第九十品【宮】 (embedded within the chapter-title entry · a purely orthographic difference)
- 〔T25 0753c29〕【經】【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【宮】 (an entry on the presence or absence of a structural marker)
- 〔T25 0754a01〕阿難【大】|阿難報【聖】【石】
- 〔T25 0754a02〕陀【大】|他【聖】 (the Sugata, written xiujiatuo / xiujiata)
- 〔T25 0754a06〕常【大】|〔-〕【聖】
- 〔T25 0754a09〕汝【大】|〔-〕【聖】【石】
- 〔T25 0754a12〕讀誦【大】|誦讀【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】 (the collated characters in the main text carry an enumeration comma, reading 「讀、誦」 tr. "reading, reciting" · for the difference between the editing and collation layers see the separate listing above · the sūtra explained has a variant reading of the same type at the same position · see Section IV)
- 〔T25 0754a16〕犍【大】*|揵【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】* (carries a cross-reference mark · the reading of the five texts is exactly the reading of the base text of the sūtra explained · see Section IV)
- 〔T25 0754a16〕隷【大】|羅【石】 (Pūrṇa Maitrāyaṇīputra · the Ishiyama reading is close to the sūtra explained · see Section IV)
- 〔T25 0754a16〕耶【大】|〔-〕【聖】【石】 (together with the entry above, forming 「彌多羅尼子」 tr. "Maitrāyaṇīputra")
- 〔T25 0754a17〕俱【大】|拘【聖】【石】 (Mahākauṣṭhila in two writings · the Shōgozō and Ishiyama reading agrees with the base text of the sūtra explained)
- 〔T25 0754a17〕摩訶【大】|大【聖】【石】 (Mahākātyāyana with mohe / with da · a mirror image of the collation note of the sūtra explained · see Section IV)
- 〔T25 0754a18〕犍【大】|乾【聖】【石】 (gandharva · the sūtra explained also has a 「乾」 tr. "qian" witness at the same position · see Section IV)
- 〔T25 0754a20〕【論】【大】|〔-〕【宋】【宮】 (an entry on the presence or absence of a structural marker)
- 〔T25 0754a24〕剛【CB】【宮】【聖】【石】|鋼【大】 (CBETA emendation layer · the vajra samādhi · the original entry carries in addition a note tracing the character form, not entered in the entry text · see the separate listing above)
- 〔T25 0754a27〕持【大】|持是般若【聖】【石】 (an addition carrying doctrinal weight · see the separate listing above)
- 〔T25 0754b03〕給【大】|養【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0754b04〕弟【大】|第【石】
- 〔T25 0754b09〕至隨【大】|隨至【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0754b11〕佛【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0754b11〕以【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0754b12〕苦【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0754b19〕而【大】|而有【聖】
- 〔T25 0754b20〕密【大】|蜜【宮】【聖】 (mimi ‘secret’ / mimi written with the character for ‘honey’)
- 〔T25 0754b24〕住【大】|地【聖】【石】 (‘abiding in the ten grounds’ / ‘the ground of the ten grounds’)
- 〔T25 0754c03〕拘捨羅【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】 (the Upāya-kauśalya chapter · the four texts omit half its name)
- 〔T25 0754c04〕中【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】
- 〔T25 0754c04〕波羅蜜【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】
- 〔T25 0754c05〕小【大】|小乘【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0754c17〕邪【大】*|耶【聖】* (the defining end of the cross-reference · wrong view written with xie / with ye · the reading Jizang relied on is of the same lineage as the Shōgozō · see Section VI)
- 〔T25 0754c18〕邪【大】*|耶【聖】* (cross-reference entry · what it points to = the entry of this chapter at〔T25 0754c17〕 · shared within the chapter itself)
- 〔T25 0754c21〕尚【大】|當【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0754c23〕導【大】|道【石】
- 〔T25 0754c23〕估【大】|賈【元】【明】 (‘merchant chief’ written with one character gu / with another character gu, ‘trader’)
- 〔T25 0754c24〕偏【大】|遍【宮】
- 〔T25 0755a04〕中【大】|中受【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0755a08〕以【大】|已【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0755a13〕作【大】|作佛【聖】【石】
- 〔T25 0755a25〕懃勞【大】|勞懃【石】
- 〔T25 0755b01〕實【大】|寶【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0755b04〕大【大】|丈【聖】 (‘great radiance’ / ‘the light of one zhang’)
- 〔T25 0755b04〕明【大】|〔-〕【聖】【石】
- 〔T25 0755b11〕剛【CB】【宮】【聖】【石】*|鋼【大】* (CBETA emendation layer · the vajra-holding spirit · carries a cross-reference mark · the original entry carries in addition a note tracing the character form, not entered in the entry text · see the separate listing above)
- 〔T25 0755b11〕則【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0755b12〕剛【CB】【宮】【聖】【石】*|鋼【大】* (cross-reference entry · what it points to = the entry of this chapter at〔T25 0755b11〕 · shared within the chapter itself · CBETA emendation layer · the vajra-holding spirit)
- 〔T25 0755b13〕殺【大】|亟【宋】【宮】|殛【元】【明】 (three witnesses set side by side)
- 〔T25 0755b14〕太【大】|大【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【石】
- 〔T25 0755b27〕人【大】|夫【聖】 (‘ordinary people’ / ‘ordinary beings’)
- 〔T25 0755b28〕聞【大】|問【聖】
- 〔T25 0755b28〕若【大】|若波羅蜜【石】 (completion of the term · see the separate listing above)
- 〔T25 0755c02〕鬪【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0755c11〕世【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【聖】【石】 (lacking in all six texts · one of the entries of this chapter with the widest witness for a missing character)
- 〔T25 0755c16〕在世【大】|世在【聖】
- 〔T25 0756a10〕歡【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0756b03〕不【大】|無【聖】
- 〔T25 0756b06〕作【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】|身【石】 (three witnesses set side by side)
- 〔T25 0756b07〕寶【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】|法【聖】 (three witnesses set side by side · the names Jewel Cloud Sūtra / Dharma Cloud Sūtra bear on the next entry)
- 〔T25 0756b08〕法雲經【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】 (the four texts lack this sūtra name · to be viewed together with the entry above · the witnesses differ in the breadth of the list of great sūtras)
- 〔T25 0756b19〕味【大】|門【宋】【元】【明】【宮】|聞【聖】 (three witnesses set side by side · ‘the flavour of liberation’ / ‘the gate of liberation’)
- 〔T25 0756b21〕俱【大】|但【聖】
- 〔T25 0756b26〕鋡【大】|含【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【石】 (the four Āgamas, in two writings)
- 〔T25 0756b29〕是【大】|是語【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0756c02〕是【大】|〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】
- 〔T25 0756c04〕泥【大】|尼【宋】【元】【明】【宮】【石】 (the Vinaya of the land of Jibin, written pini / pini in another graph · in the same passage of this treatise the two forms 「毘尼」 tr. "Vinaya" and 「毘泥」 tr. "Vinaya (in another writing)" are both seen · see Section II)
- 〔T25 0756c06〕婆【大】*|波【聖】* (the defining end of the cross-reference · vibhāṣā, written piposha / piposha in another graph)
- 〔T25 0756c07〕經【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0756c07〕大【大】|本【聖】
- 〔T25 0756c09〕究【大】|鳩【宋】【元】【明】【宮】 (Kumārajīva, written jiu- / jiu- in the usual graph · the head of the colophon of the translation hall · the reading of the four texts agrees with the usual name in the preface at the head of the treatise)
- 〔T25 0756c09〕婆【大】*|波【聖】* (cross-reference entry · what it points to = the entry of this chapter at〔T25 0756c06〕 · shared within the chapter itself)
- 〔T25 0756c10〕長【大】|常【宮】【聖】 (‘arrived at Chang'an’ / Chang'an written with the character for ‘constant’ · a difference of the same type is also seen in the collation notes of the preface at the head of the treatise)
- 〔T25 0756c10〕夏【大】|邊【聖】 (‘the summer of the fourth year’ / ‘around the fourth year’)
- 〔T25 0756c11〕園【大】|薗【石】 (the Xiaoyao Garden · a variant graph)
- 〔T25 0756c12〕釋【大】|釋此釋【聖】
- 〔T25 0756c14〕品【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0756c15〕論【大】|〔-〕【石】
- 〔T25 0756c15〕具【大】|其【宋】【元】【明】【聖】【石】|〔-〕【宮】 (three witnesses set side by side · ‘the full complete text of the treatise’ / ‘the treatise's own text’ · the basis of the expression 「具本」 tr. "complete text" is the single witness 【大】 alone, and the other six texts all do not read 「具」 tr. "complete"—one of the entries of this chapter carrying the heaviest doctrinal weight; recorded as it is, without judgement)
- 〔T25 0756c15〕本【大】|論本【石】
- 〔T25 0756c16〕足【大】|要足【聖】
- 〔T25 0756c19〕大智度論卷第一百【大】|大智度經論卷第一百釋第八十八品下訖第八十九品【聖】|釋八十九品竟大智度經卷一百【石】 (fascicle-end title entry · the second end of the Shōgozō and Ishiyama -1 step · the Shōgozō also gives the range of chapters it explains · see Section IV)
- 〔T25 0756c19〕論【大】|論釋【宋】【元】【宮】 (embedded within the fascicle-end title entry)
Comparative reading of the witnesses of the sūtra explained (nine places already unfolded · the rest set side by side entry by entry and not unfolded · the gap recorded, awaiting supplement). Within the range of comparative reading of this chapter on the side of the sūtra explained, T223,〔T08 0423c21–0424a14〕, a scan entry by entry finds seven numbered entries (〔T08 0423c27〕〔T08 0424a02〕 ×2〔T08 0424a04〕〔T08 0424a11〕〔T08 0424a12〕〔T08 0424a14〕) and one cross-reference mark (〔T08 0424a05〕 · what it points to is the entry at〔T08 0423c17〕 · shared across chapters); at its chapter title there is no collation note—direct supporting evidence that the chapter names of the two sides are wholly the same (see Section IV). The nine places of variant wording that mutually confirm this treatise (xiujiatuo / xiujiatuo · do not forget it, do not lose it / do not forget or lose it · always close to the Buddha / is always close to the Buddha · the venerable Śāriputra · Mahāmaudgalyāyana in two writings · Maitrāyaṇīputra in two writings · Mahākauṣṭhila in two writings · Mahākātyāyana with mohe / with da · gandharva in two writings) have already been recorded place by place in Section IV, and of them one place (Mahākātyāyana with mohe / with da) has collation notes on both sides forming a mirror image. The other entry on the side of the sūtra explained,〔T08 0424a14〕, is a difference of fascicle number (twenty-seven / thirty / forty), already recorded in Section IV. The setting side by side entry by entry of the remaining entries has not been unfolded; that it has not been unfolded is recorded as it really is, awaiting a later supplementary check, and the count is not filled up with estimates.